Sony ILCE-9M2 α9 II full-frame camera with pro capability User Manual

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Use this manual if you encounter any problems, or have any questions about your product.

Auto Switch Media

If you use two memory-card slots, you can automatically switch to recording with the other memory

card when the memory card in use becomes full.

How to tag the location information on the images

You can record the location information on the images. The location information can be acquired via

a smartphone.

ILCE-9M2 support information

This website provides basic information about the camera and information regarding compatible

lenses and accessories. (Another window will open.)

Names of parts/Icons and indicators

Names of parts

Front side

Rear side
Top side
Side view
Bottom
Basic operations
Using the control wheel
Using the multi-selector
Using MENU items
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
How to use the Quick Navi screen
How to use the keyboard
Icons and indicators
List of icons on the monitor
Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)
Preparing the camera
Checking the camera and the supplied items
Charging the battery pack
Charging the battery pack using a charger
Inserting/removing the battery pack
Charging by connecting to a computer
Battery life and number of recordable images
Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)
Notes on the battery pack
Notes on charging the battery pack
Inserting a memory card (sold separately)
Inserting/removing a memory card
Memory cards that can be used
Notes on memory card
2

Attaching a lens
Attaching/removing a lens
Attaching the lens hood
Attaching accessories
Mount Adaptor
LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor
LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor
Continuous shooting using a Mount Adaptor
Vertical grip
Multi Battery Adaptor Kit
Setting language, date and time
In-Camera Guide
Shooting
Shooting still images
Focusing
Focus Mode
Auto focus
Focus Area
Focus Area Limit
Phase detection AF
Focus Standard
Focus Settings
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
AF/MF control
AF w/ shutter (still image)
AF On
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
Tracking subject (Tracking function)
Focus Hold
3

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Frame Color
Pre-AF (still image)
Eye-Start AF (still image)
AF Tracking Sens. (still image)
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
AF Illuminator (still image)
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
Phase Detect. Area
Circ. of Focus Point
AF Micro Adj.
Aperture Drive in AF (still image)
Manual focus
Manual Focus
Direct manual focus (DMF)
Focus Magnifier
MF Assist (still image)
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
Peaking Setting
Selecting a drive mode (Continuous shooting/Self-timer)
Drive Mode
Cont. Shooting
Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)
Self-timer
Self-timer(Cont)
Self-timer Type
4

Cont. Bracket
Single Bracket
Indicator during bracket shooting
WB bracket
DRO Bracket
Bracket Settings
Interval shooting
Interval Shoot Func.
Using touch functions
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
Touch Pad Settings
Selecting still image size/image quality
File Format (still image)
RAW File Type (still image)
JPEG Quality (still image)
JPEG Image Size (still image)
Aspect Ratio (still image)
APS-C/Super 35mm
Angle of view
Selecting a shooting mode
List of mode dial function
Intelligent Auto
About Scene Recognition
Program Auto
Aperture Priority
Shutter Priority
Manual Exposure
5

Bulb shooting
Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Movie: Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
Controlling the exposure/metering modes
Exposure Comp.
Reset EV Comp.
Dial Ev Comp
Exposure Set. Guide
Exposure step
Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Spot Metering Point
AE lock
AEL w/ shutter (still image)
Exposure Std. Adjust
Exp.comp.set
Zebra Setting
Correcting brightness and contrast automatically
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
Selecting the ISO sensitivity
ISO Setting: ISO
ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit
ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS
Using the zoom
The zoom features available with this product
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
Zoom Setting
About zoom scale
6

Zoom Ring Rotate
White balance
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)
Shutter AWB Lock (still image)
Setting how to process images
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Color Space (still image)
Shutter settings
Shutter Type (still image)
Using the electronic shutter
Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)
Shoot. Start Disp.
Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Reducing blur
SteadyShot
SteadyShot Settings
Lens compensation
Lens Comp.
Noise reduction
Long Exposure NR (still image)
High ISO NR (still image)
Face detection
Regist. Faces Priority
Face Registration (New Registration)
7

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
Face Registration (Delete)
Using the flash
Using flash (sold separately)
Red Eye Reduction
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
FEL lock
Wireless Flash
Using a flash with a sync terminal cord
Recording movies
Shooting movies
Movie w/ shutter
Movie recording formats
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
S&Q Settings
Proxy Recording
Audio Recording
Audio Level Display
Audio Rec Level
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
AF drive speed (movie)
AF Tracking Sens. (movie)
TC/UB Settings
TC/UB Disp. Switch
MOVIE Button
8

Marker Display (movie)
Marker Settings (movie)
4K Output Select (movie)
Video Light Mode
Viewing
Viewing images
Playing back still images
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Playing back movies
Volume Settings
Photo Capture
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Display as Group
Cont. PB for Interval
PB Speed for Interval
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Protecting data
Protecting images (Protect)
Setting Rating function
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Designating images for printing (DPOF)
9

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
Attaching voice memos to images
Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)
Voice Memo PB Volume
Deleting images
Deleting a displayed image
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Delete confirm.
Viewing images on a TV
Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable
Customizing the camera
Customization features of the camera
Registering frequently used functions
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Select Media (Memory recall)
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Customizing the functions of the ring/dial
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Dial Setup
Av/Tv Rotate
Lock Operation Parts
Function Ring(Lens)
Customizing MENU (My Menu)
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Checking images before/after recording
10

Auto Review
Aperture Preview
Shot. Result Preview
Live View Display
Monitor/viewfinder settings
Grid Line
FINDER/MONITOR
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Finder Frame Rate (still image)
Bright Monitoring
Memory card settings
Format
Select REC Folder
New Folder
File/Folder Settings (still image)
File Settings (movie)
Display Media Info.
Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media
Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode
Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media
Recover Image DB
Camera settings
Audio signals
Power Save Start Time
Auto Power OFF Temp.
IR Remote Ctrl
NTSC/PAL Selector
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
11

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
Save/Load Settings
Language 
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
Copyright Info
Version
IPTC Information
Write Serial Number
Demo Mode
Initializing the camera
Setting Reset
Using network functions
Connecting this product and a Smartphone
Imaging Edge Mobile
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)
Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)
Transferring images to a Smartphone
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
12

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF
Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)
Reading location information from a smartphone
Location Info. Link Set.
Using a remote commander with Bluetooth communication
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Transferring images to a TV
View on TV
Changing the network settings
Airplane Mode
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Wired LAN Setting
Edit Device Name
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
Security(IPsec)
Reset Network Set.
Using a computer
Recommended computer environment
Importing images for use on a computer
PlayMemories Home
Installing PlayMemories Home
Connecting to a computer
Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home
Disconnecting the camera from the computer
13

Operating the camera from a computer
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
Transferring images to a computer
Send to Computer
FTP Transfer Func.
Developing RAW images/Remote shooting (Imaging Edge)
Imaging Edge
Remote shooting with a wired LAN (Remote Camera Tool)
Remote Camera Tool
Creating a movie disc
Selecting a disc to be created
Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies
Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies
Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies
List of MENU items
Using MENU items
Camera Settings1
File Format (still image)
RAW File Type (still image)
JPEG Quality (still image)
JPEG Image Size (still image)
Aspect Ratio (still image)
APS-C/Super 35mm
Long Exposure NR (still image)
High ISO NR (still image)
Color Space (still image)
Lens Comp.
Self-timer Type
Bracket Settings
Interval Shoot Func.
14

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)
Select Media (Memory recall)
Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)
Priority Set in AF-S
Priority Set in AF-C
Focus Area
Focus Settings
Focus Area Limit
Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)
AF Illuminator (still image)
Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)
AF Tracking Sens. (still image)
Aperture Drive in AF (still image)
AF w/ shutter (still image)
Pre-AF (still image)
Eye-Start AF (still image)
Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)
Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)
Focus Frame Color
AF Area Auto Clear
Disp. cont. AF area
Phase Detect. Area
Circ. of Focus Point
AF Micro Adj.
Exposure Comp.
Reset EV Comp.
ISO Setting: ISO
ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit
ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS
15

Metering Mode
Face Priority in Multi Metering
Spot Metering Point
Exposure step
AEL w/ shutter (still image)
Exposure Std. Adjust
Flash Mode
Flash Comp.
Exp.comp.set
Wireless Flash
Red Eye Reduction
White Balance
Priority Set in AWB
D-Range Optimizer (DRO)
Auto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Shutter AWB Lock (still image)
Focus Magnifier
Focus Magnif. Time
Initial Focus Mag. (still image)
AF in Focus Mag. (still image)
MF Assist (still image)
Peaking Setting
Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)
Face Registration (New Registration)
Face Registration (Order Exchanging)
Face Registration (Delete)
Regist. Faces Priority
Camera Settings2
16

Movie: 
Exposure Mode
S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode
File Format (movie)
Record Setting (movie)
S&Q Settings
Proxy Recording
AF drive speed (movie)
AF Tracking Sens. (movie)
Auto Slow Shutter (movie)
Initial Focus Mag. (movie)
Audio Recording
Audio Rec Level
Audio Level Display
Audio Out Timing
Wind Noise Reduct.
Marker Display (movie)
Marker Settings (movie)
Video Light Mode
Movie w/ shutter
Shutter Type (still image)
e-Front Curtain Shutter
Release w/o Lens
Release w/o Card
SteadyShot
SteadyShot Settings
Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)
Zoom Setting
Zoom Ring Rotate
DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)
FINDER/MONITOR
17

Finder Frame Rate (still image)
Zebra Setting
Grid Line
Exposure Set. Guide
Live View Display
Shoot. Start Disp.
Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)
Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)
Auto Review
Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)
Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)
Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)
Dial Setup
Av/Tv Rotate
Dial Ev Comp
Function Ring(Lens)
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus
Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking
MOVIE Button
Lock Operation Parts
Audio signals
Network
Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone
Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)
Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF
Send to Computer
FTP Transfer Func.
View on TV
Ctrl w/ Smartphone
Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)
18

Airplane Mode
Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push
Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.
Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)
Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.
Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset
Bluetooth Settings
Location Info. Link Set.
Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl
Wired LAN Setting
Edit Device Name
Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)
Security(IPsec)
Reset Network Set.
Playback
Protecting images (Protect)
Rotating an image (Rotate)
Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)
Rating
Rating Set(Custom Key)
Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)
Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)
Voice Memo PB Volume
Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)
Photo Capture
Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)
Enlarge Initial Mag.
Enlarge Initial Position
Cont. PB for Interval
PB Speed for Interval
19

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)
Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)
Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)
Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)
Display as Group
Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)
Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)
Setup
Monitor Brightness
Viewfinder Bright.
Finder Color Temp.
Volume Settings
Delete confirm.
Power Save Start Time
Auto Power OFF Temp.
NTSC/PAL Selector
Cleaning Mode
Touch Operation
Touch Panel/Pad
Touch Pad Settings
Demo Mode
TC/UB Settings
IR Remote Ctrl
HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution
HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)
HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display
HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)
HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)
HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI
4K Output Select (movie)
20

USB Connection
USB LUN Setting
USB Power Supply
Language 
Date/Time Setup
Area Setting
IPTC Information
Copyright Info
Write Serial Number
Format
Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media
Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode
Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media
Select REC Folder
New Folder
File/Folder Settings (still image)
File Settings (movie)
Recover Image DB
Display Media Info.
Version
Save/Load Settings
Setting Reset
My Menu
Add Item
Sort Item
Delete Item
Delete Page
Delete All
Display From My Menu
Precautions/This product
21

5-010-476-11(1) Copyright 2019 Sony Corporation
Precautions
On cleaning
Cleaning the image sensor
Cleaning Mode
Number of recordable images
Recordable movie times
Using the battery charger abroad
AVCHD format
License
Specifications
Trademarks
List of default setting values
If you have problems
Troubleshooting
Warning messages
22

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Front side

ON/OFF (Power) switch/Shutter button1.

Front dial

You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.

Infrared remote sensor3.

Lens release button4.

Microphone

Do not cover this part during movie recording. Doing so may cause noise or lower the volume.

AF illuminator/Self-timer lamp

When the lens is removed

Mounting index7.

Image sensor*8.

Mount9.

Lens contacts*10.

Do not directly touch these parts.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rear side

Eyepiece Cup

To remove the eyepiece cup

Push the grips at the bottom of the eyepiece cup to the left and right and lift up the cup.

Remove the eyepiece cup when attaching an angle viewfinder (sold separately). Also, select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR], and then switch [Viewfinder(Manual)] and [Monitor(Manual)].

Viewfinder2.

C3 button (Custom button 3)/

(Protect) button3.

MENU button4.

Monitor (For touch operation: Touch panel/Touch pad)

You can adjust the monitor to an easily viewable angle and shoot from any position.

Eye sensor6.

Diopter-adjustment dial

Adjust the diopter-adjustment dial according to your eyesight until the display appears clearly in the viewfinder. If it is

hard to operate the diopter-adjustment dial, remove the eyepiece cup before operating the dial.

MOVIE (Movie) button8.

For shooting: AF-ON (AF On) button

For viewing:

(Enlarge) button

For shooting: AEL button

For viewing:

(Image index) button

10.

Multi-selector11.

For shooting: Fn (Function) button

For viewing:

(Send to Smartphone) button

You can display the screen for [Send to Smartphone] by pressing this button.

12.

Control wheel13.

Access lamp14.

For shooting: C4 button (Custom button 4)

For viewing:

(Delete) button

15.

(Playback) button16.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Top side

Mode dial

The mode dial is unlocked while you hold down the unlock button at the center.

Rear dial

You can quickly adjust the settings for each shooting mode.

Exposure compensation dial

Pressing the lock button at the center switches the exposure compensation dial between the locked and unlocked

status. The dial is unlocked when the lock button is popped up and the white line is visible.

Image sensor position mark

The image sensor is the sensor that converts light into an electric signal. The

mark shows the location of

the image sensor. When you measure the exact distance between the camera and the subject, refer to the

position of the horizontal line.

If the subject is closer than the minimum shooting distance of the lens, the focus cannot be confirmed. Make sure

you put enough distance between the subject and the camera.

C1 button (Custom button 1)5.

C2 button (Custom button 2)6.

Multi Interface Shoe*

Some accessories may not go in all the way and protrude backward from the Multi interface shoe. However, when

the accessory reaches the front end of the shoe, the connection is completed.

Upper: Drive mode dial

The drive mode dial is unlocked while the unlock button at the center is being pressed.

Lower: Focus mode dial

The focus mode dial is unlocked while the unlock button at the front is being pressed.

For details on compatible accessories for the multi interface shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony

service facility. Accessories for the Accessory Shoe can also be used. Operations with other manufactures’ accessories are not guaranteed.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Side view

LAN terminal1.

(Flash sync) terminal2.

Speaker3.

(Microphone) jack

When an external microphone is connected, the built-in microphone turns off automatically. When the external

microphone is a plugin-power type, the power of the microphone is supplied by the camera.

(Headphones) jack5.

HDMI micro jack6.

USB Type-C terminal7.

Multi/Micro USB Terminal*

This terminal supports Micro USB-compatible devices.

Charge lamp9.

Hooks for shoulder strap

Attach both ends of the strap onto the camera.

10.

Notes on USB terminals

You can use either the USB Type-C terminal or the Multi/Micro USB Terminal for supplying power, charging the battery,

and USB communications. However, you cannot conduct these operations with both terminals simultaneously.

The battery charging time does not change according to the terminal you use.

You can use accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, such as a remote commander (sold separately), while

supplying power or performing PC Remote shooting using the USB Type-C terminal.

Notes on the terminal cover

Ensure that the terminal cover is closed before use.

Notes on the cable protector

Use the cable protector to prevent a cable from being disconnected when shooting images with the cable connected.

To attach the cable protector

(N-Mark)

This mark indicates the touch point for connecting the camera and an NFC-enabled Smartphone.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

11.

SLOT 1 (Memory card slot 1)

Supports SD cards only (compatible with UHS-I and UHS-II)

12.

SLOT 2 (Memory card slot 2)

Supports SD cards only (compatible with UHS-I and UHS-II)

13.

For details on compatible accessories for the Multi/Micro USB Terminal, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized

Sony service facility.

To remove the cable protector

Loosen the attachment screw, and then remove the cable protector.

Open both of the jack covers on the monitor side.1.

Fit the two hooks (A) on the rear side of the cable protector into the two notches (B) to the left of the USB Type-C

terminal and Multi/Micro USB Terminal, and then align the cable protector with the terminal part of the camera.

Push the attachment screw (C) in and turn it to secure the cable protector.

Insert the cable into one of the jacks.4.

Insert the cable into the holding part and then secure the cable with the fixing dial (D).

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bottom

Lock lever1.

Battery insertion slot2.

Battery cover

When attaching an accessory such as a vertical grip (sold separately), remove the battery cover.

To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.

To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by

attaching the shaft on the opposite side.

Tripod socket hole

Use a tripod with a screw less than 5.5 mm (7/32 inches) long. Otherwise, you cannot firmly secure the camera, and

damage to the camera may occur.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using the control wheel

You can select setting items by turning or pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel. Your selection is

determined when you press the center of the control wheel.

The DISP (Display Setting) and ISO (ISO) functions are assigned to the top/right side of the control wheel. In

addition, you can assign selected functions to the left/right/bottom side and the center of the control wheel, and to the

rotation of the control wheel.

During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel or by

turning the control wheel.

Related Topic

Focus Standard

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using the multi-selector

Put your finger right on top of the multi-selector to manipulate it more precisely.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible

Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], you can move the focus area by pressing the multi-selector

up/down/left/right.

The [Focus Standard] function is assigned to the center of the multi-selector in the default settings.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Focus Standard

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You

can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

Hint

You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [

Custom Key] or [ Custom

Key], and then pressing that key.

Related Topic

Add Item

Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.

Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by

turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to

another MENU tab.

You can move to another MENU tab by turning the front dial.

You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.

You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.

Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.

Display From My Menu

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets

you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign

[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode (

Custom Key), movie

shooting mode (

Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).

Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.

You can assign functions to the following keys.

For examples of custom key settings, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/custom.php

Hint

You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with

the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the AEL button.

AF-ON Button1.

Custom Button 32.

Custom Button 23.

Custom Button 14.

AEL Button5.

Center Button6.

Control Wheel /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button7.

Custom Button 48.

Multi-Slc Center Btn9.

Fn/

Button10.

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [

Custom Key]. If you want to assign

a function to recall while playing back images, select [

Custom Key].

Note

You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold

button.

If you assign [Follow Custom (

)] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], but the function is one that is unavailable in the

movie shooting mode such as [

JPEG Quality] or [Flash Mode], the function will not be recalled when you press the key in the

movie shooting mode.

If you assign [Follow Custom (

/ )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], the camera will switch to the shooting mode

and recall the assigned function when you press the key in the playback mode.

Related Topic

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Move to the [Rear1] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [AEL Button] and

press the center of the control wheel.

Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the

center.

If you press the AEL button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and

the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the AEL button.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn

(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to

the function menu.

For details on functions that can be registered to the function menu, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/function.php

Hint

You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along

with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and

then press the Fn (Function) button.

Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the

function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Select the desired setting by turning the front dial, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].1.

Select

(Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right

side of the control wheel, and then press the center.

Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and

press the center of the control wheel.

(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

How to use the Quick Navi screen

The Quick Navi screen is a function optimized for shooting with the viewfinder, that lets you control settings directly.

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 5, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the

function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor].

Place a

mark on [For viewfinder] and then select [Enter].

Press the DISP on the control wheel to set the screen mode to [For viewfinder].

Press the Fn button to switch to the Quick Navi screen.

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual

displays.

Auto mode

P/A/S/M mode

Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

Select the desired setting by turning the front dial.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.

Note

Items that are gray on the Quick Navi screen are not adjustable.

When using [Creative Style], etc., some of the setup tasks can only be accomplished on a dedicated screen.

Related Topic

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

How to use the keyboard

When manual character entry is required, a keyboard is displayed on the screen.

Move the cursor on desired key using the control wheel, then press the center to enter.

To cancel input, select [Cancel].

Input box

The characters you entered are displayed.

Switch character types

Each time you press this key, the character type will switch between alphabet letters, numerals and symbols.

Keyboard

Each time you press this key, the characters corresponding to that key will be displayed one-by-one in order.

For example: If you want to enter “abd”

Press the key for “abc” once to display “a” → select “

”((5) Move cursor) and press the key for “abc” twice to

display “b” → press the key for “def” once to display “d.”

Finalize

Finalizes the entered characters.

Move cursor

Moves the cursor in the input box to the right or left.

Delete

Deletes the character preceding the cursor.

Switches the next character to a capital or lowercase letter.

Enters a space.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

List of icons on the monitor

The displayed contents and their positions in the illustrations are just guidelines, and may differ from the actual displays.

Descriptions are given below the indications of the icons.

Icons on the shooting screen

Monitor mode

Viewfinder mode

Shooting mode/Scene recognition

P P* A S M

Shooting mode

Scene Recognition icons

Camera settings

NO CARD

Memory card status

100/1 h 30 m

Remaining number of recordable images/Recordable time of movies

Writing data / Number of images left to write

Aspect ratio of still images

24M / 21M / 20M / 16M / 10M / 9.2M / 8.7M / 6.9M / 6.0M / 5.3M / 5.1M / 4.0M / 2.6M / 2.3M / 2.2M / 1.7M

Image size of still images

RAW

RAW recording (compressed/uncompressed)

X.FINE FINE STD

JPEG Quality

XAVC S 4K XAVC S HD AVCHD

File format of movies

Record setting of movies

120p 60p 60i 30p 24p 100p 50p 50i 25p

Frame rate of movies

Proxy Recording

120fps 60fps 30fps 15fps 8fps 4fps 100fps 50fps 25fps 12fps 6fps 3fps 2fps 1fps

Frame rate for slow/quick motion shooting

APS-C/Super 35mm

Flash charge in progress

Setting Effect OFF

AF Illuminator

Flickering detected

SteadyShot off/on, Camera shake warning

SteadyS. Focal Len. / Camera shake warning

Smart Zoom/ Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom

PC remote

Bright Monitoring

Shooting without shutter sound

Remote control

No audio recording of movies

Wind Noise Reduct.

IPTC information writing on

Focus Cancel

Tracking Cancel

Spot Focus

Performing [Spot Focus]

NFC active

Bluetooth connection available / Bluetooth connection unavailable

Connected to smartphone / Not connected to smartphone

Obtaining location information / Location information cannot be obtained

Airplane Mode

Overheating warning

Database file full / Database file error

Battery

Remaining battery

Remaining battery warning

USB power supply

Shooting settings

Drive Mode

Flash Mode /Wireless Flash/Red Eye Reduction

±0.0

Flash Comp.

Focus Mode

Focus Area

File Format

Metering Mode

7500K A5 G5

White Balance (Auto, Preset, Underwater Auto, Custom, Color temperature, Color filter)

D-Range Optimizer /Auto HDR

+3 +3 +3

Creative Style /Contrast, saturation, and sharpness

Picture Effect

Face/Eye Priority in AF

Shutter Type

Prioritize Rec. Media

Focus indicator/exposure settings

Focus indicator

1/250

Shutter speed

Icons on the playback screen

Single-image playback

F3.5

Aperture value

Exposure compensation/Metered Manual

ISO400

ISO AUTO

ISO400

ISO sensitivity

AE lock/FEL lock/AWB lock

Guides/other

Tracking Cancel

Guide display for tracking

Focus Cancel

Guide display for canceling focusing

Control wheel function

Guide display for My Dial

Bracket indicator

Spot metering area

Exposure Setting Guide

Shutter speed indicator

Aperture indicator

Histogram

Digital level gauge

STBY REC

Movie recording standby/Movie recording in progress

1:00:12

Actual movie recording time (hours: minutes: seconds)

Audio Level Display

REC Control

00:00:00:00

Time code (hours: minutes: seconds: frames)

00 00 00 00

User Bit

Histogram display

Basic information

Playback media

View Mode

IPTC Information

Rating

Protect

DPOF

DPOF set

3/7

File number/Number of images in the view mode

NFC active

Remaining battery

Display as Group

Proxy movie included

A Voice Memo is attached.

Camera settings

Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen.”

Shooting settings

Picture Effect error

Auto HDR error

35mm

Lens focal length

Refer to “Icons on the shooting screen” for other icons displayed in this area.

Image information

Latitude/longitude information

2019 -1-1 10:37PM

Date of recording

100-0003

Folder number - file number

C0003

File name of movie

Histogram (Luminance/R/G/B)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

You can change the display contents on the screen.

Press the DISP (Display Setting) button.

To switch the information displayed on the viewfinder, press the DISP button while looking into the viewfinder.

Each time you press the DISP button, the screen display changes.

The displayed contents and their position are just a guideline, and may differ from the actual display.

During shooting (Monitor)

Display All Info. → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level → For viewfinder → Display All Info.

During shooting (Viewfinder)

Level → No Disp. Info. → Histogram → Level

During playback (Monitor/Viewfinder)

Display Info. → Histogram → No Disp. Info. → Display Info.

Histogram display

A histogram shows the luminance distribution, displaying how many pixels there are by luminance. It shows darker

toward the left and brighter toward the right.

The histogram changes depending on the exposure compensation.

A peak at the right or left end of the histogram indicates that the image has an overexposed or underexposed area,

respectively. You cannot correct such defects using a computer after shooting. Perform exposure compensation before

shooting as necessary.

(A): Pixel count

(B): Brightness

Note

The viewfinder display and the monitor display for shooting can be set separately. Look through the viewfinder to set the display

settings for the viewfinder.

The information in the histogram display does not indicate the final photograph. It is information about image displayed on the

screen. The final result depends on the aperture value, etc.

The histogram display is extremely different between shooting and playback in the following cases:

When the flash is used

When shooting a low luminance subject such as a night scene

In movie mode, [For viewfinder] cannot be displayed.

Hint

The following are not displayed in the default settings.

Graphic Display

Monitor Off

Display All Info. (when using the viewfinder)

To change the display modes that are switched when you press the DISP button, select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) →

[DISP Button] and change the setting.

Related Topic

If the image has an overexposed or underexposed area, the corresponding section will blink on the histogram

display (overexposed/underexposed warning).

The settings for playback are also applied in [Auto Review].

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :

Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.

Display All Info. :

Shows recording information.

No Disp. Info. :

Does not show recording information.

Histogram :

Displays the luminance distribution graphically.

Level :

Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in

either direction, the indicator turns to green.

For viewfinder*:

Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the

viewfinder.

Monitor Off*:

Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating

MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.

Note

If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with

are available.

These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].

Related Topic

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Checking the camera and the supplied items

The number in parentheses indicates the number of pieces.

Camera (1)

Battery Charger (1)

Power cord (mains lead) (1)*

NP-FZ100 Rechargeable Battery Pack (1)

USB Type-C™ cable (1)

Shoulder Strap (1)

Body Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Cable Protector (1)

Multiple power cords may be supplied with your camera. Use the appropriate one that matches your country/region.

Shoe Cap (1) (Attached to the camera)

Eyepiece Cup (1) (Attached to the camera)

Instruction Manual (1)

Reference Guide (1)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Charging the battery pack using a charger

Insert the battery pack into the battery charger.

Place the battery pack on the battery charger aligning the direction of

mark.

Slide the battery pack to the end towards the arrow.

Connect the power cord (supplied) to the battery charger, and connect the battery charger to the wall outlet

(wall socket).

When charging starts, the CHARGE lamp (A) lights up in orange. The CHARGE lamp turns off when the

charging level reaches approximately 90%.

You can check the approximate charging status with the charging status indicator lamp (B) as shown in the

following table. (The orange color indicates the lighting of the lamp.) The charging status indicator lamp turns off

when charging is finished.

Charging status CHARGE lamp/Charging status indicator lamp

Immediately after attaching the battery pack - 30%

30% - 60%

60% - 90%

90% - Fully charged

Full charging completed

Note

We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C and 30°C (50°F and 86°F). You may not

be able to efficiently charge the battery pack outside this temperature range.

Use a nearby wall outlet (wall socket) when using the AC Adaptor/Battery Charger. If any malfunction occurs, disconnect the plug

from the wall outlet (wall socket) immediately to disconnect from the power source.

If you use the product with a charge lamp, note that the product is not disconnected from the power source even when the lamp

turns off.

When you use a completely new battery pack or a battery pack that has not been used for a long time, the CHARGE lamp may

flash quickly when the battery is charged. If this happens, remove the battery pack and then re-insert it to recharge.

Do not continuously or repeatedly charge the battery pack without using it if it is already fully charged or close to fully charged.

Doing so may cause a deterioration in battery performance.

Be sure to use only genuine Sony brand battery packs.

Related Topic

Notes on the battery pack

The charge level shown by the charging status indicator lamp and the percentages in the above table are rough

guides.

The actual status may differ depending on the ambient temperature and the condition of the battery pack.

Charging time (Full charge): The charging time is approximately 150 min.

The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).

Charging may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.

When the CHARGE lamp and charging status indicator lamp light up and then immediately turn off, the battery

pack is fully charged.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Inserting/removing the battery pack

To charge the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera

Turn the camera off, and then connect the camera to a computer, etc. using a USB cable.

If the camera is turned on, you will be able to use the camera with power supplied from the computer, etc., but the

battery pack will not charge.

Use the supplied USB Type-C cable or a cable that is compliant with the USB specification.

To remove the battery pack

Make sure that the access lamp is not lit, and turn off the camera. Then, slide the lock lever (A) and remove the battery

pack. Be careful not to drop the battery pack.

Open the battery cover.

Insert the battery pack while pressing the lock lever (A) with the tip of the battery until the battery locks into

place.

Close the cover.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Charging by connecting to a computer

The battery pack can be charged by connecting the camera to a computer using a USB cable.

Note

If the product is connected to a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop battery level decreases. Do

not leave the product connected to a laptop computer for an extended period of time.

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established

between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or

waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Proper operation cannot be guaranteed on all types of computers.

Charging cannot be guaranteed with a custom-built computer, modified computer, or a computer connected through a USB hub.

The camera may not operate correctly when other USB devices are used at the same time.

Related Topic

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on charging the battery pack

Turn off the product, and connect to the USB terminal of the computer.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Battery life and number of recordable images

The above estimates for battery life and number of recordable images apply when the battery pack has been fully

charged. The battery life and number of images may decrease depending on the conditions of use.

The battery life and number of recordable images are estimates based on shooting with the default settings under the

following conditions:

Using the battery pack at an ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).

Using a Sony SDXC memory card (U3) (sold separately)

Using a FE 28-70mm F3.5-5.6 OSS lens (sold separately)

The numbers for “Shooting (still images)” are based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following

conditions:

(CIPA: Camera & Imaging Products Association)

One picture is taken every 30 seconds.

The power is turned on and off once every ten times.

The number of minutes for movie shooting is based on the CIPA standard and shooting under the following

conditions:

The image quality is set to XAVC S HD 60p 50M /50p 50M.

Actual shooting (movies): Battery life based on repeated shooting, zooming, shooting stand-by, turning on/off, etc.

Continuous shooting (movies): No operations other than starting and ending shooting are performed.

Battery life Number of images

Shooting (still images)

Screen mode — Approx. 690

Viewfinder mode — Approx. 500

Actual shooting (movies)

Screen mode Approx. 120 min. —

Viewfinder mode Approx. 110 min. —

Continuous shooting (movies)

Screen mode Approx. 200 min. —

Viewfinder mode Approx. 195 min. —

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

Use an AC adaptor, etc. to shoot and play back images while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). This

conserves the camera's battery power.

Note

The camera will not activate if there is no remaining battery. Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

If you use the camera while power is being supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket), make sure that the icon that shows that

powering via USB is in progress (

) is displayed on the monitor.

Do not remove the battery pack while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). If you remove the battery pack, the

camera will be turned off.

Do not remove the battery pack while the access lamp is lit. The data in the memory card may be damaged.

As long as the power is on, the battery pack will not be charged even if the camera is connected to the AC Adaptor, etc.

Under certain conditions, power may be supplied from the battery pack supplementarily even if you are using the AC adaptor, etc.

Do not remove the USB cable while power is supplied from a wall outlet (wall socket). Before you remove the USB cable, turn off

the camera.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the continuous recording time may be shortened while power is supplied from

a wall outlet (wall socket).

When using a mobile charger as a power source, confirm that it is fully charged before use. Also, be careful of the remaining

power on the mobile charger during use.

Insert the battery pack into the camera.

Connect the camera to the wall outlet (wall socket) with a USB cable and an AC adaptor, etc.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Notes on the battery pack

Notes on using the battery pack

Be sure to use only battery packs specified for this product.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.

Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.

Do not leave the battery pack in extremely hot places, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.

Charging the battery pack

Charge the battery pack (supplied) before using the product for the first time.

The charged battery pack will discharge little by little even if you do not use it. Charge the battery pack each time

before you use the product so that you do not miss any opportunities to shoot images.

Do not charge battery packs except battery packs specified for this product. Doing so can result in leaks,

overheating, explosions, electric shocks, burns, or injuries.

If the charge lamp flashes when the battery pack is not fully charged, remove the battery pack or disconnect the USB

cable from the camera and the charger and then reinsert it to recharge.

We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10 °C and 30 °C (50 °F and 86 °F).

The battery pack may not be effectively charged in temperatures outside this range.

When you connect this product and a laptop computer that is not connected to a power source, the laptop’s battery

charge may decrease. Do not charge this product using the laptop computer for too long.

Do not turn on/restart a computer, wake a computer from sleep mode, or turn off a computer while this product is

connected to the computer via USB cable. Doing so may cause a malfunction of this product. Disconnect the product

and the computer before performing the above operations.

We do not guarantee charging if you are using a self-built or modified computer.

After charging is finished, disconnect the charger from the wall outlet (wall socket) if charging with a charger, or

disconnect the USB cable from the camera if charging the battery pack while it is inserted into the camera. Not doing

so may result in a shorter battery life.

Remaining battery indicator

The remaining battery indicator appears on the screen.

A: Battery level high

B: Battery exhausted

It takes about one minute for the correct remaining battery indicator to appear.

The correct remaining battery indicator may not be displayed under some operating or environmental conditions.

If the remaining battery indicator does not appear on the screen, press the DISP (Display Setting) button to display it.

Charging time (Full charge)

The charging time is approximately 150 minutes using the battery charger (supplied).

The above charging time applies when charging a fully depleted battery pack at a temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). Charging

may take longer depending on conditions of use and circumstances.

Effective use of the battery pack

Battery performance decreases in low temperature environments. So in cold places, the operational time of the

battery pack is shorter. To ensure longer battery pack use, we recommend putting the battery pack in your pocket

close to your body to warm it up, and insert it in the product immediately before you start shooting. If there are any

metal objects such as keys in your pocket, be careful of causing a short-circuit.

The battery pack will run down quickly if you use the flash or continuous shooting function frequently, turn the power

on/off frequently, or set the monitor very bright.

We recommend preparing spare battery packs and taking trial shots before taking the actual shots.

If the battery terminal is dirty, you may not be able to turn on the product or the battery pack may not be properly

charged. In that case, clean the battery by lightly wiping off any dust using a soft cloth or a cotton swab.

How to store the battery pack

To maintain the battery pack’s function, charge the battery pack and then fully discharge it in the camera at least once a

year before storing it. Store the battery in a cool, dry place after removing it from the camera.

On battery life

The battery life is limited. If you use the same battery repeatedly, or use the same battery for a long period, the

battery capacity decreases gradually. If the available time of the battery is shortened significantly, it is probably time

to replace the battery pack with a new one.

The battery life varies according to how the battery pack is stored and the operating conditions and environment in

which each battery pack is used.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Notes on charging the battery pack

If the product's charge lamp flashes while charging, remove the battery pack being charged, and then insert the

same battery pack firmly back into the product. If the charge lamp flashes again, this may indicate a faulty battery or

that a battery pack other than the specified type has been inserted. Check that the battery pack is the specified type.

If the battery pack is the specified type, remove the battery pack, replace it with a new or different one and check that

the newly inserted battery is charging correctly. If the newly inserted battery is charging correctly, the previously

inserted battery may be faulty.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Inserting/removing a memory card

Explains how to insert a memory card (sold separately) to the product.

Hint

Open the memory card cover.

Insert the SD card into the slot 1.

When using two memory cards, insert the second one into the slot 2.

Insert the memory card with the terminal side facing toward you, until it clicks into place.

Memory card types that can be inserted into the memory card slots

Both the slot 1 (upper) and the slot 2 (lower) only support SD memory cards (compatible with UHS-II).

This camera does not support Memory Stick media.

Close the cover.

When you use a memory card with the camera for the first time, it is recommended that you format the card on the camera for

more stable performance of the memory card.

You can change the memory card slot for recording by selecting MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Prioritize

Rec. Media].

To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the

image type (still image/movie), select MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Recording Mode].

To remove the memory card

Open the memory card cover and make sure that the access lamp (A) is not lit, then push in the memory card lightly

once to remove it.

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Notes on memory card

Format

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Memory cards that can be used

This camera only supports SD memory cards (UHS-II compatible). When using microSD memory cards with this camera,

be sure to use the appropriate adaptor.

Note

When an SDHC memory card is used to record an XAVC S movie over extended periods of time, the recorded movies will be

divided into files 4 GB in size. The divided files can be handled as a single file by importing them to a computer using

PlayMemories Home.

When recording a movie on memory cards in both the slot 1 and the slot 2 with following camera settings, insert two memory

cards with the same file system. XAVC S movies cannot be recorded simultaneously when using a combination of the exFAT file

system and FAT32 file system.

[

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] or [XAVC S HD].

[Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Simult. (

)] or [Simult. ( / )].

Fully charge the battery pack before attempting to recover the database files on the memory card.

Related Topic

Notes on memory card

Number of recordable images

Recordable movie times

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

Recording format Supported memory card

Still image SD/SDHC/SDXC card

AVCHD SD/SDHC/SDXC card (Class 4 or faster, or U1 or faster)

XAVC S

4K 60Mbps*

HD 50Mbps or lower*

HD 60Mbps

SDHC/SDXC card (Class 10, or U1 or faster)

4K 100Mbps*

HD 100Mbps

SDHC/SDXC card (U3)

Including when recording proxy movies at the same time

Memory card File system

SDXC memory card exFAT

SDHC memory card FAT32

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Notes on memory card

If you repeatedly shoot and delete images for a long time, fragmentation of data in a file in the memory card may

occur, and movie recording may be interrupted in the middle of shooting. If this happens, save your images to a

computer or other storage location, then execute [Format] using this camera.

Do not remove the battery pack or the memory card, disconnect the USB cable, or turn the camera off while the

access lamp is lit up. This may cause the data on the memory card to become damaged.

Be sure to back up the data for protection.

Not all memory cards are guaranteed to operate correctly.

Images recorded on an SDXC memory card cannot be imported to or played on computers or AV devices that are

not compatible with exFAT when connected using a USB cable. Make sure that the device is compatible with exFAT

before connecting it to the camera. If you connect your camera to an incompatible device, you may be prompted to

format the card. Never format the card in response to this prompt, as doing so will erase all data on the card. (exFAT

is the file system used on SDXC memory cards.)

Do not expose the memory card to water.

Do not strike, bend or drop the memory card.

Do not use or store the memory card under the following conditions:

High temperature locations such as in a car parked under the sun

Locations exposed to direct sunlight

Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances present

If the memory card is used near areas with strong magnetization, or used in locations subject to static electricity or

electrical noise, the data on the memory card may become damaged.

Do not touch the terminal section of the memory card with your hand or a metal object.

Do not leave the memory card within the reach of small children. They might accidentally swallow it.

Do not disassemble or modify the memory card.

The memory card may be hot just after it has been used for a long time. Be careful when you handle it.

Memory card formatted with a computer is not guaranteed to operate with the product. Format the memory card

using this product.

Data read/write speeds differ depending on the combination of the memory card and the equipment used.

Do not press down hard when writing in the memo space on the memory card.

Do not attach a label on the memory card itself nor on a memory card adaptor.

If the write-protect switch or delete-protect switch of a memory card is set to the LOCK position, you cannot record or

delete images. In this case, set the switch to the record position.

To use a microSD memory card with this product:

Be sure to insert the memory card into a dedicated adaptor. If you insert a memory card into the product without a

memory card adaptor, you might not be able to remove it from the product.

When inserting a memory card into a memory card adaptor, be sure that the memory card is inserted in the

correct direction and then insert it as far as it will go. If the card is not inserted properly, it may result in a

malfunction.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Attaching/removing a lens

Turn off the camera before attaching or removing the lens.

Remove the body cap (A) from the camera and the rear lens cap (B) from the rear of the lens.

It is recommended that you attach the front lens cap when you have done shooting.

Mount the lens by aligning the two white index marks (mounting indexes) on the lens and camera.

Hold the camera with the lens mount facing down to prevent dust and debris from entering the camera.

While pushing the lens lightly toward the camera, turn the lens slowly in the direction of the arrow until it

clicks into the locked position.

To remove the lens

Keep pressing the lens release button (A) and turn the lens in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

After removing the lens, attach the body cap to the camera and the lens caps to the front and rear of the lens to prevent

dust and debris from entering the camera and lens.

Note

When attaching/removing the lens, work quickly in a dust-free location.

Do not press the lens release button when attaching a lens.

Do not use force when attaching a lens.

A Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is required to use an A-mount lens (sold separately). When using the Mount Adaptor, refer to

the operating manual supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

If you want to shoot full-frame images, use a full-frame size compatible lens.

When you use a lens with a tripod socket, attach a tripod to the tripod socket of the lens to help balance the weight of the lens.

When carrying the camera with a lens attached, hold both the camera and the lens firmly.

Do not hold the part of the lens that is extended for zoom or focus adjustment.

Related Topic

Attaching the lens hood

Be sure to hold the lens straight when attaching it.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Attaching the lens hood

We recommend that you use the lens hood to prevent light outside the shooting frame from affecting the image.

Note

Attach the lens hood properly. Otherwise, the lens hood may not have any effect or may be partially reflected in the image.

When the lens hood is attached properly, the lens hood index (red line) matches the red index mark on the hood. (There may be

no lens hood index on some lenses.)

Remove the lens hood when using the flash as the lens hood blocks the flash light and may appear as a shadow on the image.

To store the lens hood after shooting, attach the lens hood to the lens backward.

Related Topic

Attaching/removing a lens

Match the shape of the lens hood mounting part and lens head, and turn the lens hood clockwise until it

clicks.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Mount Adaptor

Using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately), you can attach an A-mount lens (sold separately) to this product.

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Mount Adaptor.

Note

You may not be able to use the Mount Adaptor or auto-focus with certain lenses. Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized

Sony service facility on compatible lenses.

The LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip (sold separately) are not designed to be attached at

the same time. If you attach them at the same time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the vertical grip will become

narrow, making the camera difficult to hold.

You cannot use the AF illuminator when using an A-mount lens.

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.

You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

It may take a long time or may be difficult for the product to focus, depending on the lens used or the subject.

Related Topic

LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor

LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

LA-EA1/LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following

functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

LA-EA1: Not available

LA-EA3: Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only

Autofocus:

Available with SAM/SSM lens only

AF system:

Phase Detection AF

AF/MF select:

Can be changed using the operating switch on the lens.

Focus Mode:

Single-shot AF/Continuous AF

When using a Mount Adaptor in the movie mode, adjust the aperture value and the focus manually.

Available focus area:

[Wide]/[Zone] [Center]/[Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking]

SteadyShot:

In-body

Related Topic

Focus Area

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

If you use the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), the following

functions are available.

Full frame shooting:

LA-EA2: Not available

LA-EA4: Available with full frame shooting-compatible lenses only

Autofocus:

Available

AF system:

Phase Detection AF, which is controlled by the dedicated AF sensor inside the Mount Adaptor

AF/MF select:

Lenses that do not support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens.

Lenses that support DMF (with a focus mode switch): Can be changed using the focus mode switch on the lens. When

the focus mode switch on the lens is set to AF, you can change the focusing method by operating the camera.

Other lenses (without a focus mode switch): Can be changed by operating the camera.

Focus Mode:

Single-shot AF/Continuous AF/DMF*

Even if [Priority Set in AF-S] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to [AF].

Even if [Priority Set in AF-C] is set to [Balanced Emphasis], it will temporarily switch to [Release].

Available focus area:

Wide/Center/Flexible Spot/Tracking

SteadyShot:

In-body

Related Topic

Focus Area

Only available when using lenses that support Direct Manual Focus.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Continuous shooting using a Mount Adaptor

When a Mount Adaptor is attached to the camera, the auto-focusing method during continuous shooting varies

depending on the settings for [Cont. Shooting] and [

Shutter Type].

When using the LA-EA1 Mount Adaptor (sold separately), LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)

or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)

When using the LA-EA3 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)

Update the firmware of the Mount Adaptor to the latest version in advance.

Note

When you are using a Mount Adaptor, you cannot perform blackout-free continuous shooting in [Continuous Shooting: Lo] mode.

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

Shutter Type

Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter

Continuous Shooting: Hi

The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.

Continuous Shooting: Mid

Continuous Shooting: Lo The focus continuously tracks the subjects.

Shutter Type

Mechanical Shutter Auto/Electronic Shutter

Continuous Shooting:

The focus continuously tracks the

subjects.

The focus continuously tracks the

subjects.

Continuous Shooting:

Mid

The focus continuously tracks the subjects.

Continuous Shooting:

The focus continuously tracks the subjects.

When the F-value is greater than F16, the focus does not track the subjects. The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot.

The continuous shooting speed varies depending on the [Focus Mode] setting.

[Single-shot AF]/[DMF]/[Manual Focus]: Maximum of 20 images per second (the focus is locked to the setting in the first shot).

[Continuous AF]: Maximum of 10 images per second

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Vertical grip

You can attach a vertical grip (sold separately) to this product and record vertically oriented images. When attaching the

vertical grip, remove the battery cover in advance.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the vertical grip.

To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.

To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching

the shaft on the opposite side.

You can attach the removed battery cover to the vertical grip so that you do not lose it.

When a vertical grip is attached to this product, the battery remaining is displayed as

Hint

The battery pack inside the vertical grip can be charged while the vertical grip is attached to the camera.

Turn the camera off and connect it to a device such as a computer using the USB cable.

Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.

Note

The LA-EA2/LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) and the vertical grip are not designed to be attached at the same time. If

you attach them at the same time, the space between the Mount Adaptor and the vertical grip will become narrow, making the

camera difficult to hold.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit

You can use the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit (sold separately) with this camera to shoot for long periods. When using the

Multi Battery Adaptor Kit, remove the camera's battery cover.

For details, refer also to the operating instructions supplied with the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit.

To remove the battery cover

Pull the battery cover release lever (A) in the direction of the arrow, and then remove the battery cover.

To attach the battery cover

Insert the shaft on one side of the battery cover into the attachment site, and then push in the battery cover by attaching

the shaft on the opposite side.

Note

While the plug-in plate of the Multi Battery Adaptor Kit is inserted in the camera, do not slide the battery lock lever of the camera.

The plug-in plate will be ejected from the camera if you do so.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Setting language, date and time

The setting screen for language, date and time is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time,

initialize this product or when the internal rechargeable backup battery has discharged.

On maintaining the date and time

This camera has an internal rechargeable battery for maintaining the date and time and other settings regardless of

whether the power is on or off, or whether the battery pack is charged or discharged.

To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack into the camera, and leave the product

for 24 hours or more with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery pack is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out.

Consult your service facility.

Hint

To set the date and time or geographic location again after the date and time setting is finished, select MENU →

(Setup) →

[Date/Time Setup] or [Area Setting].

Note

If the date and time setting is canceled halfway, the setting screen for the date and time appears every time you turn on the

camera.

This camera does not have a function for inserting the date on images. You can insert the date on images and then save and

print them using PlayMemories Home (for Windows only).

Turn on the camera.

The language setting screen will appear and then setting screen for date and time will appear.

Select your language, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Check that [Enter] is selected on the screen, then press the center.

Select your desired geographic location, and then press the center.

Select a setting item using the top/bottom side of the control wheel or by turning the control wheel, then

press the center.

Set [Daylight Savings], [Date/Time], and [Date Format] using the top/bottom/left/right sides, then press the

center.

Midnight is indicated as 12:00 AM, and noon as 12:00 PM when you set [Date/Time].

Change the values using the top/bottom when you set [Date/Time].

Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to set other items, then select [Enter] and press the center.

Related Topic

Date/Time Setup

Area Setting

Using the control wheel

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

In-Camera Guide

The [In-Camera Guide] displays descriptions of MENU items, Fn (Function) items, and settings.

Select the MENU or Fn item for which you want to see a description, and then press the

(Delete) button

(A).

The descriptions of the item are displayed.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shooting still images

To shoot images with the focus locked on the desired subject (Focus-lock)

Shoots images with the focus locked on the desired subject in auto focus mode.

Select the desired shooting mode by turning the mode dial.

Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock release button in the center of the mode dial.

Adjust the monitor angle, and hold the camera. Or look through the viewfinder and hold the camera.

When a zoom lens is mounted, enlarge images by rotating the zoom ring.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

When the image is in focus, a beep sounds and the indicator (such as

) lights up.

Press the shutter button fully down.

Turn the focus mode dial to select AF-S (Single-shot AF).

Turn the focus mode dial while holding down the focus mode dial lock release button.

Place the subject within the AF area and press the shutter button halfway down.2.

Hint

When the product cannot focus automatically, the focus indicator flashes and the beep does not sound. Either recompose the

shot or change the focus setting. In [Continuous AF] mode,

lights up and the beep indicating that the focus has been

achieved does not sound.

An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is

displayed.

Related Topic

List of mode dial function

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

Playing back still images

Auto Review

Focus Mode

Focus Area

The focus is locked.

If it is difficult to focus on the desired subject, set [Focus Area] to [Center] or [Flexible Spot].

Keep pressing the shutter button halfway down, and place the subject back in the original position to re-compose the

shot.

Press the shutter button down fully to take the picture.4.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Mode

Selects the focus method to suit the movement of the subject.

Setting details

AF-S (Single-shot AF):

The product locks the focus once focusing is complete. Use this when the subject is motionless.

AF-C (Continuous AF):

The product continues to focus while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down. Use this when the subject is

in motion. In [Continuous AF] mode, there is no beep when the camera focuses.

DMF (DMF):

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than

when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

MF (Manual Focus):

Adjusts the focus manually. If you cannot focus on the intended subject using auto focus, use manual focus.

Focus indicator

(lit):

The subject is in focus and the focus is locked.

(flashing):

The subject is not in focus.

(lit):

The subject is in focus. The focus will be adjusted continuously according to the movements of the subject.

(lit):

Focusing is in progress.

Subjects on which it is difficult to focus using auto focus

Dark and distant subjects

Subjects with poor contrast

Subjects seen through glass

Fast-moving subjects

Reflective light or shiny surfaces

Flashing light

Back-lit subjects

Turn the focus mode dial (B) while pressing the focus mode dial lock release button (A) and select the

desired mode.

Continuously repetitive patterns, such as the facades of buildings

Subjects in the focusing area with different focal distances

Hint

In [Continuous AF] mode, you can lock the focus by pressing and holding the button that has been assigned the [Focus Hold]

function.

When you set the focus to infinity in the manual focus mode or the direct manual focus mode, make sure that the focus is on a

sufficiently distant subject by checking the monitor or the viewfinder.

Note

When [Continuous AF] is set, the angle of view may change little by little while focusing. This does not affect the actual recorded

images.

Even if the focus mode dial is set to AF-S or DMF, the focus mode will switch to [Continuous AF] when shooting movies or when

the mode dial is set to

Related Topic

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Manual Focus

MF Assist (still image)

Phase detection AF

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.

Menu item details

Wide :

Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway

down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.

Zone :

Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.

Center :

Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the

composition you want.

Flexible Spot :

Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a

narrow area.

Expand Flexible Spot :

If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority

area for focusing.

Tracking:

When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus

area. This setting is available only when the [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the

[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control

wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or

expand flexible spot.

Examples of the focusing frame display

The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger

area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.

When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or LA-EA3) (sold separately), the focusing frame

for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing

frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

You can move the focus area in [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot], [Tracking:

Expand Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Zone] by operating the multi-selector. If you assign [Focus Standard] to the

center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can move the focusing frame back to the center of the monitor by

pressing the center of the multi-selector.

You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],

and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)

You can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key to

which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will

switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.

For example:

Hint

In the default settings, [Focus Area] is assigned to the C2 button.

[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]

[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

Note

[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to

(Movie) or or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Area Limit

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].

Hint

When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or

[

Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas

with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.

If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area

Limit].

Note

Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,

add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [

Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the

registered settings will change.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you

want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with

will be available as settings.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Phase detection AF

When there are phase detection AF points within the auto focus area, the product uses the combined autofocus of the

phase detection AF and contrast AF.

Note

Phase detection AF is available only when an applicable lens is attached. If you use a lens that does not support phase detection

AF, you cannot use [

AF Tracking Sens.], [ AF Tracking Sens.] or [ AF drive speed]. Also, even if you use a previously

purchased applicable lens, the phase detection AF might not function unless you update the lens. For details on compatible

lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Standard

If you assign [Focus Standard] to the desired custom key, you can recall useful functions such as focusing on a subject

in the center of the screen automatically in accordance with the focus area settings.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible

Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]:

Pressing the key moves the focusing frame back to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide], [Center], [Tracking: Wide] or [Tracking: Center]:

The camera focuses on the center of the screen when you press the key.

Note

You cannot set the [Focus Standard] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button].

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Focus Area

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Focus Standard]

function to the key.

To use the [Focus Standard] function while shooting movies, select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [

Custom Key] → the desired button, and then assign [Focus Standard] to the key.

Press the key to which [Focus Standard] is assigned.

What you can do by pressing the key varies depending on the setting for [Focus Area].

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Settings

Configures the focus functions using the front dial/rear dial or the control wheel.

When the focus mode is set to auto focus or Direct Manual Focus

You can adjust the focus area settings and the position of the focusing frame. The focusing frame can be moved only

when the [Focus Area] is set to the following:

[Zone]

[Flexible Spot]

[Expand Flexible Spot]

[Tracking: Zone]

[Tracking: Flexible Spot]

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

Front dial: Moves the focusing frame up/down.

Rear dial: Moves the focusing frame right/left.

Control wheel: Selects the focus area.

When the focus mode is set to Manual Focus

You can set the area to be magnified when focusing manually.

Front dial: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.

Rear dial: Moves the area to be magnified right/left.

Control wheel: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Settings].

Perform settings using the front/rear dial or control wheel.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the

camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera

position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera

(horizontal/vertical).

AF Point Only:

Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus

Area] is fixed.

AF Point + AF Area:

Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera

(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical

with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note

If the setting for [

Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [

Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point

+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or [S&Q Motion]

While the shutter button is pressed halfway down

During movie shooting

While using the digital zoom function

While the auto-focusing is activated

When [Focus Settings] are activated

During continuous shooting

During the countdown for the self-timer

When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal

focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF/MF control

You can easily switch the focusing mode from auto to manual and vice versa while shooting without changing your

holding position.

Menu item details

AF/MF Control Hold :

Switches the focusing mode while the button is held down.

AF/MF Ctrl Toggle :

Switches the focusing mode until the button is pressed again.

Note

You cannot set the [AF/MF Control Hold] function to [Left Button], [Right Button] or [Down Button] of the control wheel.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired button → [AF/MF

Control Hold] or [AF/MF Ctrl Toggle].

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus

and the exposure separately.

Menu item details

On:

The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you

focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

Related Topic

AF On

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Pre-AF (still image)

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Set [

AF w/ shutter] to [Off].1.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [Focus Magnifier]

functions to the desired keys.

Set [

Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.3.

Press the AF-ON button to focus.4.

Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-

adjustments of the focus.

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.6.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF On

You can focus without pressing the shutter button halfway down. The settings for the focus mode dial will be applied.

Hint

Set [

AF w/ shutter] to [Off] when you do not want to perform auto focusing using the shutter button.

Set [

AF w/ shutter], [ Pre-AF], and [ Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to focus at a specific shooting distance predicting the

position of the subject.

Related Topic

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Pre-AF (still image)

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Press the AF-ON (AF On) button while shooting in autofocus mode.

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.

There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the

appropriate method according to your purpose.

[Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.]

[Eye AF] via a custom key

Details can be found here.

Subject detection

The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater

priority.

The camera will detect faces/eyes

exclusively.

Advance

preparation

Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in

AF] → [On].

Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [

Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

How to perform

[Eye AF]

Press the shutter button halfway down.

Press the key to which you have assigned

the [Eye AF] function*.

Specifications

When the camera detects a face or eye inside

or around the designated focus area, it

focuses on the face or eye with greater

priority.

If the camera does not detect any faces or

eyes inside or around the designated focus

area, it will focus on another detectable

subject.

The camera focuses exclusively on

faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,

regardless of the setting for [Focus

Area].

The camera will not automatically focus

on another subject if no face or eye is

detected anywhere on the screen.

Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]

Follows the setting designated with [Focus

Mode]

Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area]

The focus area temporarily becomes the

entire screen, regardless of the setting for

[Focus Area].

How the following

functions under

[Face/Eye AF Set.]

work

Subject

Detection

Right/Left Eye

Select

Face/Eye

Frame Display

Animal Eye

Display

Follows the setting designated with each menu

item

Follows the setting designated with each

menu item

Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while

you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].

Hint

Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)

If you use the [Tracking] function under [Focus Area], you can maintain focus on a moving eye or face. For details, refer to the

following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/ilc/autofocus/ilce9m2/l/eyeaf.php

Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :

Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is

activated. ([On]/[Off])

(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)

Subject Detection :

Selects the target to be detected.

[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.

[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.

Right/Left Eye Select :

Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only

the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.

[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.

[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

Face/Eye Frame Display :

Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])

Animal Eye Display :

Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])

Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is

enabled, the face detection frame turns white.

In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects

the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other

registered faces turn reddish-purple.

Eye detection frame

A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,

depending on the settings.

The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.

100

[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as

you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen

regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.

(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or

eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs

normal auto-focusing.)

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch

the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom

key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.

The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to

automatic eye detection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Pressing the center of the multi-selector

Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)

Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)

Pressing the MENU button

Hint

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection

frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection

frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.

If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face

or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].

Note

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human], the eyes of animals are not detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal],

human faces are not detected.

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye

AF] function to the key.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.2.

Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]

function.

To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.

101

Right/Left Eye Select

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Regist. Faces Priority

The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:

When the person is wearing sunglasses.

When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.

In low-light or back-lit conditions.

When the eyes are closed.

When the subject is in the shade.

When the subject is out of focus.

When the subject is moving too much.

If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.

Depending on the circumstances, the eyes cannot be focused.

When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes

when no human faces are detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.

When recording movies with [Subject Detection] set to [Animal], you cannot use the eye detection function.

The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.

You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:

Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.

[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]

Focus Magnifier

Movie shooting with [

Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]

When [

Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],

and [

4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]

Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or

eyes that are in focus.

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].

To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once

you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.

Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Focus Area

AF Area Auto Clear

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

102

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While

the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

Hint

Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the

focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note

If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[

AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:

[Eye AF]

[

Eye-Start AF]

[

Pre-AF]

[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

Magnify the image by pressing the center of the multi-selector, and then adjust the position by pressing the

multi-selector up/down/left/right.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of

in the center of the screen.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

103

104

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Tracking subject (Tracking function)

This camera has the function of tracking which tracks the subject, and keeps marking it with the focusing frame.

You can set the start position to track by selecting from focusing areas, or by specifying by touch operation. The required

function varies depending on the setting method.

You can refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Setting the start position to track by focusing area ([Tracking] under [Focus Area])

The selected focusing frame is set as the start position to track, and the tracking starts by pressing the shutter button

halfway down.

This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Setting the start position to track by touch operation ([Touch Tracking] under [Func. of Touch

Operation])

You can set the subject to track by touching it on the monitor.

This function is available in still image shooting mode and movie shooting mode.

This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF], [Continuous AF], or [DMF].

Changing the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] temporarily ([Tracking On] under [

Custom

Key])

Even [Focus Area] is set to other than [Tracking], you can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking]

while pressing and holding the key to which you have assigned [Tracking On] function.

Assign the [Tracking On] function to a desired key using [

Custom Key] in advance.

This function is available in still image shooting mode.

This function is available when [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Focus Area

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

105

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Hold

Locks the focus while the key to which the Focus Hold function has been assigned is pressed.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU→

(Camera Settings2)→[ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] →assign the [Focus Hold]

function to the key of your choice.

Focus and press the key to which the [Focus Hold] function has been assigned.

Press the shutter button while holding down the key.

106

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when

shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you

can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

How to call up the registered focus area

Hint

When a focusing frame is registered using [

AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the

key is pressed.

Note

A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:

The mode dial is set to either

(Movie) or

While [Touch Focus] is being performed

While using the digital zoom function

While [Touch Tracking] is being performed

While focusing

While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:

The mode dial is set to either

(Auto Mode), (Movie) or

When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts] setting is locked to [Off].

Related Topic

Focus Area

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].1.

Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.2.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].1.

Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and

then press the shutter button to shoot images.

107

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [

AF Area Registration].

Related Topic

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].

108

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Frame Color

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,

make it more visible by changing its color.

Menu item details

White:

Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.

Red:

Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.

109

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,

the screen may shake.

Menu item details

On:

Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note

[

Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

110

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

Menu item details

On:

Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Off:

Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint

[

Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA2, LA-EA4) (sold separately) are attached.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

111

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3(Standard) / 2 / 1(Locked on):

Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.

Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Tracking Sens.] → desired setting.

112

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF] or

[DMF] and the subject is remaining still.

Menu item details

AF:

Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.

Release:

Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Balanced Emphasis:

Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-C

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

113

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the

subject is in motion.

Menu item details

AF:

Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.

Release:

Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Balanced Emphasis:

Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-S

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

114

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing

the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.

Menu item details

Auto:

The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.

Off:

Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note

You cannot use [

AF Illuminator] in the following situations:

When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].

When the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF].

When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.

When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

If the Multi Interface Shoe is equipped with a flash with an AF illuminator function, when the flash is turned on, the AF illuminator

will turn on as well.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close

range.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

115

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is

achieved.

Menu item details

On:

The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

Off:

The focus area is displayed all the time.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

116

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in

[Continuous AF] mode.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the focus area that is in focus.

Off:

Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note

When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:

[Center]

[Flexible Spot]

[Expand Flexible Spot]

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

117

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Phase Detect. Area

Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the Phase Detection AF area.

Off:

Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.

Note

Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase

Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that

have not been updated. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or

local authorized Sony service facility.

When using an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) to attach an A-Mount lens (sold separately), this product’s

Phase Detection AF cannot be used.

When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase

Detect. Area] is set to [On].

When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.

118

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Circ. of Focus Point

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with

[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the

other quickly.

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :

The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Circulate :

The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Note

Even if you set [Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not circulate diagonally.

Related Topic

Focus Area

MENU→

(Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

119

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses

with an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper

position when using this adjustment.

Hint

It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a

bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note

When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears

for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a

new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses

using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the

supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an

unsupported lens.

You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].

Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

[amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the

value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.

120

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.

Standard:

Uses the standard aperture drive system.

Silent Priority:

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in

[Standard].

Note

When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the

monitor. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become slower or the screen may flicker. To avoid these phenomena, change

the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

Focus during continuous shooting is locked to the setting of the first shot when the parameter for [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to

[Standard] or [Silent Priority], and the F-value is greater than F16.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

121

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Manual Focus

When it is difficult to focus properly in the autofocus mode, you can adjust the focus manually.

Note

When you use the viewfinder, adjust the diopter level to obtain the correct focus on the viewfinder.

The displayed focus distance is just a reference.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

Peaking Setting

MF Assist (still image)

Turn the focus mode dial (B) while pressing the focus mode dial lock release button (A) and select MF.

Rotate the focusing ring to achieve sharp focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.

The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

122

123

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Direct manual focus (DMF)

You can make fine adjustments manually after performing auto focusing, letting you focus on a subject more quickly than

when using the manual focus from the beginning. This is convenient in situations such as macro shooting.

Related Topic

Peaking Setting

Turn the focus mode dial (B) while pressing the focus mode dial lock release button (A) and select DMF.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus automatically.

Keep the shutter button pressed halfway down, and then rotate the focusing ring to achieve a sharper

focus.

When you rotate the focusing ring, the focus distance is displayed on the screen.

The focus distance is not displayed when the Mount Adaptor (sold separately) is attached.

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot an image.

124

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.

Unlike with [

MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can

perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.

While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move

the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the multi-selector.

Hint

While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus

magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic

MF Assist (still image)

Focus Magnif. Time

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge by

pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.

You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus

Mag.].

Confirm the focus.

Press the

(Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.

When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [

AF in

Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed

halfway down.

When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,

different functions are performed depending on the [

AF in Focus Mag.] setting.

When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) →

[Focus Magnif. Time].

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

125

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

Touch Operation

126

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct

Manual Focus shooting.

Hint

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.

Time].

Note

You cannot use [

MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[

MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Focus Magnif. Time

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

127

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [

MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

Menu item details

2 Sec:

Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.

5 Sec:

Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.

No Limit:

Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MF Assist (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

128

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x4.7:

Displays a 4.7-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x3.1:

Displays a 3.1-times enlarged image.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

129

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Peaking Setting

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct

Manual Focus.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:

Sets whether to display peaking.

Peaking Level:

Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.

Peaking Color:

Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.

Note

Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.

130

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Drive Mode

Select the appropriate mode for the subject, such as single shooting, continuous shooting or bracketing shooting.

Setting item details

Single Shooting :

Normal shooting mode.

Cont. Shooting :

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

Self-timer :

Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was

pressed.

Bracket:

Shoots images using the bracketing function. The type of bracketing function can be set by MENU →

(Camera

Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Bracket Type].

Related Topic

Cont. Shooting

Self-timer

Self-timer(Cont)

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Select the desired drive mode by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

131

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cont. Shooting

Shoots images continuously while you press and hold down the shutter button.

Setting item details

Continuous Shooting: Hi / Continuous Shooting: Mid/ Continuous Shooting: Lo

Hint

To continuously adjust the focus and exposure during continuous shooting, set as follows:

[Focus Mode]: [Continuous AF]

[

AEL w/ shutter]: [Off] or [Auto]

Note

The shooting speed during continuous shooting becomes slower when [

RAW File Type] is set to [Uncompressed].

Continuous shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

[Picture Effect] is set to one of the following: [Rich-tone Mono.]

[DRO/Auto HDR] is set to [Auto HDR].

The speed of continuous shooting decreases when you shoot with a flash.

Related Topic

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Focus Mode

Turn the drive mode dial and select the desired mode.

Turn the drive mode dial while pressing the drive mode dial lock release button.

Shutter Type

Mechanical Shutter

Auto/Electronic Shutter

Continuous Shooting: Hi

10 images per second at maximum

20 images per second at maximum

Continuous Shooting: Mid

8 images per second at maximum

10 images per second at maximum

Continuous Shooting: Lo 3 images per second at maximum

5 images per second at maximum

The value shown is the shooting speed when [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Standard]. When [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Focus Priority],

the speed of continuous shooting may become slower.

The focus is locked to the setting in the first shot when [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Standard] or [Silent Priority], and the F-value is greater

than F16.

When the Focus Mode is set to AF-C (Continuous AF), the speed of continuous shooting varies depending on the attached lens. For details,

check the support page on compatible lenses.

During uncompressed RAW shooting, 12 images are shot per second at maximum.

132

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Shutter Type (still image)

Using the electronic shutter

133

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Sets whether to display an indicator of the remaining time for which continuous shooting can be performed at the same

shooting speed.

Menu item details

Always Display:

Always displays the indicator when the drive mode is set to [Cont. Shooting].

Shoot.-Only Display:

Displays the indicator only while continuous shooting is performed.

Not Displayed:

Does not display the indicator.

Hint

When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will

decrease.

Related Topic

Cont. Shooting

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Cont. Shoot. Length] → desired setting.

134

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Self-timer

Shoots an image using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since the shutter button was

pressed. Use the 5-second/10-second self-timer when you are going to be in the picture, and use the 2-second self-timer

to reduce camera-shake caused by pressing the shutter button.

Menu item details

The mode determines the number of seconds until a picture is taken after the shutter button is pressed.

Self-timer(Single): 10 sec

Self-timer(Single): 5 sec

Self-timer(Single): 2 sec

Hint

Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.

Select a drive mode other than

(Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial to cancel the self-timer.

Set [Audio signals] to [Off] to turn off the beeping sound during the self-timer countdown.

To use the self-timer in bracket mode, select

(Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial, then select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Selftimer during Bracket].

Related Topic

Audio signals

Select (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-timer Type] → [Self-timer(Single)] → desired mode.

The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and a picture is taken after the designated number of seconds have

elapsed.

135

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Self-timer(Cont)

Shoots a designated number of images using the self-timer after a designated number of seconds have elapsed since

the shutter button was pressed. You can choose the best from multiple shots.

Menu item details

For example, three images are shot when 10 seconds have elapsed after the shutter button is pressed when [Self-

timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.] is selected.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 10 Sec. 5 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 5 Sec. 5 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 3 Img.

Self-timer(Cont.): 2 Sec. 5 Img.

Hint

Press the shutter button again to stop the count of the self-timer.

Select a drive mode other than

(Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial to cancel the self-timer.

Select (Self-timer) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-timer Type] → [Self-timer(Cont)] → desired mode.

The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The self-timer lamp flashes, a beep sounds, and pictures are taken after the designated number of seconds has

elapsed. The designated number of pictures are taken continuously.

136

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Self-timer Type

When shooting with the self-timer, sets how many images are recorded and how many seconds elapse from when you

press the shutter button until when the shutter is released.

Menu item details

Self-timer(Single):

Shoots one image using the self-timer (10 seconds / 5 seconds / 2 seconds).

Self-timer(Cont):

Shoots images continuously using the self-timer (3 images after 10 seconds / 5 images after 10 seconds / 3 images after

5 seconds / 5 images after 5 seconds / 3 images after 2 seconds / 5 images after 2 seconds).

Related Topic

Self-timer

Self-timer(Cont)

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-timer Type] → desired setting.

The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

137

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cont. Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select

an image that suits your purpose after recording.

Menu item details

For example, the camera shoots a total of three images continuously with an exposure value shifted by plus or minus 0.3

EV when [Cont. Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected.

Note

The last shot is shown on the auto review.

When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other

than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When the flash is used, the product performs flash bracket shooting, which shifts the amount of flash light even if [Cont. Bracket]

is selected. Press the shutter button for each image.

Related Topic

Bracket Settings

Indicator during bracket shooting

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Bracket Type] → [Cont. Bracket] → desired

mode.

The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

The base exposure is set at the first shot.

Keep pressing and holding the shutter button until bracket shooting is finished.

138

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Single Bracket

Shoots multiple images while automatically shifting the exposure from base to darker and then to lighter. You can select

the image that suits your purpose after recording.

Since a single picture is taken each time you press the shutter button, you can adjust the focus or the composition for

each shot.

Menu item details

For example, when [Single Bracket: 0.3EV 3 Image] is selected, three images are shot one at a time with the exposure

value shifted up and down in increments of 0.3 EV.

Note

When [ISO AUTO] is selected in [Manual Exposure] mode, the exposure is changed by adjusting the ISO value. If a setting other

than [ISO AUTO] is selected, the exposure is changed by adjusting the shutter speed.

When the exposure is compensated, the exposure is shifted based on the compensated value.

Bracket shooting is unavailable in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

Related Topic

Bracket Settings

Indicator during bracket shooting

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Bracket Type] → [Single Bracket] → desired

mode.

The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

Press the shutter button for each image.

139

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Indicator during bracket shooting

Viewfinder

Ambient light* bracketing

3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps

Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Monitor (Display All Info. or Histogram)

Ambient light* bracketing

3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps

Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing

3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps

Flash compensation -1.0 EV

Monitor (For viewfinder)

Ambient light* bracketing (upper indicator)

3 images shifted by 0.3 EV steps

Exposure compensation ±0.0 EV

Flash bracketing (lower indicator)

3 images shifted by 0.7 EV steps

Flash compensation -1.0 EV

Note

During bracket shooting, guides equal to the number of images to be shot are displayed over/under the bracket indicator.

When you start single bracket shooting, the guides will disappear one by one as the camera records images.

Ambient light: A generic term for non-flash light including natural light, electric bulb and fluorescent lighting. Whereas the flash light blinks for a

moment, ambient light is constant, so this kind of light is called "ambient light."

140

141

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

WB bracket

Shoots a total of three images, each with different color tones according to the selected settings for white balance, color

temperature and color filter.

Menu item details

White Balance Bracket: Lo:

Records a series of three images with small changes in the white balance (within the range of 10MK

-1*

White Balance Bracket: Hi:

Records a series of three images with large changes in the white balance (within the range of 20MK

-1*

-1

is the unit that indicates the capability of color temperature conversion filters and indicates the same value as

"mired."

Note

The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic

Bracket Settings

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Bracket Type] → [WB bracket] → desired mode.

The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

142

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

DRO Bracket

You can record a total of three images, each at a different degree of D-Range Optimizer value.

Menu item details

DRO Bracket: Lo:

Records a series of three images with small changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 2, and Lv 3).

DRO Bracket: Hi:

Records a series of three images with large changes in the D-Range Optimizer value (Lv 1, Lv 3, and Lv 5).

Note

The last shot is shown on the auto review.

Related Topic

Bracket Settings

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → [Bracket Type] → [DRO Bracket] → desired

mode.

The setting screen for [Bracket Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

143

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bracket Settings

You can set the type of bracket or the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure

bracketing or white balance bracketing.

Menu item details

Bracket Type:

Sets the type of bracket shooting.

(Cont. Bracket/Single Bracket/WB bracket/DRO Bracket)

Selftimer during Bracket:

Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released

if using the self-timer.

(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)

Bracket order:

Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

(0→-→+/-→0→+)

Related Topic

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

144

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in

advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the

computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.

For details on interval shooting, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/interval.php

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:

Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])

Shooting Start Time:

Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59

seconds)

Shooting Interval:

Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second

to 60 seconds)

Number of Shots:

Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)

AE Tracking Sensitivity:

Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select

[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])

Shutter Type in Interval:

Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])

Shoot Interval Priority:

Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]

and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])

Hint

If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen

for interval shooting.

To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval

Shooting] → [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will

remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the

desired setting.

Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen

for interval shooting.

145

[AEL hold]

[

AEL hold]

[AF/MF Control Hold]

[Regist. AF Area hold]

[AWB Lock Hold]

[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the

still images, you can preview the result.

Note

You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space

on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able

to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the

dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using

the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [

Shutter Type].

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M

Related Topic

Imaging Edge

Cont. PB for Interval

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

146

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

Menu item details

On:

Activates the touch operation.

Off:

Deactivates the touch operation.

Related Topic

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Touch Pad Settings

Touch Panel/Pad

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

147

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Panel/Pad

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when

shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel

operations or touch pad operations.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:

Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with

the viewfinder.

Touch Panel Only:

Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.

Touch Pad Only:

Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Related Topic

Touch Operation

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.

148

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available

when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode

You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a

position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)

The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.

Hint

In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible

Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.

When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

Note

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].

Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the

monitor while looking through the viewfinder.

To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the

monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.

When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted

using the focus ring.

To cancel spot focus, touch

or press the center of the control wheel.

149

The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].

When using the digital zoom

When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Touch Panel/Pad

150

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.

Select MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.

Hint

To cancel tracking, touch

or press the center of the control wheel.

Note

[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:

When shooting movies with [

Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].

When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom

When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Related Topic

Touch Operation

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].

Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

151

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :

Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous

operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

Touch Position Mode:

Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the

focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative

Position]).

Operation Area:

Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations

caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

About Touch Positioning Mode

Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can

directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.

Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger

over a wide area.

Hint

In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as

the entire screen.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.

152

Related Topic

Touch Operation

153

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

Menu item details

RAW:

Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for

professional purposes.

RAW & JPEG:

A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG

for viewing, and a RAW for editing.

JPEG:

The image is recorded in the JPEG format.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge is needed. With Imaging Edge, you

can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white

balance, saturation or contrast of the image.

You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.

RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits

in the following shooting modes:

[

Long Exposure NR]

[BULB]

[Cont. Shooting] when [

RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]

You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed using [

RAW File Type].

Note

If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

Related Topic

JPEG Image Size (still image)

RAW File Type (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

154

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

RAW File Type (still image)

Selects the file type for RAW images.

Menu item details

Compressed:

Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with

[Uncompressed].

Uncompressed:

Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [

RAW File Type], the file size

of the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.

Note

When [Uncompressed] is selected for [

RAW File Type], the icon on the screen switches to . is also displayed

while an image shot in uncompressed RAW format is played back.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ RAW File Type] → desired setting.

155

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

JPEG Quality (still image)

Selects the JPEG image quality when [

File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:

Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.

This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.

Related Topic

File Format (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.

156

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

JPEG Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The

smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

Menu item details

When recording in the full frame size

When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels

M: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

L︓21M 5328×4000 pixels

M︓9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

S︓5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels

M: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels

M: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

L: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

M: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

S: 2.6M 1968×1312 pixels

157

Note

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”

Related Topic

Aspect Ratio (still image)

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

L︓9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

M︓5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

S︓2.3M 1744×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

L: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

M: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

S: 2.2M 1968×1112 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

L: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

M: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

S: 1.7M 1312×1312 pixels

158

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aspect Ratio (still image)

Menu item details

3:2:

Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film

4:3:

The aspect ratio is 4:3.

16:9:

The aspect ratio is 16:9.

1:1:

The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

159

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

APS-C/Super 35mm

Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you

select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

Menu item details

On:

Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.

Auto:

Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.

Off:

Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note

When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting

results.

When you set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [On], the angle of view will be the same as when shooting with an APS-C size image

sensor.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [APS-C/Super 35mm] → desired setting.

160

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Angle of view

The angle of view switches to the equivalent of full frame or APS-C/Super 35mm, depending on the setting for [APS-

C/Super 35mm] and the attached lens. The angle of view is also different for still image shooting and movie shooting.

Angle of view equivalent to full frame

(A) When shooting still images (with [ Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2])

(B) When recording movies

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to full frame in the following situations.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Auto], and a full frame shooting-compatible lens is attached.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Off].

Angle of view equivalent to APS-C size/Super 35mm

(A) When shooting still images (with [ Aspect Ratio] set to [3:2])

(B) When recording movies

The camera shoots with an angle of view equivalent to the APS-C size or Super 35mm in the following situations. The

angle of view becomes approx. 1.5 times the focal length indicated on the lens.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [Auto], and an APS-C-format dedicated lens is attached.

[APS-C/Super 35mm] is set to [On].

Note

When recording full-frame movies with [

File Format] set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] set to [30p 60M] or [30p

100M], the angle of view (B) is equivalent to approx. 1.2 times the focal length indicated on the lens.

161

(A) Angle of view equivalent to full-frame

(B) Angle of view during XAVC S 4K movie recording set to [30p 60M]/[30p 100M]

Related Topic

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

APS-C/Super 35mm

162

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

List of mode dial function

You can switch the shooting mode according to the subject or purpose of shooting.

Available functions

(Intelligent Auto):

Allows you to shoot with automatic scene recognition.

P (Program Auto):

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value (F value)).

Also you can select various settings using the menu.

A (Aperture Priority):

Allows you to adjust the aperture and shoot when you want to blur the background, etc.

S (Shutter Priority):

Allows you to shoot fast-moving subjects etc., by manually adjusting the shutter speed.

M (Manual Exposure):

Allows you to shoot still images with the desired exposure by adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the

aperture value (F value)).

1/2/3 (Memory recall):

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or numeric settings registered in advance.

(Movie):

Allows you to change the exposure mode for movie recording.

(S&Q Motion):

Allows you to shoot slow-motion and quick-motion movies.

Related Topic

Intelligent Auto

Program Auto

Aperture Priority

Shutter Priority

Manual Exposure

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Movie: Exposure Mode

Turn the mode dial to select the desired shooting mode.

Turn the mode dial while pressing the mode dial lock release button in the center of the mode dial.

163

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

164

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Intelligent Auto

The camera shoots with automatic scene recognition.

Note

The product will not recognize the scene when you shoot images with zoom functions other than optical zoom.

The product may not properly recognize the scene under certain shooting conditions.

For [Intelligent Auto] mode, most of the functions are set automatically, and you cannot adjust the settings on your own.

Related Topic

About Scene Recognition

Set the mode dial to (Auto Mode).

The shooting mode will be set to

(Intelligent Auto).

Point the camera at the subject.

When the camera recognized the scene, the icon for the recognized scene appears on the screen.

Adjust the focus and shoot the image.

165

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

About Scene Recognition

Scene Recognition operates in [Intelligent Auto] mode.

This function allows the product to automatically recognize the shooting conditions and shoot the image.

Scene Recognition

When the product recognizes certain scenes, the following icons and guides are displayed on the first line:

(Portrait)

(Infant)

(Night Portrait)

(Night Scene)

(Backlight Portrait)

(Backlight)

(Landscape)

(Macro)

(Spotlight)

(Low Light)

(Night Scene using a tripod)

Related Topic

Intelligent Auto

166

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Program Auto

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

You can set shooting functions such as [ISO].

Program Shift

When you are not using a flash, you can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing

the appropriate exposure set by the camera.

Turn the front/rear dial to select the aperture value and shutter speed combination.

“P” on the screen changes to “P*” when you turn the front/rear dial.

To cancel program shift, set the shooting mode to other than [Program Auto], or turn off the camera.

Note

According to the brightness of the environment, the program shift may not be used.

Set the shooting mode to another one than “P” or turn off the power to cancel the setting you made.

When the brightness changes, the aperture (F-value) and shutter speed also change while maintaining the shift amount.

Set the mode dial to P (Program Auto).

Set the shooting functions to your desired settings.

Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

167

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aperture Priority

You can shoot by adjusting the aperture and changing the range in focus, or by defocusing the background.

Note

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic

Aperture Preview

Set the mode dial to A (Aperture Priority).

Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.

Smaller F-value: The subject is in focus, but objects in front of and beyond the subject are blurred.

Larger F-value: The subject and its foreground and background are all in focus.

If the aperture value you have set is not suitable for appropriate exposure, the shutter speed on the shooting

screen will blink. If this happens, change the aperture value.

Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The shutter speed is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

168

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shutter Priority

You can express the movement of a moving subject in various ways by adjusting the shutter speed, for example, at the

instant of the movement with high speed shutter, or as a trailing image with low speed shutter.

Hint

Use a tripod to prevent camera-shake when you have selected a slow shutter speed.

When you shoot indoor sports scenes, set the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

Note

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in shutter speed priority mode.

When [

Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] and the shutter speed is 1 second(s) or longer with a [ Shutter Type] other than

[Electronic Shutter] is set, noise reduction after shooting is performed for the same amount of time that the shutter was open.

However, you cannot shoot any more while noise reduction is in progress.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Related Topic

Long Exposure NR (still image)

Set the mode dial to S (Shutter Priority).

Select the desired value by turning the front/rear dial.

If proper exposure cannot be obtained after setup, the aperture value on the shooting screen blinks. If this

happens, change the shutter speed.

Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

The aperture is automatically adjusted to obtain proper exposure.

169

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Manual Exposure

You can shoot with the desired exposure setting by adjusting both the shutter speed and aperture.

Hint

You can change the shutter speed and aperture (F-value) combination without changing the set exposure value by rotating the

front/rear dial while pressing the AEL button. (Manual shift)

Note

The Metered Manual indicator does not appear when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

When the amount of ambient light exceeds the metering range of the Metered Manual, the Metered Manual indicator flashes.

The SteadyShot warning indicator does not appear in manual exposure mode.

The brightness of the image on the screen may differ from the actual image being shot.

Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

Select the desired aperture value by turning the front dial.

Select the desired shutter speed by turning the rear dial.

You can change the setting of the front/rear dial using MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Dial Setup].

You can also set [ISO] to [ISO AUTO] in manual exposure mode. The ISO value automatically changes to

achieve the appropriate exposure using the aperture value and shutter speed you have set.

When [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO], the ISO value indicator will blink if the value you have set is not suitable for

appropriate exposure. If this happens, change the shutter speed or aperture value.

When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO], use MM (Metered Manual)* to check the exposure value.

Toward +: Images become brighter.

Toward -: Images become darker.

0: Appropriate exposure analyzed by the product.

Indicates under/over for appropriate exposure. It is displayed using a numerical value on the monitor and with a metering indicator on

the viewfinder.

Adjust the focus and shoot the subject.

170

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bulb shooting

You can shoot a trailing image of the movement of a subject with long exposure.

Bulb shooting is suitable for shooting trails from stars or fireworks, etc.

Hint

When shooting fireworks, etc., focus at infinity in manual focus mode. If you use a lens whose infinity point is unclear, adjust the

focus on the fireworks in the area you want to focus on in advance.

In order to perform bulb shooting without causing the image quality to deteriorate, we recommend that you start shooting while

the camera is cool.

During bulb shooting, images tend to blur. It is recommended that you use a tripod, a RMT-P1BT Bluetooth remote commander

(sold separately) or a remote commander equipped with a lock function (sold separately). When using the RMT-P1BT Bluetooth

remote commander, you can start bulb shooting by pressing the shutter button on the remote commander. To stop bulb shooting,

press the shutter button on the remote commander again. To use the other remote commander, use the model which can be

connected via the Multi/Micro USB terminal.

Note

The longer the exposure time, the more noise will be visible on the image.

When [

Long Exposure NR] is set to [On], noise reduction is performed after shooting for the same duration that the shutter

was open. You cannot shoot while noise reduction is in progress.

You cannot set the shutter speed to [BULB] in the following situations:

[Auto HDR]

[Picture Effect] is set to [Rich-tone Mono.].

When [Drive Mode] is set to the following:

[Cont. Shooting]

[Self-timer(Cont)]

[Cont. Bracket]

[

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

If you use the above functions when the shutter speed is set to [BULB], the shutter speed is temporarily set to 30 seconds.

If you set [Drive Mode] to [Cont. Shooting] and [

Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter] when the shutter speed is set

to [BULB], the shutter speed will be temporarily set to 1/8 second.

Set the mode dial to M (Manual Exposure).

Turn the rear dial clockwise until [BULB] is indicated.

Select the aperture value (F-value) using the front dial.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press and hold the shutter button for the duration of the shooting.

As long as the shutter button is pressed, the shutter remains open.

171

Related Topic

Manual Exposure

172

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [

Memory] in advance.

Hint

To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3 (Memory recall), then select the desired number by

pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled from the memory card in the slot specified in [

Select Media]. You can confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Select Media].

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note

If you set [

/ Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the

original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Memory recall).

Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [

/ Recall].

173

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

Menu item details

Program Auto:

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

Aperture Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

Shutter Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

Manual Exposure:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Set the mode dial to

(Movie).

MENU→

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

174

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback

speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [

S&Q Settings].

Menu item details

Program Auto:

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

Aperture Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

Shutter Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

Manual Exposure:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic

S&Q Settings

Set the mode dial to

(S&Q Motion).

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

175

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can

make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively

(exposure compensation).

Release the exposure compensation dial lock, and turn the exposure compensation dial (A).

+ (over) side:

Images become brighter.

- (under) side:

Images become darker.

Pressing the lock button (B) at the center switches the exposure compensation dial between the locked and

unlocked status. The dial is unlocked when the lock button is popped up and the white line is visible.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.

You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.

Monitor

Viewfinder

176

To set the exposure compensation value using the MENU

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV when the exposure compensation

dial is set to “0.”

MENU→

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.

Hint

You can operate the exposure compensation dial any time you want while the exposure compensation dial lock is released. The

exposure compensation dial lock prevents unintentional changes to exposure compensation values.

Note

You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] or [Dial Ev Comp] in MENU.

Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set

an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be

reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory

effect.

When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the exposure value switches to “0” regardless

of the [Exposure Comp.] setting.

Related Topic

Exposure step

Dial Ev Comp

Exp.comp.set

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

Zebra Setting

177

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Reset EV Comp.

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when you turn off the power when the

exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”

Menu item details

Maintain:

Maintains the settings.

Reset:

Resets the settings.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.

178

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Dial Ev Comp

You can adjust the exposure using the front dial or rear dial when the exposure compensation dial is set to “0.” You can

adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not enable exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.

Front dial/ Rear dial:

Enables exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.

Note

When the exposure compensation function is assigned to the front or rear dial, any function that had been assigned to that dial

previously is re-assigned to another dial.

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] in MENU or the exposure settings using

the front or rear dial.

Related Topic

Exposure Comp.

Set the exposure compensation dial to "0."

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Dial Ev Comp] → desired setting.

179

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not display the guide.

On:

Displays the guide.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

180

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure step

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

Menu item details

0.3EV / 0.5EV

Note

Even if you set [Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using the exposure compensation dial changes in steps

of 0.3EV.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

181

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

Menu item details

Multi:

Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the

entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).

Center:

Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-

weighted metering).

Spot:

Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire

screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the

metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].

Entire Screen Avg.:

Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position

of the subject changes.

Highlight:

Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the

subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint

When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be

coordinated with the focus area.

When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected

faces.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and

the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.

Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note

[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic

AE lock

Spot Metering Point

Face Priority in Multi Metering

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

182

Auto HDR

183

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

Menu item details

On:

The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.

Off:

The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in

Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

184

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],

[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].

Menu item details

Center:

The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.

Focus Point Link:

The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note

When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible

Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates

to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

185

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AE lock

When the contrast between the subject and background is high, such as when shooting a backlit subject or a subject

near a window, meter the light at a spot where the subject appears to have the appropriate brightness and lock the

exposure before shooting. To reduce the brightness of the subject, meter the light at a spot brighter than the subject and

lock the exposure of the entire screen. To make the subject brighter, meter the light at a spot darker than the subject and

lock the exposure of the entire screen.

Hint

If you select the MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → [AEL Button] → [AEL toggle],

you can lock the exposure without holding down the button.

Note

[

AEL hold] and [ AEL toggle] are not available when using zoom functions other than optical zoom.

Adjust the focus on the spot at which the exposure is adjusted.

Press the AEL button.

The exposure is locked, and (AE lock) is displayed.

Keep pressing the AEL button and focus on the subject again, then shoot the picture.

Keep holding the AEL button down while taking a shot if you want to continue shooting with the fixed exposure.

Release the button to reset the exposure.

186

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

Menu item details

Auto:

Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus

Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF].

On:

Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust

focus and exposure separately.

The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note

Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [

AEL w/ shutter] settings.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

187

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

Metering Mode

The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →

(Camera

Settings1) → [Metering Mode].

Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note

The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [

Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of

exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.

Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

188

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:

Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.

Ambient only:

Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic

Flash Comp.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

189

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zebra Setting

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you

have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:

Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.

Zebra Level:

Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.

Hint

You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The

settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively

in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on

areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a

brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note

The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.

190

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and

the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:

Corrects the brightness automatically.

D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:

Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5

(strong).

Note

In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,

especially when you enhance the effect.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].

Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

191

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an

underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation

(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:

Corrects the brightness automatically.

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:

Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to

6.0EV (strong).

For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:

-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint

The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:

Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.

Do not change the composition before shooting.

Note

This function is not available when the [

File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.

You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.

will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring. Change the

composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

192

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher

the sensitivity.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:

Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.

ISO 50 – ISO 204800:

Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint

You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right

side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note

[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may

decrease.

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-

motion/quick-motion movies.

ISO values between 50 and 25600 are available in the following situations:

[

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

[

Shutter Type] is set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400,

the setting is automatically switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100,

the setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted

within the set range.

ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the front dial as well as by turning the control wheel. You

can change the value by 1 EV steps by turning the rear dial.

193

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select

[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note

ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified

range, reset [ISO Range Limit].

Related Topic

ISO Setting: ISO

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and

select the desired values.

194

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter

speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.

This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera

shake.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):

The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and

subject blurring.

STD (Standard):

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.

SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):

The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less

noise.

1/16000 ― 30":

The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint

The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]

is 1 EV.

Note

If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with

an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:

When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the [

Shutter Type] setting.

When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/250

second.)

When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the

speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic

Program Auto

Aperture Priority

ISO Setting: ISO

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

195

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

The zoom features available with this product

The zoom feature of the product provides a higher magnification zoom by combining various zoom features. The icon

displayed on the screen changes, according to the selected zoom feature.

When a power zoom lens is mounted:

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted:

Note

The default setting for the [Zoom Setting] is [Optical zoom only].

The default setting for the [

JPEG Image Size] is [L]. To use the smart zoom, change [ JPEG Image Size] to [M] or [S].

The Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom functions are not available when shooting in the following situations:

[

File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[

Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p].

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with the [

Frame Rate] set to [120fps]/[100fps]

During continuous shooting with [

Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter]

You cannot use the Smart Zoom function with movies.

When a power zoom lens is mounted, you cannot use [Zoom] under MENU. If you enlarge image past the optical zoom range,

the product automatically switches to another [Zoom] function than the optical zoom.

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing frame is shown

by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

When you use the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, [Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi].

When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom or Digital Zoom function, the following functions are not available:

Optical zoom range

Zoom images in the zoom range of a lens.

When a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom bar of the optical zoom range is displayed.

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, the zoom slider is fixed at the left end of the zoom bar while

the zoom position is in the optical zoom range (displayed as ×1.0).

Smart Zoom range (

)

Zoom images without causing the original quality to deteriorate by partially cropping an image (only when [

JPEG

Image Size] is set to [M] or [S]).

Clear Image Zoom range (

)

Zoom images using an image process with less deterioration. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [ClearImage Zoom] or

[Digital Zoom], you can use this zoom function.

Digital Zoom range (

)

You can magnify images using an image process. When you set [Zoom Setting] to [Digital Zoom], you can use this

zoom function.

196

Face/Eye Priority in AF

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Tracking function

To use another zoom function than the optical zoom for movies, assign [Zoom] to the desired key using [

Custom Key].

Related Topic

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

Zoom Setting

About zoom scale

Focus Area

197

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

Related Topic

Zoom Setting

The zoom features available with this product

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].

When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge

subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically switches to another zoom than

the optical zoom.

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom]

→ desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2)

→ [

Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

198

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:

Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [

JPEG Image Size] to

[M] or [S].

ClearImage Zoom :

Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies

images using an image process with less deterioration.

Digital Zoom :

When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.

However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note

Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic

The zoom features available with this product

About zoom scale

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

199

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

About zoom scale

The zoom scale that is used in combination with the zoom of the lens changes according to the selected image size.

When [

Aspect Ratio] is [3:2]

Related Topic

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

The zoom features available with this product

Zoom Setting

JPEG Image Size (still image)

Zoom Setting JPEG Image Size Full-frame/APS-C Zoom scale

Optical zoom only (including smart zoom)

L - -

Full-frame Approx. 1.5×

APS-C Approx. 1.3×

Full-frame Approx. 2×

APS-C Approx. 2×

ClearImage Zoom

Full-frame Approx. 2×

APS-C Approx. 2×

Full-frame Approx. 3×

APS-C Approx. 2.6×

Full-frame Approx. 4×

APS-C Approx. 4×

Digital Zoom

Full-frame Approx. 4×

APS-C Approx. 4×

Full-frame Approx. 6.1×

APS-C Approx. 5.2×

Full-frame Approx. 8×

APS-C Approx. 8×

200

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses

that support this function.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):

Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.

Right(W)/Left(T):

Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

201

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when

the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose

for photographic expression.

Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /

Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :

When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light

source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the

color tones.

C.Temp./Filter:

Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for

photography.

Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:

Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint

You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side

of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the rear dial instead of

pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note

[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the

characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Related Topic

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

Priority Set in AWB

WB bracket

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

202

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]

is set to [Auto].

Menu item details

Standard:

Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.

Ambience:

Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

White:

Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic

White Balance

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

203

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

In a scene where the ambient light consists of multiple types of light sources, it is recommended to use the custom white

balance in order to accurately reproduce the whiteness. You can register 3 settings.

Note

The message [Capturing of the custom WB failed.] indicates that the value is in the unexpected range, for example when the

subject is too vivid. You can register the setting at this point, but it is recommended that you set the white balance again. When

an error value is set, the indicator

turns orange on the recording information display. The indicator will be displayed in

white when the set value is in the expected range.

If you use a flash when capturing a basic white color, the custom white balance will be registered with the lighting from the flash.

Be sure to use a flash whenever you shoot with recalled settings that were registered with a flash.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → Select from among [Custom 1] to [Custom 3], and

then press the right side of the control wheel.

Select

, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Hold the product so that the white area fully covers the white-balance capture frame, and then press the

center of the control wheel.

After the shutter sound beeps, the calibrated values (Color Temperature and Color Filter) are displayed.

You can adjust the position of the white-balance capture frame by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the

control wheel.

After capturing a standard white color, you can display the fine adjustment screen by pressing the right side of

the control wheel. You can finely adjust the color tones as needed.

Press the center of the control wheel.

The calibrated values will be registered. The monitor returns to the MENU display while retaining the memorized

custom white balance setting.

The registered custom white balance setting will remain memorized until overwritten by the another setting.

204

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to

[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].

This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the

shutter button pressed halfway down.

Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:

Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The

white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.

Cont. Shooting:

Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.

Off:

Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]

to the custom key. Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [

Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.

The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the

button is pressed.

The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the

button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].

Hint

When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because

the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [

Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],

and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to

[Flash].

Related Topic

White Balance

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

205

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image

style.

Menu item details

Standard:

For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.

Vivid:

The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,

spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.

Neutral:

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

To adjust

(Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left

sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select

the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

206

The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing

image material to be modified with a computer.

Clear:

For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.

Deep:

For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.

Light:

For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.

Portrait:

For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.

Landscape:

The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also

stand out more.

Sunset:

For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.

Night Scene:

The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.

Autumn leaves:

For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.

Black & White:

For shooting images in black and white monotone.

Sepia:

For shooting images in sepia monotone.

Registering preferred settings (Style Box):

Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side (

)) to register preferred settings. Then select the

desired settings using the right button.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and

[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.

Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides

of the control wheel.

Contrast:

The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on

the image.

Saturation:

The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is

restrained and subdued.

Sharpness:

Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value

selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note

[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

207

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

Menu item details

Off:

Disables the [Picture Effect] function.

Toy Camera:

Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.

Pop Color:

Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.

Posterization:

Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.

Retro Photo:

Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.

Soft High-key:

Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.

Partial Color:

Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.

High Contrast Mono.:

Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.

Rich-tone Mono.:

Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Hint

You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you

cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.

[Rich-tone Mono.]

In the case of [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:

Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.

Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to

obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation,

appear on the recorded image to inform you of this

situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

208

209

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color

space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

Menu item details

sRGB:

This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print

out the images without any modification.

AdobeRGB:

This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe

RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note

[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be

printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be

displayed with low saturation.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

210

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shutter Type (still image)

You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

Menu item details

Auto:

The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.

Mechanical Shutter:

Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.

Electronic Shutter:

Shoot with the electronic shutter only.

Hint

In the following situations, set the [

Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].

When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy

mountains.

When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.

Note

In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic

Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.

In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

When capturing a standard white color for the custom white balance

[Face Registration]

The following functions are unavailable when the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Flash shooting

Long Exposure NR

Bulb shooting

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)

MENU→

(Camera Settings2)→[ Shutter Type]→desired setting.

211

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using the electronic shutter

Using the electronic shutter lets you perform various kinds of shooting that are difficult to achieve using the mechanical

shutter, such as shooting without sounds or shaking, shooting with a super-fast shutter, and blackout-free shooting*.

Shutter types and camera performance

The camera’s shutter speed range, shutter sound, occurrence of blackout, and availability of the anti-flicker shooting or

the flash for each setting are as follows:

Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Shooting without shutter sound

You can use the electronic shutter to shoot without shutter sound.

Advanced shooting using the electronic shutter: Blackout-free continuous shooting

You can use the electronic shutter to perform continuous shooting with focus and exposure tracking, without the screen

blacking out.

During blackout-free shooting, the screen does not black out or drop frames and you can keep looking at the subject through the viewfinder or

monitor while shooting images.

Shutter Type

Auto

Mechanical

Shutter

Electronic Shutter

Shutter speed

Single shooting:

BULB – 1/32000

Continuous shooting:

1/8 – 1/32000

Single shooting:

BULB – 1/8000

Continuous shooting:

30 – 1/8000

Single shooting:

30 – 1/32000

Continuous shooting:

1/8 – 1/32000

Shutter sound

Single shooting: Mechanical shutter sound

Continuous shooting: Electronic shutter

sound

Mechanical shutter

sound

Electronic shutter

sound

Blackout

Single shooting: Occurs

Continuous shooting: Blackout-free

Occurs

Blackout-free

Flash

Available

Available Unavailable

Anti-flicker

shooting

Available

Available Unavailable

The maximum shutter speed is 1/16000 second when the shooting mode is not set to S (Shutter Priority) or M (Manual Exposure), or during

bracket shooting with a setting other than [WB bracket] or [DRO Bracket].

The next value after 1/16000 second is 1/32000 second when the shooting mode is set to S (Shutter Priority) or M (Manual Exposure).

When [Shoot. Start Disp.] is set to [On], blackout occurs only when the first image is shot.

The maximum shutter speed is 1/8000 second when performing continuous shooting with the flash.

The maximum shutter speed is 1/8000 second when [

Anti-flicker Shoot.] is set to [On].

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Shutter Type] → [Electronic Shutter].

Select [Electronic Shutter] or [Auto] for continuous shooting.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → [Off] or [On:other than e-shut].2.

212

Hint

If you want to display the timing of shooting on the screen during blackout-free shooting, adjust the setting using MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.].

To take advantage of the performance of the camera, we recommend that you use a UHS-II memory card.

Note

When shooting without the shutter sound, do so on your own responsibility, with sufficient consideration to the privacy and portrait

rights of the subject.

Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, it will not be completely silent.

Even if you set the camera to shoot without the shutter sound, the aperture and focus will make sounds.

When using a lens compatible with Aperture Drive in AF, sound from the aperture drive may be audible during continuous

shooting if [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to [Focus Priority].

If you set [Audio signals] to [Off], the camera will not beep when the subject comes into focus or when the self-timer is in

operation.

During blackout-free shooting, the slower the shutter speed, the lower the refresh rate of the screen. If you want the screen

display to be smooth in order to track the subject, set a shutter speed faster than 1/125 second.

The electronic shutter operates differently when a Mount Adaptor is attached on the camera.

Related Topic

Shutter Type (still image)

Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)

Audio signals

Cont. Shooting

Shoot. Start Disp.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Shutter Type] → [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].1.

Turn the mode dial and select P (Program Auto), A (Aperture Priority), S (Shutter Priority), or M (Manual Exposure),

then set the shutter speed and aperture value. (For example: shutter speed of 1/250 second and aperture value of

F2.8)

The product will not adjust the exposure in manual exposure mode when [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO].

Turn the drive mode dial and select

(Continuous Shooting: Hi), (Continuous Shooting: Mid), or

(Continuous Shooting: Lo).

Turn the focus mode dial and select AF-C (Continuous AF), then start shooting images.4.

213

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)

Sets whether or not to display marks (such as a frame) on the screen while shooting. This function is useful in situations

where it is difficult to determine the timing of shooting just by looking at the screen, such as when the shutter sound is

turned off.

Menu item details

On: Type1:

Displays a frame (dark color) around the focusing frame.

On: Type2:

Displays a frame (light color) around the focusing frame.

On: Type3:

Displays

(dark color) in the four corners of the screen.

On: Type4:

Displays

(light color) in the four corners of the screen.

Off:

Does not display the shutter release timing during blackout-free shooting.

[On: Type1] / [On: Type2] (Example: [Focus Area] is set to [Center])

[On: Type3] / [On: Type4]

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.] → desired setting.

214

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shoot. Start Disp.

Sets whether or not to indicate the shutter release timing with a black screen during blackout-free shooting. The black

screen makes it easier to visually confirm when the shutter is released.

Menu item details

On:

The screen blacks out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

Off:

The screen does not black out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Start Disp.] → desired setting.

215

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to

moments when flickering will have less of an impact.

This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the

lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.

On:

Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway

down,

(flicker icon) will be displayed.

Hint

The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we

recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even

when in the manual focus mode.

Note

When you set [

Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the

shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.

The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.

The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.

Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light

source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.

[

Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting

Movie shooting mode

When [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]

The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [

Anti-flicker Shoot.].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].

Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.

The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

216

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

Menu item details

Enable:

Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,

etc.

Disable:

Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note

Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an astronomical

telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

217

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

Menu item details

Enable:

Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.

Disable:

Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note

When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

218

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

e-Front Curtain Shutter

The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the

shutter is released. You can use [e-Front Curtain Shutter] when [

Shutter Type] is set to [Mechanical Shutter].

Menu item details

On:

Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Off:

Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Note

When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may

get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].

When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set

this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In

such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shutter] → desired setting.

219

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

Menu item details

On:

Uses [SteadyShot].

Off:

Does not use [SteadyShot].

We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod, etc.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

220

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

Menu item details

Auto:

Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.

Manual:

Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

Check the focal-length index (A) and set the focal-length.

Note

The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera

towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→

(Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set

[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The current set value of the

SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal

length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You

cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic

SteadyShot

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

[SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

221

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Lens Comp.

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the

corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Chromatic Aberration Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Distortion Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Note

This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.

222

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the

duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

Menu item details

On:

Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message

appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.

Off:

Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note

[

Long Exposure NR] is not available when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Noise reduction may not be activated even if [

Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

[

Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

223

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product

sensitivity is high.

Menu item details

Normal:

Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.

Low:

Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.

Off:

Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note

[

High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[

High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

224

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Regist. Faces Priority

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

Menu item details

On:

Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

Off:

Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.

Hint

To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.

[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]

[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]

Related Topic

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

Face Registration (New Registration)

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.

225

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.

Note

Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,

sunglasses, etc.

Related Topic

Regist. Faces Priority

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

226

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the

priority order.

Related Topic

Regist. Faces Priority

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

Select a face to change the order of priority.

Select the destination.

227

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

Note

Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from

the product, select [Delete All].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

228

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using flash (sold separately)

In dark environments, use the flash to light up the subject while shooting. Also use the flash to prevent camera-shake.

For details on the flash, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

Note

A flash cannot be used when [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

A flash can be used during continuous shooting with [

Shutter Type] set to [Auto]. The mechanical shutter will be used.

The light of the flash may be blocked if the lens hood is attached and the lower part of a recorded image may be shaded.

Remove the lens hood.

When using the flash, stand 1 m or more away from the subject.

You cannot use the flash when recording movies. (You can use an LED light when using a flash (sold separately) with an LED

light.)

Before attaching/removing an accessory such as a flash to/from the Multi Interface Shoe, turn off the product first. When

attaching an accessory, make sure that the accessory is fixed securely to the product.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltage of 250 V or more or has the reverse

polarity of the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

You can use a flash of the reverse polarity with the Sync Terminal. Please use a flash with a sync voltage of 400 V or less.

When shooting with the flash and the zoom is set to W, the shadow of the lens may appear on the screen, depending on the

shooting conditions. If this happens, shoot away from the subject or set the zoom to T and shoot with the flash again.

The corners of a recorded image may be shaded, depending on the lens.

When shooting with an external flash, light and dark stripes may appear on the image if the shutter speed is set to faster than

1/4000 seconds. If this occurs, Sony recommends shooting in the manual flash mode and setting the flash level to 1/2 or higher.

Attach the flash (sold separately) to the product.

Shoot after you have turned on the flash and it is fully charged.

blinking: Charging is in progress

lit up: Charging is finished

The available flash modes depend on the shooting mode and function.

229

For details on compatible accessories for the Multi Interface Shoe, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic

Flash Mode

Wireless Flash

Using a flash with a sync terminal cord

230

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

Menu item details

On:

The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

Off:

Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note

Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to

the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

231

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

Menu item details

Flash Off:

The flash does not operate.

Autoflash:

The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.

Fill-flash:

The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

Slow Sync.:

The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the

subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.

Rear Sync.:

The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you

to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note

The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic

Using flash (sold separately)

Wireless Flash

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

232

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light

only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

Note

[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the

maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved

and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic

Using flash (sold separately)

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level

lower.

233

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

FEL lock

The flash level is automatically adjusted so that the subject gets the optimum exposure during normal flash shooting. You

can also set the flash level in advance.

FEL: Flash Exposure Level

Hint

By setting [FEL Lock hold], you can hold the setting while the button is pressed down. Also, by setting [FEL Lock/AEL hold] and

[FEL Lock/AEL tggle.], you can shoot images with the AE locked in the following situations.

When [Flash Mode] is set to [Flash Off] or [Autoflash].

When the flash cannot go off.

When using an external flash that is set to manual flash mode.

Note

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired button, then assign the [FEL Lock

toggle] function to the button.

Center the subject on which FEL is to be locked, and adjust the focus.

Press the button to which [FEL Lock toggle] is registered, and set the flash amount.

A pre-flash flashes.

The

(FEL lock) lights up.

Adjust the composition and shoot the image.

When you want to release the FEL lock, press the button to which the [FEL Lock toggle] is registered again.

234

The FEL lock cannot be set when a flash is not attached.

If a flash that does not support the FEL lock is attached, an error message is displayed.

When both AE and FEL lock are fixed,

lights up.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

235

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to

the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal

flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set

each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not use the wireless flash function.

On:

Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note

The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this

occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.

When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash

as the commander.

Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver

(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [

Custom Key], and then pressing that key.

236

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using a flash with a sync terminal cord

Hint

If the screen is too dark to check the composition, set [Live View Display] to [Setting Effect OFF] to make it easy to check the

composition when shooting with a flash.

Flashes that have a sync terminal with reversed polarity can be used with this product.

Note

Set the exposure mode to manual exposure (other than ISO AUTO is recommended for ISO sensitivity), and set the shutter

speed to the slower of the following values or slower:

1/200 seconds

The shutter speed recommended by the flash.

Use flashes with a sync voltage of 400 V or lower.

Turn off the flash connected to the sync cord when you connect the sync cord to the

(flash sync) terminal. Otherwise, the flash

may emit light when the sync cord is connected.

The flash power level is set to full power. [Flash Comp.] cannot be set.

Auto white balance function is not recommended. Use the custom white balance function to achieve a more accurate white

balance.

When a flash is connected to the

(flash sync) terminal, the flash indicator will not be displayed.

Flash cannot be used when [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Related Topic

Manual Exposure

Live View Display

Flash Comp.

Open the cover of

(flash sync) terminal (A), and connect the cord.

237

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shooting movies

You can record movies by pressing the MOVIE (Movie) button.

Hint

You can assign the start/stop movie recording function to a preferred key. MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom

Key] → set [MOVIE] to the preferred key.

When you want to specify the area to be focused on, set the area using [Focus Area].

To keep the focus on a face, arrange the composition so that the focusing frame and face detection frame overlap, or set the

[Focus Area] to [Wide].

You can focus quickly while shooting movies by pressing the shutter button halfway down. (The sound of auto focus operation

may be recorded in some cases.)

To adjust the shutter speed and aperture value to the desired settings, set the shooting mode to

(Movie) and select the

desired exposure mode.

An icon indicating that data is being written is displayed after shooting. Do not remove the memory card while the icon is

displayed.

The following settings for still image shooting are applied to the movie shooting:

White Balance

Creative Style

Metering Mode

Face/Eye Priority in AF

Face Priority in Multi Metering

D-Range Optimizer

Lens Comp.

You can change the settings for ISO sensitivity, exposure compensation, and focus area while shooting movies.

While shooting movies, the recorded image can be output without the shooting information display by setting [HDMI Info. Display]

to [Off].

Press the MOVIE button to start recording.

Since the [MOVIE Button] is set to [Always] in the default setting, movie recording can be started from any

shooting mode.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

238

Note

The sound of the lens and the product in operation may be recorded during movie recording.

You can turn the sound off by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → [Off].

When shooting, the sound of the shoulder strap hooks (triangular hook) could be recorded, depending on the situation used.

To prevent the operating sound of the zoom ring from being recorded during movie recording when a power zoom lens is used,

we recommend recording movies using the zoom lever. When you move the zoom lever, place your finger lightly on the lever and

operate it without flicking.

The temperature of the camera tends to rise when shooting movies continuously, and you may feel that the camera is warm. This

is not a malfunction. Also, [Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.] may appear. In such cases, turn the power off and cool the

camera and wait until the camera is ready to shoot again.

If the

icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen. Turn the power off and cool the camera and wait until the

camera is ready to shoot again.

For the continuous shooting time of a movie recording, refer to “Recordable movie times.” When movie recording is finished, you

can record another movie by pressing the MOVIE button again. Recording may stop to protect the product, depending on the

temperature of the product or the battery.

When the mode dial is set to

(Movie) or or when shooting movies, you cannot select [Tracking] for [Focus Area].

In [Program Auto] mode when shooting movies, the aperture value and the shutter speed will be set automatically and cannot be

changed. For that reason, the shutter speed may become fast in a bright environment, and the motion of the subject may not be

recorded smoothly. By changing the exposure mode and adjusting the aperture value and the shutter speed, the motion of the

subject can be recorded smoothly.

When shooting movies, ISO values between ISO 100 and ISO 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than

ISO 102400, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to

the original setting.

In movie shooting mode, ISO sensitivity can be selected from ISO 100 to ISO 102400. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller

than ISO 100, the setting is automatically switched to ISO 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the

original setting.

In movie shooting mode, the following settings cannot be set in [Picture Effect]. When a movie recording starts, [Off] will be set

temporarily.

Rich-tone Mono.

The Face Detection function / Eye Detection function is not available in the following situations.

[

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M], and [

4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]

If you point the camera at an extremely strong light source while shooting a movie at low ISO sensitivity, the highlighted area in

the image may be recorded as a black area.

If the display mode of the monitor is set to [For viewfinder], the display mode will switch to [Display All Info.] when movie shooting

starts.

Use PlayMemories Home when importing XAVC S movies and AVCHD movies to a computer.

Related Topic

MOVIE Button

Movie w/ shutter

File Format (movie)

Recordable movie times

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Focus Area

239

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Movie w/ shutter

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the

MOVIE (Movie) button.

Menu item details

On:

Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].

Off:

Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external

recording/playback device using [

REC Control].

Note

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic

Shooting movies

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.

240

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Movie recording formats

The following movie recording formats are available with this camera.

What is XAVC S?

Records movies in high definition such as 4K by converting them into MP4 movies using the MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec.

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 is capable of compressing images with higher efficiency. You can record high-quality images while

reducing the amount of data.

XAVC S/AVCHD recording format

XAVC S 4K:

Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps or approx. 60 Mbps

Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).

XAVC S HD:

Bit-rate: Approx. 100 Mbps, approx. 60 Mbps, approx. 50 Mbps, approx. 25 Mbps, or approx. 16 Mbps

Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD with larger amounts of data.

AVCHD:

Bit-rate: Approx. 24 Mbps (maximum) or approx. 17 Mbps (average)

The AVCHD format has a high degree of compatibility with storage devices other than computers.

Bit rate is the amount of data processed within a given period of time.

Related Topic

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

AVCHD format

241

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

Menu item details

Note

When [

File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx.

2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

File

Format

Characteristics

XAVC

S 4K

Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).

You can save movies on a computer using the

PlayMemories Home software.

XAVC

S HD

Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD

with larger amounts of data.

AVCHD

The AVCHD format has a high degree of

compatibility with storage devices other than

computers.

You can save movies on a computer or create a disc that

supports this format using the PlayMemories Home

software.

242

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.

Menu item details

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

24p 100M * Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

24p 60M * Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record

Setting

Bit-rate Description

60p 50M/50p

50M

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).

60p 25M/50p

25M

Approx. 25

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).

30p 50M/25p

50M

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).

30p 16M/25p

16M

Approx. 16

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).

24p 50M *

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).

120p 100M/100p

100M

Approx. 100

Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.

You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing

devices.

243

When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

Note

Creating an AVCHD recording disc from movies that were recorded with [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [

Record Setting]

takes a long time because the image quality of movies is converted. If you want to store movies without converting them, use a

Blu-ray Disc.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]

In full-frame shooting, the angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]

Related Topic

APS-C/Super 35mm

Record

Setting

Bit-rate Description

120p 60M/100p

60M

Approx. 60

Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.

You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing

devices.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 24 Mbps at maximum Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).

60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) Approx. 17 Mbps on average Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).

244

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term

phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,

the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be

recorded.

Menu item details

Record Setting:

Selects the frame rate of the movie.

Frame Rate:

Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed

The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [

Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Set the mode dial to

(S&Q Motion).

Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired setting of

slow-motion/quick-motion (

Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or

Manual Exposure).

Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [

Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Frame Rate

Record Setting

24p 30p 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

245

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

When [

Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].

Note

In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this

happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [

Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].

The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]

[

TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]

[

4K Output Select]

Related Topic

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

Recordable movie times

Frame Rate

Record Setting

25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

246

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Proxy Recording

Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies

are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.

Menu item details

On :

Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.

Off :

Proxy movies are not recorded.

Hint

Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as

that of the original movie.

Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen).

is displayed

over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note

Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [

File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]

Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot

delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Movie recording formats

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Memory cards that can be used

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.

247

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the

camera operating.

Menu item details

On:

Records sound (stereo).

Off:

Does not record sound.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

248

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the audio level.

Off:

Does not display the audio level.

Note

The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:

When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].

When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

249

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

Menu item details

Turns up the audio recording level.

Turns down the audio recording level.

Reset:

Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint

When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record

more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make

the sound easier to hear.

Note

Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the

(microphone) terminal input.

The setting for [Audio Rec Level] does not apply to recordings made using [Voice Memo].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

250

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio

during HDMI output.

Menu item details

Live:

Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.

Lip Sync:

Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note

Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the

microphone.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

251

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.

Menu item details

On:

Reduces wind noise.

Off:

Does not reduce wind noise.

Note

Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

252

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.

Menu item details

On:

Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise

in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.

Off:

Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record

movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note

[

Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

(Shutter Priority)

(Manual Exposure)

When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

253

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

Menu item details

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x4.0:

Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

254

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF drive speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

Menu item details

Fast:

Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.

Normal:

Sets the AF drive speed to normal.

Slow:

Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is

changed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.

255

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Tracking Sens. (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.

Menu item details

Responsive:

Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.

Standard:

Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the subject or in crowded

places.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Tracking Sens.]→desired setting.

256

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:

Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.

TC Preset:

Sets the time code.

UB Preset:

Sets the user bit.

TC Format:

Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)

TC Run:

Sets the count up format for the time code.

TC Make:

Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.

UB Time Rec:

Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

How to set the time code (TC Preset)

How to reset the time code

You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold separately).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

How to reset the user bit

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format

)

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.

Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.

The time code can be set between the following range.

When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29

When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.

When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24

Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.

Press the

(Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).2.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.

Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.2.

Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.

Press the

(Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).2.

257

DF:

Records the time code in Drop Frame

format.

NDF:

Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.

The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

Rec Run:

Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from

the last time code of the previous recording.

Free Run:

Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in

[Rec Run] mode.

When the recording format is changed.

When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

Preset:

Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.

Regenerate:

Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code

consecutively from the last time code. The time code is read from the memory card in the slot 1 when [Recording Mode]

under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Simult. (

)] or [Simult. ( / )]. The time code is read from the memory card

to which the movies will be recorded when [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], [Simult. (

)], [Sort(RAW/JPEG)],

[Sort(JPEG/RAW)] or [Sort(

/ )]. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].1.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods

of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make

the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time

code without this correction is called non-drop frame.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].1.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].1.

258

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

TC/UB Disp. Switch

Allows you to display the time code (TC) and user bit (UB) of a movie by pressing the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch]

function has been assigned.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key], or [ Custom Key] → assign

the [TC/UB Disp. Switch] function to the desired key.

Press the key to which [TC/UB Disp. Switch] is assigned.

Each time you press the key, the monitor display will switch from the movie recording time counter → time code

(TC) → user bit (UB), in that order.

259

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

Menu item details

Always:

Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

Movie Mode Only:

Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion]

mode.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.

260

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [

Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting

movies.

Menu item details

On:

Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.

Off:

No marker is displayed.

Note

The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to

(Movie) or , or when shooting movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)

Related Topic

Marker Settings (movie)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

261

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

Menu item details

Center:

Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.

[Off]/[On]

Aspect:

Sets the aspect marker display.

[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]

Safety Zone:

Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.

[Off]/[80%]/[90%]

Guideframe:

Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

[Off]/[On]

Hint

You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

262

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

4K Output Select (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external

recording/playback devices, etc.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:

Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(30p):

Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(24p):

Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(25p)

Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

Note

This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording

time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.

When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI

cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [

Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this

case, if you set [

Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially

restricted.

[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

[Face Priority in Multi Metering]

Tracking function

Related Topic

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Turn the mode dial to

(movie).

Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

263

264

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

Menu item details

Power Link:

The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.

REC Link:

The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.

REC Link&STBY:

The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).

Auto:

The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

265

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back still images

Plays back the recorded images.

Hint

The product creates an image database file on a memory card to record and play back images. An image that is not registered in

the image database file may not be played back correctly. To play back images shot using other devices, register those images to

the image database file using MENU →

(Setup) → [Recover Image DB].

If you play back the images right after continuous shooting, the monitor may display an icon indicating that data is being

written/the number of images left to write. During writing, some functions are not available.

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the

monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Related Topic

Recover Image DB

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Display as Group

Press the

(Playback) button to switch to the playback mode.

Select the image with the control wheel.

Images shot with continuous shooting or interval shooting are displayed as one group. To play back the images

in the group, press the center of the control wheel.

266

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

Hint

You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [

Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the

monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Note

You cannot enlarge movies.

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or

next image while keeping the same zoom scale.

The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location

information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

267

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

Menu item details

Auto:

When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.

Manual:

Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image

will be displayed accordingly.

Off:

Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note

Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.

Related Topic

Rotating an image (Rotate)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

268

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

Note

Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the

software.

Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU →

(Playback) → [Rotate].

Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.

If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

269

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:

Displays an image with the standard magnification.

Previous Mag.:

Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback

zoom mode.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Position

MENU →

(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

270

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

Menu item details

Focused Position:

Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.

Center:

Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

MENU →

(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

271

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back movies

Plays back the recorded movies.

Available operations during movie playback

You can perform slow playback and sound volume adjustment, etc. by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

: Playback

: Pause

: Fast-forward

: Fast-rewind

: Forward slow playback

: Reverse slow playback

: Next movie file

: Previous movie file

: Displays the next frame

: Displays the previous frame

: Photo Capture

: Sound volume adjustment

: Closes the operation panel

Hint

“Forward slow playback,” “Reverse slow playback,” “Displays the next frame” and “Displays the previous frame” are available

during pause.

Movie files recorded using other products may not be able to be playable on this camera.

Note

Even if you shoot the movie vertically, the movie will be displayed horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera.

Related Topic

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Press the

(playback) button to switch to playback mode.

Select the movie to be played back using the control wheel and press the center of the control wheel to

start playback.

272

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the

volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

Note

To change the sound volume of [Voice Memo], use MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo PB Volume].

Related Topic

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

Voice Memo PB Volume

MENU →

(Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

273

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback

to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

Related Topic

Shooting movies

Playing back movies

Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Photo Capture].

Play back the movie and pause it.

Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and

displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

Press

(Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

274

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU →

(Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the

control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing

the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.

Related Topic

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Press the

(Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control

wheel.

275

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want

to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

Menu item details

Select Dial:

Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.

Image Jump Method:

Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.

Note

A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].

When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will

only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back

every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial].

When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],

or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.

Related Topic

Rating

Protecting images (Protect)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.

276

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

Menu item details

Date View:

Displays the images by date.

Folder View(Still):

Displays only still images.

AVCHD View:

Displays only AVCHD-format movies.

XAVC S HD View:

Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.

XAVC S 4K View:

Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

MENU →

(Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

277

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

Menu item details

On:

Displays images as a group.

Off:

Does not display images as a group.

Hint

The following images are grouped.

Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter

button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)

Images shot with [

Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen,

is displayed over the group.

Note

Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images

cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].

If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted. Any voice memos attached to images in the group will also be

deleted.

Related Topic

Cont. Shooting

Interval Shoot Func.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

278

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cont. PB for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge

(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

Hint

On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the

playback speed by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic

Interval Shoot Func.

PB Speed for Interval

Imaging Edge

MENU →

(Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].

Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

279

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

PB Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for

Interval].

Hint

You can also change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for

Interval].

Related Topic

Cont. PB for Interval

MENU →

(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

280

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Selects the memory card slot to be played back.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects the slot 2.

Note

No image is played back when no memory card is inserted in the selected slot. Select a slot into which a memory card has been

inserted.

When you select [Date View] in [View Mode], the camera only plays back images from a memory card selected using [Select

Playback Media].

Related Topic

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → desired slot.

281

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)

You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select Playback Media] to a memory card in

another slot.

Hint

You can select the type of images to be displayed by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [View Mode].

Note

If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a group on the destination memory card.

If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the destination memory card.

It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

XAVC S movies can only be copied to a memory card that supports XAVC S movies. A message will be displayed on the monitor

of the camera when images cannot be copied.

Related Topic

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Copy].

All of the contents with a date or in a folder currently being played back will be copied to a memory card in another

slot.

282

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

Menu item details

Repeat:

Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow

when all the images are played back once.

Interval:

Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].

To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback

Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint

During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

MENU →

(Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

Select [Enter].

283

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The

mark is displayed on protected images.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.

(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check

box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the

mark.

(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).

(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.

All with this date:

Protects all images taken on the selected date.

Cancel All in this Folder:

Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.

Cancel All with this date:

Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.

All Images in This Group:

Protects all the images in the selected group.

Cancel All in This Group:

Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.

Hint

If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect

images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key. The [Protect] function is assigned to the C3 button in the default settings.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within

the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

284

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale from

to to make it easier to find images. Combining this

function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.

Hint

You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [

Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The

number of

(Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

Note

You can assign ratings to still images only.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and

then press the center.

Select the number of

(Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center.

Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

285

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of

when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [

Custom Key].

Related Topic

Rating

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

Add a

mark to the number of that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

286

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The

(print order)

icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”

DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Selects images to order printing.

(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel

the selection, press the center again and delete the

mark.

(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the

check box for the date or folder.

(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:

Clears all DPOF marks.

Print Setting:

Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.

The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.

Note

You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:

RAW images

The number of copies cannot be specified.

Some printers do not support the date print function.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

287

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

You can record shooting conditions or image descriptions with your voice, and attach the audio files to images as voice

memos.

Voice memos can be transferred to a computer together with images, and played back on the computer.

To play back voice memos

To delete voice memos

Hint

If you assign [Voice Memo hold] to a custom key using [

Custom Key], a voice memo will be recorded while the key is

pressed. If you assign [Voice Memo toggle] to a custom key, voice memo recording will start when you press the key, and stop

when you press the key again. During voice memo playback, playback will start when the key is pressed, and stop when it is

pressed again.

You can still record a voice memo for a protected still image.

Note

You cannot attach a voice memo to a movie.

One voice memo file of up to 60 seconds in duration can be attached per still image.

You cannot add another voice memo to a still image to which a voice memo has already been attached, or overwrite the content

of a voice memo that has already been attached. First delete the attached voice memo, and then record a new voice memo.

You cannot change the microphone input level for recording.

The built-in microphone is used for voice memo recording. You cannot use an external audio input device.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo]

The image selection screen will appear.

Select a still image to which you want to attach a voice memo.

While holding down the center of the control wheel, record your voice.

A voice memo file (.WAV) with the same file name as the still image will be saved in the folder where the

corresponding still image is saved.

Recording continues while the center of the control wheel is pressed. The recording stops when the button is

released.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo].1.

Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to play back is attached.

is displayed on still images having attached voice memos.

Press the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo].1.

Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to delete is attached.2.

Press the bottom of the control wheel, and then select [OK].3.

288

Related Topic

Voice Memo PB Volume

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

289

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Voice Memo PB Volume

Adjusts the playback volume for voice memos.

Hint

While playing back a voice memo, you can display the volume control screen by pressing the bottom of the control wheel.

Related Topic

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo PB Volume]

Adjust the volume by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

290

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Deleting a displayed image

You can delete an image displayed. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to be

deleted beforehand.

Note

The protected images cannot be deleted.

Related Topic

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

Display the image you want to delete.

Press the

(Delete) button.

Select [Delete] using the control wheel.

If a voice memo is attached to the image to be deleted, select [Delete image and voice memo].

291

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to

be deleted beforehand.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Deletes the selected images.

(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check

box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the

mark.

(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).

(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.

All with this date:

Deletes all images taken on the selected date.

All Other Than This Img.:

Deletes all images in the group except the selection.

All Images in This Group:

Deletes all images in the selected group.

Hint

Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:

(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the

top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within

the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note

The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

Related Topic

Deleting a displayed image

Format

MENU →

(Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

292

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:

[Delete] is selected as the default setting.

"Cancel" first:

[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

293

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Viewing images on a TV using an HDMI cable

To view images stored on this product using a TV, an HDMI cable (sold separately) and an HD TV equipped with an

HDMI jack are required.

“BRAVIA” Sync

By connecting this product to a TV that supports “BRAVIA” Sync using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can operate

this product's playback functions with the TV remote control.

If you connect this camera to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

Only TVs that support “BRAVIA” Sync can provide SYNC MENU operations. For details, refer to the operating

instructions supplied with the TV.

Turn off both this product and the TV.

Connect the HDMI micro terminal of this product to the HDMI jack of the TV using an HDMI cable (sold

separately).

Turn on the TV and switch the input.

Turn on this product.

Images shot with the product appear on the TV screen.

Select an image using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

The monitor of this camera is not lit up on the playback screen.

If the playback screen is not displayed, press the

(Playback) button.

After performing the steps above to connect this camera to a TV, select MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] →

[CTRL FOR HDMI] → [On].

Press the SYNC MENU button on the TV remote control, and select the desired mode.2.

294

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to

another manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL

FOR HDMI] → [Off].

Hint

This product is compatible with the PhotoTV HD standard. If you connect Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices using an HDMI

cable (sold separately), the TV is set to the image quality suitable for viewing still images, and a whole new world of photos can

be enjoyed in breathtaking high quality.

You can connect this product to Sony PhotoTV HD-compatible devices with a USB terminal using the USB cable.

The PhotoTV HD allows for a highly-detailed, photo-like expression of subtle textures and colors.

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the compatible TV.

Note

Do not connect this product and another device using the output terminals of both. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Some devices may not work properly when connected to this product. For example, they may not output video or audio.

Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo or a genuine Sony cable.

Use an HDMI cable that is compatible with the HDMI micro terminal of the product and the HDMI jack of the TV.

When [

TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [

TC Output] to [Off].

If images do not appear on the TV screen properly, select MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] →

[2160p/1080p], [1080p] or [1080i] according to the TV to be connected.

During HDMI output, when you switch the movie from 4K to HD image quality or vice-versa, or change the movie to a different

frame rate, the screen may become dark. This is not a malfunction.

When [

Proxy Recording] is set to [On], images cannot be output to an HDMI device while recording a 4K movie.

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL, the screen may black out for an instant in the following situations. This is not a

malfunction.

When you start or stop recording movies while the shooting mode is set to a mode other than

(Movie) or .

When you change the shooting mode from

(Movie) or to another mode.

When you play back a movie for the first time after switching to the playback mode.

295

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Customization features of the camera

The camera has various customization features such as registration of functions and shooting settings to custom keys.

You can combine your preferred settings to customize the camera for easier operation.

For details on how to configure the settings and use them, refer to the page for each function.

To assign frequently used functions to buttons (

Custom Key/ Custom Key/ Custom

Key)

You can change the functions of the buttons including the Custom Buttons (C1 to C4) according to your preferences. It is

recommended that you assign frequently used functions to easily operable buttons so that you can call up the assigned

functions simply by pressing the corresponding button.

To register frequently used functions to the Fn button (Function menu)

If you register functions frequently used in the shooting mode to the Function menu, you can display the registered

functions on the screen simply by pressing the Fn (Function) button. On the Function menu screen, you can recall the

function you want to use by selecting the icons.

Function menu

To combine frequently used functions on the menu screen ( My Menu)

If you combine the frequently used items from menus such as the shooting, playback, and network menu on the “My

Menu” screen, you can quickly access the desired menu items.

296

To assign different functions to the dial and switch the function of the dial ( My Dial Settings )

You can assign the desired functions to the front/rear dial and the control wheel, and register up to three combinations of

settings to the camera as “My Dial 1 - 3” settings.

Example: In the case of models with a front/rear dial

To change the shooting settings quickly according to the scene (

/ Memory)

You can register the appropriate shooting settings* for scene to the camera or a memory card, and call up the settings

easily by using the mode dial, etc.

To save the customized camera settings to a memory card (Save/Load Settings)

You can save camera settings* to a memory card using [Save/Load Settings]. This function is useful when you want to

back up the settings, or to import the settings to another camera of the same model, etc.

* Some settings cannot be saved on a memory card.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

Add Item

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Save/Load Settings

You cannot register custom key settings.

297

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the

memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu

of the camera.

Aperture (F number)

Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note

M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has been selected using [

Select Media] can be

used.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

For some functions, the position of the dial and the setting actually used for shooting may not match. If this happens, shoot

images by referring to the information displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Set the product to the setting you want to register.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

298

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Select Media (Memory recall)

Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects the slot 2.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Select Media] → desired slot.

299

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and

temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and

release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu

of the camera.

Exposure

Focus setting

Drive mode (other than self-timer)

To recall registered settings

Hint

You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using

[

Custom Key].

Note

The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is

set to P/A/S/M.

Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered

settings may not take effect.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number from [Recall

Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.

Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you

want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.

Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and

press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.

Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you

chose.

Select [Register].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → Select the desired key and then select one of the

registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the

registration numbers.

The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.

300

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

301

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations

of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key

you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through

[My Dial 3].

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:

While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.

My Dial 1→2→3 :

Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1

→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”

Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:

The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again

to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning

the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.

In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the

C1 (Custom 1) button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].1.

Select a dial or wheel for

(My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.2.

Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].

The settings for

(My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register

(My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use

to recall “My Dial.”

Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”2.

My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

302

Note

“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also

skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is

recalled.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set

Front dial Av Creative Style Move AF Point:L/R

Rear dial Tv Picture Effect Move AF Point:U/D

Press the C1 (Custom1) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.

The icons shown below are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set

the shutter speed.

Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial,

and the rear dial.

Turn the control wheel to set [White Balance], turn the front dial to set [Creative Style], and turn the rear dial to set

[Picture Effect].

Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].5.

Press the shutter button to shoot.6.

303

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Dial Setup

You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial.

Menu item details

Tv Av:

The front dial is used to change the shutter speed and the rear dial to change the aperture value.

Av Tv:

The front dial is used to change the aperture value and the rear dial to change the shutter speed.

Note

The [Dial Setup] function is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Dial Setup] → desired setting.

304

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter

speed.

Menu item details

Normal:

Does not change the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.

Reverse:

Reverses the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

305

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Lock Operation Parts

You can set whether the multi-selector, dials, and wheel can be locked by pressing and holding down the Fn (Function)

button.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not lock the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, or control wheel even if you press and hold down the Fn (Function)

button.

Multi-Selector Only:

Locks the multi-selector.

Dial + Wheel:

Locks the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.

All:

Locks the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.

Hint

You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Note

If you set [

AF Area Registration] to [On], [Lock Operation Parts] will be fixed to [Off].

Related Topic

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Lock Operation Parts] → desired setting.

To lock the operating parts, hold down the Fn (function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the

monitor.

306

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing

(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with

compatible lenses).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

Menu item details

Power Focus:

The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to

the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.

/Full Frame Select:

The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.

The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic

APS-C/Super 35mm

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

307

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to

(My Menu) under MENU.

Hint

You can add up to 30 items to

(My Menu).

Note

You cannot add the following items to

(My Menu).

Any item under MENU →

(Playback)

[View on TV]

Related Topic

Sort Item

Delete Item

Using MENU items

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Add Item].

Select an item that you want to add to

(My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control

wheel.

Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

308

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to

(My Menu) under MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Sort Item].

Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

309

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to

(My Menu) of MENU.

Hint

To delete all the items on a page, select MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to

(My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

Related Topic

Delete Page

Delete All

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Item].

Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then

press the center to delete the selected item.

310

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under

(My Menu) in MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

Delete All

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Page].

Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center of the control wheel to delete the items.

311

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to

(My Menu) in MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

Delete Page

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete All].

Select [OK].

312

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

Menu item details

On:

My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.

Off:

The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

313

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto

Review.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:

Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a

magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.

Off:

Does not display the Auto Review.

Note

When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by

the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

314

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aperture Preview

While you press and hold the key to which you assigned the [Aperture Preview] function, the aperture is stepped down to

the set aperture value and you can check the blurriness prior to shooting.

Hint

Although you can change the aperture value during the preview, the subject may be defocused if you select a brighter aperture.

We recommend that you adjust the focus again.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Shot. Result Preview

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Aperture Preview] function to the

desired key.

Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Aperture Preview] was assigned.

315

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shot. Result Preview

While pressing down the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] is assigned, you can check the image preview with the

DRO, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings applied. Check the shooting result preview before shooting.

Hint

The DRO settings, shutter speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity settings you have set are reflected on the image for [Shot. Result

Preview], but some effects cannot be previewed depending on the shooting settings. Even in that case, the settings you have

selected will be applied to the images you shoot.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Aperture Preview

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → set the [Shot. Result Preview] function to the

desired key.

Confirm the image by pressing the key to which [Shot. Result Preview] was assigned.

316

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style],

or [Picture Effect] on the screen.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:

Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This

setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.

Setting Effect OFF:

Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].

When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.

Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the

icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Hint

When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When

[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the

composition.

Note

[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Movie]

[S&Q Motion]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the

displayed Live View.

Even if [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], when you use the electrical shutter, images will look as if your settings

were applied.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

317

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:

Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.

Square Grid:

Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the

composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.

Diag. + Square Grid:

Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.

Off:

Does not display the grid line.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

318

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.

Menu item details

Auto:

When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.

Viewfinder(Manual):

The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.

Monitor(Manual):

The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.

Hint

You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to

the preferred key.

If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or

[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.

You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to

[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check

mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.

Note

When the monitor is pulled out, the eye sensor of the camera will not detect your eye approaching even if [FINDER/MONITOR] is

set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

319

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

Menu item details

Manual:

Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.

Sunny Weather:

Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note

The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

320

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Viewfinder Bright.

When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding

environment.

Menu item details

Auto:

Adjusts the brightness automatically.

Manual:

Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

321

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:

When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder

color.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

322

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.

This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

Menu item details

Standard:

Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

High:

Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.

Note

When [

Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

Even when [

Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the

temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.

[

Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:

During playback

During HDMI connection

When the temperature inside the camera's body is high

During continuous shooting with [

Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [

Custom Key].

323

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bright Monitoring

Allows you to adjust the composition when shooting in dark environments. By extending the exposure time, you can

check the composition on the viewfinder/monitor even in dark locations such as under the night sky.

Note

During [Bright Monitoring], [Live View Display] will automatically switch to [Setting Effect OFF], and setting values such as

exposure compensation will not be reflected in the live view display. It is recommended that you use [Bright Monitoring] only in

dark locations.

[Bright Monitoring] will be automatically cancelled in the following situations.

When the camera is turned off.

When the shooting mode is changed from P/A/S/M to a mode that is not P/A/S/M.

When the focus mode is set to other than manual focus.

When [

MF Assist] is executed.

When [Focus Magnifier] is selected.

When [Focus Settings] is selected.

During [Bright Monitoring], the shutter speed may be slower than normal while shooting in dark locations. Also, because the

measured brightness range is expanded, the exposure may change.

Related Topic

Live View Display

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → assign the [Bright Monitoring] function to the

desired key.

Press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function, then shoot an image.

The brightness due to [Bright Monitoring] will continue after shooting.

To return the monitor brightness to normal, press the key to which you assigned the [Bright Monitoring] function

once again.

324

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the

camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory

card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

Note

Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable

depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Format] → desired memory card slot.

325

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [

File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can

select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

Note

You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [

File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], you may only select the common folder on the

both memory cards. If there is no common folder, you can make one using [New Folder].

Related Topic

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

MENU→

(Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

326

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one

greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.

Note

When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be

automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically

created.

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], a new folder is created with a folder number one

greater than the largest folder number currently used on both memory cards inserted in the memory card slots.

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard] and an image is shot, a new folder may be

automatically created.

Related Topic

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

MENU→

(Setup)→[New Folder].

327

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.

Menu item details

File Number:

You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.

[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.

[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.

Set File Name:

You can specify the first three characters of the file name.

Folder Name:

You can set how folder names are assigned.

[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.

Example: 100MSDCF

[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.

Example: 10090405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2019)

Hint

The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you

change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.

Note

Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first

character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

328

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Settings (movie)

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

Menu item details

File Number:

You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.

[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.

[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.

Series Counter Reset:

Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].

File Name Format:

You can set the format for movie file names.

[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001

[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”

[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”

[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”

Title Name Settings:

You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].

Hint

The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you

change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.

Note

Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.

[

File Settings] does not apply to AVCHD movies.

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

MENU →

(Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.

329

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images

for the inserted memory card.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Display Media Info.] → desired memory card slot.

330

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings

and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects media in the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects media in the slot 2.

Hint

To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the

image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Prioritize Rec. Media] → desired slot.

331

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory

cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards.

Menu item details

Standard:

Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Simult. (

Records a still image to both memory cards and records a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you

select in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Simult. (

Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a

movie to both memory cards.

Simult. (

/ ):

Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.

Sort(RAW/JPEG):

Records an image in RAW format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media],

and records an image in JPEG format to the other memory card. Movies are recorded to the memory card in the memory

card slot that you selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Sort(JPEG/RAW):

Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media],

and records an image in RAW format to the other memory card. Movies are recorded to the memory card in the memory

card slot that you selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Sort(

/ ):

Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a

movie to the other memory card.

Hint

Even when [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(RAW/JPEG)] or [Sort(JPEG/RAW)], if [RAW & JPEG] is not selected under [

File

Format], only files of the selected format will be recorded.

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Recording Mode] → desired setting.

332

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media

If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to

the other memory card.

Menu item details

On:

The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you

have forgotten to insert a memory card.

Off:

The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media].

How the camera switches the memory card slot in use

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard]:

When images cannot be recorded to the memory card in use, [Prioritize Rec. Media] switches automatically and images

are recorded to the other memory card.

When the other memory card becomes full after switching, the camera starts recording in the former slot again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

: Recording images

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is replaced with a recordable one.

When recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards:

Recording still images with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

)]

Recording movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

)]

Recording still images or movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

/ )]

The camera stops simultaneous recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the

memory card that has become full, the camera starts recording to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts

simultaneous recording with the selected setting again.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Auto Switch Media] → desired setting.

333

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Simult. (

/ )])

: Simultaneous recording is available.

: Recording is disabled.

: The same image cannot be recorded simultaneously.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

Images that are not recorded simultaneously (for example: still images during [Simult. (

)]) continue to be

recorded to the other memory card when the memory card in use becomes full.

When the memory card in use becomes full while recording a movie, the movie continues to be recorded to the other

memory card until the recording in progress is finished.

When recording images separately to two memory cards in the RAW and JPEG formats:

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(RAW/JPEG)] or [Sort(JPEG/RAW)], and [

File Format] is set to [RAW &

JPEG]

The camera stops recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the memory card that

has become full, the camera starts recording both in the RAW and JPEG formats to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording

the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Sort(RAW/JPEG)])

: Images are sorted by the file format.

: Recording still images is disabled (movies can be recorded).

: Images cannot be sorted.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

334

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

When the memory card in use becomes full while recording movies, the camera starts recording to the other memory

card.

When recording still images and movies separately to two memory cards:

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(

/ )]

When either of the memory cards becomes full, both still images and movies are recorded to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording

the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Sort(

/ )])

: Images are sorted by the image type.

: Images cannot be sorted.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

Hint

Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches the

slot using [Auto Switch Media], replace the memory card in the former slot with a recordable memory card.

If [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], the setting for [Prioritize Rec. Media] will switch automatically when the slot switches. If

you want to record on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot again using [Prioritize Rec. Media].

If you want to continually record with the settings selected with [Recording Mode] and [Prioritize Rec. Media], set [Auto Switch

Media] to [Off].

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Recordable movie times

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

335

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images

on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover

Image DB].

Note

If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].

MENU →

(Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → desired memory card slot → [Enter].

336

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

Menu item details

On:all:

Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

On:other than e-shut:

Sounds are produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button halfway down, etc. The electronic shutter does not

produce any sounds.

On:e-shutter only:

Only the electronic shutter produces sounds. Sounds are not produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button

halfway down, etc.

Off:

Sounds are not produced.

Note

If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

337

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Power Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent

wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button

halfway down.

Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note

Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

While power is being supplied via USB

While playing back slideshows

During FTP transfer

While recording movies

While connected to a computer or TV

While [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On]

When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]

MENU →

(Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

338

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],

you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

Menu item details

Standard:

Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.

High:

Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.

Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Note

Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable

time for movies may not change.

Related Topic

Recordable movie times

MENU →

(Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

339

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

IR Remote Ctrl

You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2SEC button (2 second delay shutter), and

START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold

separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Infrared Remote

Commander.

Menu item details

On:

Allows infrared remote commander operation.

Off:

Does not allow infrared remote commander operation.

Note

The lens or lens hood may block the infrared remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the infrared remote commander in the

position from which the signal can reach the product.

When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after using an infrared remote

commander.

An infrared remote commander cannot be used while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

MENU →

(Setup) → [IR Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.

340

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

Note

If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must

reformat the card will appear.

If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or

"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL, the viewfinder or monitor of the camera or the screen of an HDMI-connected device

may black out for an instant in the following situations. This is not a malfunction.

When you start or stop recording movies while the shooting mode is set to a mode other than

(Movie) or .

When you change the shooting mode from

(Movie) or to another mode.

When you play back a movie for the first time after switching to the playback mode.

MENU →

(Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

341

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),

you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Menu item details

Auto:

The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.

2160p/1080p:

Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.

1080p:

Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).

1080i:

Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note

If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which

TV is to be connected.

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

342

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)

You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [

Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]

or [24p 100M].

Menu item details

60p:

Movies are output as 60p.

24p:

Movies are output as 24p.

Note

Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.

Related Topic

Record Setting (movie)

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

343

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable

(sold separately).

Menu item details

On:

Displays the shooting information on the TV.

The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s

monitor.

Off:

Does not display the shooting information on the TV.

Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on

the camera’s monitor.

Note

When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

344

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting

the signal to other professional-use devices.

This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information

as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to

recognize the time data.

Menu item details

On:

Time code is output to other devices.

Off:

Time code is not output to other devices.

Note

When [

TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [

TC Output] to [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

345

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop

recording using the camera.

Menu item details

On:

The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.

The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.

Off:

The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.

Note

Available for external recorders/players compatible with [

REC Control].

When you use the [

REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).

When [

TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.

Even when

is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of the

recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

346

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can

operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

Menu item details

On:

You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Off:

You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note

If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on

the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another

manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

347

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB Connection

Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.

Also, when you set MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct Method] to [USB], set [PC

Remote] under [PC Remote Function] to [Off].

Menu item details

Auto:

Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be

connected. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are

enabled for use.

Mass Storage:

Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

MTP:

Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or

Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.

Note

It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

348

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

Menu item details

Multi:

Normally, use [Multi].

Single:

Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

349

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

Menu item details

On:

Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Off:

Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

A checkmark indicates that the operation is available, and “―” indicates that the operation is unavailable.

Note

Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images

Playing back images

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections

Charging a battery pack ―

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted ―

350

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Save/Load Settings

You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same

model.

Menu item details

Save:

Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.

Load:

Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.

Delete:

Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.

Settings that cannot be saved

The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting

parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)

Camera Settings1

AF Micro Adj.

White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3

Face Registration

Camera Settings2

Zoom

Network

FTP Transfer Func. *

Wi-Fi Settings

Wired LAN Setting

Edit Device Name

Import Root Certificate

Security(IPsec)

Playback

View Mode

Setup

Language

Date/Time Setup

Area Setting

IPTC Information

MENU →

(Setup) → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.

You can save or load settings under [FTP Transfer Func.] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → [Save/Load FTP

Settings]. For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

351

Note

You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].

Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.

Only Slot 1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/loading destination slot.

You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.

You can use this function to save settings registered to [

/ Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is

unavailable when the mode dial is set to 1/2/3 (Memory recall). Set the mode dial to a position other than 1/2/3 before using this

function.

352

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

353

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal

rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:

Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].

Date/Time:

Sets the date and time.

Date Format:

Selects the date and time display format.

Hint

To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more

with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your

service facility.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

354

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

355

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:

Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])

If you select [On], an

icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:

Sets the photographer name.

Set Copyright:

Sets the copyright holder name.

Disp. Copyright Info:

Displays the current copyright information.

Note

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter up to 46

letters.

icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns

before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your

desired name.

356

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,

etc.

Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.

The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is

attached.

Note

Updating can be performed only when the battery level is

(3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged

battery pack.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Version].

357

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

IPTC Information

You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata

Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:

Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])

If you select [On], the

icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera. Select [Slot 1] or [Slot 2] as the memory card from which

to read out IPTC information.

Hint

When you play back images that have IPTC information, the

icon appears on the screen.

For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/

Note

Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.

You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.

To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.

Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.

Related Topic

Setting Reset

IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

MENU →

(Setup) → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.

358

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Write Serial Number

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

Menu item details

On:

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

Off:

Does not write the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

359

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Demo Mode

The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration), when the

camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select [Off].

Menu item details

On:

The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about one minute. Only

protected AVCHD movies can be played back.

Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date and time.

Off:

Does not show the demonstration.

Note

You can activate this function only when the product is connected using a dedicated AC Adaptor.

When there is no protected AVCHD movies on the memory card, you cannot select [On].

[Demo Mode] always displays movies on the memory card in memory card slot 1.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.

360

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:

Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.

Initialize:

Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note

Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Related Topic

AF Micro Adj.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

361

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Imaging Edge Mobile

Using the smartphone application Imaging Edge Mobile, you can shoot an image while controlling the camera using a

smartphone or transfer the images recorded on the camera to the smartphone. Download and install the application

Imaging Edge Mobile from your smartphone’s application store. If Imaging Edge Mobile is already installed on your

smartphone, be sure to update it to the latest version.

For details on Imaging Edge Mobile, refer to the support page (https://www.sony.net/iem/).

Note

Depending on future version upgrades, the operational procedures or screen displays are subject to change without notice.

362

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.

Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:

Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])

Connection:

Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

Always Connected:

Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to

a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a

smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.

Note

If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].

Related Topic

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.

363

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

You can connect this product to an NFC-enabled smartphone by touching them together and then operate the product

using the smartphone.

Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

About “NFC”

NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones

or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

Note

If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the

(N-Mark) of this

product.

If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.

If the product is in a case, remove it.

Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency

band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

this, the location information link function is not available.

Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

On an iPhone/iPad, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Scan NFC/QR Code of the Camera] →

[Scan NFC of the Camera] to activate the NFC function.

Switch this product to shooting mode.

The NFC function is available only when the

(N-Mark) is displayed on the screen.

Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.

The smartphone and the camera are connected.

You can shoot an image via remote control while checking the composition of the image on the Imaging Edge

Mobile screen.

364

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

If this product and the smartphone are connected when the product is in playback mode, the displayed image is sent to the

smartphone.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Airplane Mode

365

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the QR Code.

Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

Hint

Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the smartphone. This

enables you to easily connect the smartphone to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/

Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)

Note

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency

band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

this, the location information link function is not available.

If you cannot connect your smartphone to this product using the [One-touch(NFC)] function or QR Code, use the SSID and

password.

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and select [Scan QR Code of the Camera].

Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.

Read the QR Code displayed on the monitor of this product with the smartphone.

Once the QR Code has been read, a message [Connect with the camera?] will be displayed on the smartphone

screen.

Select [OK] on the smartphone screen.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.

366

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

367

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

You can control this product using your smartphone by connecting your smartphone to the camera using the SSID and

password.

Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

Note

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency

band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

this, the location information link function is not available.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

Press the

(Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.

Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx).

Input the password that is displayed on this product.

The smartphone is connected to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the smartphone screen.

368

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

You can connect an iPhone or iPad to the camera using the QR Code and operate the camera using the iPhone or iPad.

Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

Hint

Once the QR Code has been read, this product's SSID (DIRECT-xxxx) and password are registered to the iPhone or iPad. This

enables you to easily connect the iPhone or iPad to the product via Wi-Fi at a later date by selecting the SSID. (Set [Ctrl w/

Smartphone] to [On] in advance.)

Note

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency

band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

this, the location information link function is not available.

If you cannot connect your iPhone or iPad to this product using the QR Code, use the SSID and password.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code (A) and the SSID (B) are displayed on the monitor of this product.

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your iPhone or iPad and select [Scan QR Code of the Camera].

Select [OK] on the iPhone or iPad screen.

When a message is displayed, select [OK] again.

Read the QR Code displayed on the monitor of this product with the iPhone or iPad.

The iPhone or iPad will connect to the product.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.

369

370

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

You can control the camera using an iPhone or iPad by connecting the iPhone or iPad to the camera using the SSID and

password.

Make sure that [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] is set to [On] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone].

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [ Connection].

QR Code is displayed on the monitor of this product.

Press the

(Delete) button of this product.

This product's SSID and password are displayed on the monitor of this product.

Select the model name of this product (DIRECT-xxxx: xxxx) on the Wi-Fi setting screen of your iPhone or

iPad.

Input the password that is displayed on this product.

371

Note

Radio wave interference may occur as Bluetooth communications and Wi-Fi (2.4 GHz) communications use the same frequency

band. If your Wi-Fi connection is unstable, it may be improved by turning off the Bluetooth function of the smartphone. If you do

this, the location information link function is not available.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

The iPhone or iPad is connected to the product.

Confirm that your iPhone or iPad was connected to the “SSID” shown on this product.

Return to the "Home" screen of the iPhone or iPad and launch Imaging Edge Mobile.

You can now shoot images remotely while checking the composition on the screen of your iPhone or iPad.

372

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, slow-motion movies, or quick-motion movies to a smartphone and view

them. The application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:

Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.

(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →

[Enter].

Select on Smartphone:

Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note

You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can only transfer images that are saved on the memory card in the memory card slot being played back. To change which

memory card slot is being played back, select MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → the desired slot.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].

To change the image size, refer to the following steps.

For Android smartphone

Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].

For iPhone/iPad

Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

You cannot send AVCHD format movies.

MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the

(Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to

Smartphone] will appear.

If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the

smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.

373

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play

smoothly, or there may be no sound.

Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it

back on a smartphone.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you

want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the

smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Airplane Mode

374

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

When transferring XAVC S video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-

bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.

Menu item details

Proxy Only:

Transfers only proxy movies.

Original Only:

Transfers only original movies.

Proxy & Original:

Transfers both proxy and original movies.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Proxy Recording

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.

375

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [Cnct.

during Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the

camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

Menu Item Details

On :

Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [Cnct. during Power

OFF], turn it off.

Off :

Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Advance Preparation

Operations

Note

If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera

Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera switches to the shooting mode, and [Send to Smartphone Func.] ends.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Bluetooth Settings

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → desired setting.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.1.

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → [On].2.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.3.

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote

Power ON/OFF] screen.

Turn off the camera.1.

Select the camera on the [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] screen of Imaging Edge Mobile to turn on the camera.

The camera’s access lamp will light up, and the browsing and transferring functions will become available.

376

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)

With just one touch, you can connect this product and an NFC-enabled smartphone, and send an image displayed on

the product screen directly to the smartphone. You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies and slow-motion and quick-

motion movies.

About “NFC”

NFC is a technology that enables short-range wireless communication between various devices, such as mobile phones

or IC tags, etc. NFC makes data communication simpler with just a touch on the designated touch-point.

NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard of short-range wireless communication technology.

Note

You can only transfer images that are saved on the memory card in the memory card slot being played back. To change the

memory card slot to be played back, select MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → the desired slot.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].

To change the image size, refer to the following steps.

For an Android smartphone

Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].

For iPhone or iPad

Select Imaging Edge Mobile from Settings, and change the image size using [Copy Image Size].

Activate the NFC function of the smartphone.

On an iPhone/iPad, launch Imaging Edge Mobile, and then select [Scan NFC/QR Code of the Camera] →

[Scan NFC of the Camera] to activate the NFC function.

Display a single image on the product.

Keep touching the smartphone to the camera for 1 to 2 seconds.

The product and the smartphone are connected, and then the displayed image is sent to the smartphone.

Before you touch the smartphone, cancel the sleep and lock-screen functions of the smartphone.

The NFC function is available only when the

(N-Mark) is displayed on the product.

To transfer two or more images, select MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to

Smartphone] to select images. After the connection enabled screen appears, use NFC to connect the product

and the smartphone.

377

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

You cannot send AVCHD format movies.

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play

smoothly, or there may be no sound.

If the Image Index is displayed on the product, you cannot transfer images using the NFC function.

If you cannot make a connection, do as the following:

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone, and then move the smartphone slowly toward the

(N-Mark) of this

product.

If the smartphone is in a case, remove it.

If the product is in a case, remove it.

Check whether the NFC function is activated on your smartphone.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect the product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Airplane Mode

378

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Location Info. Link Set.

You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected

with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting

images.

Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.

If “

Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the

following steps beforehand.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed

the application, update it to the latest version.

Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will

appear on the top page of the application.

: Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing

operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.

If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing

and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application

Imaging Edge Mobile.

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].2.

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].3.

: Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.

: Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge

Mobile.

: Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then

select your camera from the list.

: Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.

379

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:

Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.

Auto Time Correct.:

Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Auto Area Adjust.:

Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.

(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.

(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.

Hint

Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is

off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the

camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the

smartphone.

When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume

location information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.

Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.

Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.

Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/

Note

When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again, delete the pairing information for

the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile before trying again.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.

If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of

the smartphone that is already linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the

paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge Mobile.

To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].

The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

Supported smartphones

Refer to the support page for the latest information.

https://www.sony.net/iem/

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information

obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

380

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

381

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander RMT-P1BT (sold separately). Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the instruction manual for the

Bluetooth remote commander as well.

Menu item details

On:

Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Off:

Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Hint

The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.

Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.

Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

Note

When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing

again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the

paired Bluetooth remote commander.

You cannot use the function for linking location information with a smartphone while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

You cannot use an infrared remote commander while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

While [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On], the camera will not switch to the power-saving mode. Change the setting to [Off] when

you are done using the Bluetooth remote commander.

On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will

appear.

On the camera, select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for

pairing.

On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing

the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by

setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

382

Related Topic

Bluetooth Settings

383

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

View on TV

You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without connecting the product and

TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating

instructions supplied with the TV.

Slideshow settings

You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

Playback Selection:

Selects the group of images to be shown.

Folder View(Still):

Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].

Date View:

Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].

Interval:

Selects from [Short] and [Long].

Effects*:

Selects from [On] and [Off].

Playback Image Size:

Selects from [HD] and [4K].

Note

You can only transfer images that are saved on the memory card in the memory card slot being played back. To change the

memory card slot to be played back, select MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → the desired slot.

You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.

You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-enabled TVs).

If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access point first.

Displaying the images on the TV may take time.

Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).

MENU →

(Network) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.

When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control wheel.

To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control wheel.

To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then select [Device list].

The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.

384

When [Display as Group] is set to [On], only the first image of the group is transferred to the TV.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

385

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

MENU →

(Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

386

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.

Note

[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-

Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi

Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact

the administrator of the access point.

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such

as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,

change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

MENU →

(Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

387

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,

security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point

operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

WPS PIN:

Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.

Priority Connection:

Select [On] or [Off].

IP Address Setting:

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.

When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access

point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.

Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without the mark do not require a password.

Select [OK].

388

Select [Auto] or [Manual].

IP Address:

If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.

Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:

If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Note

To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

How to use the keyboard

389

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data

transfers than [2.4GHz]. The [Frequency Band] setting only applies to [Send to Smartphone], [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and

[PC Remote] (Wi-Fi Direct).

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

Note

If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger

radio field will be displayed.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Frequency Band] → desired setting.

390

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

391

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone], [

Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and

the Wi-Fi Direct connections using [PC Remote Function] with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to

change which devices have permission to connect, reset the connection information.

Note

If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the

smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the

settings of the computer.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

392

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth

connection.

If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location

Info. Link Set..”

If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):

Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.

Pairing:

Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.

Disp Device Address:

Displays the BD address of the camera.

Related Topic

Location Info. Link Set.

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.

393

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wired LAN Setting

Configures a wired LAN.

Menu item details

IP Address Setting:

Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually.

Display Wired LAN Info.:

Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.

IP Address:

If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.

Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:

If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Related Topic

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Network) → [Wired LAN Setting] → desired setting.

394

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Network) → [Edit Device Name].

Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

395

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications

during FTP transfer.

For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

MENU →

(Network) → [Import Root Certificate].

396

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Security(IPsec)

Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a wired LAN or Wi-Fi connection.

Menu item details

IPsec ([On]/[Off]):

Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.

Dest. IP Address:

Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Shared Key:

Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Note

Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].

For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.

Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.

On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.

The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-

384-192.

The authentication expires after 24 hours.

Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are

not encrypted.

For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.

MENU →

(Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.

397

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

MENU →

(Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

398

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recommended computer environment

You can confirm the operating computer environment of the software from the following URL:

https://www.sony.net/pcenv/

399

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

PlayMemories Home

With PlayMemories Home, you can do the following:

You can import images shot with this product to your computer.

You can play back the images imported to your computer.

You can share your images using PlayMemories Online.

You can edit movies such as by cutting or merging.

You can add various effects such as BGM and subtitles to movies.

Also for Windows, you can do the following:

You can organize images on the computer on a calendar by shooting date to view them.

You can edit and correct images, such as by trimming and resizing.

You can create a disc from movies imported to a computer.

Blu-ray discs or AVCHD discs can be created from XAVC S-format movies.

You can upload images to a network service. (An Internet connection is required.)

For other details, please refer to the Help of PlayMemories Home.

Related Topic

Installing PlayMemories Home

400

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Installing PlayMemories Home

Note

Log on as Administrator.

It may be necessary to restart your computer. When the restart confirmation message appears, restart the computer following the

instructions on the screen.

DirectX may be installed depending on your computer’s system environment.

Using your computer's Internet browser, go to the URL below and download PlayMemories Home by

following the on-screen instructions.

https://www.sony.net/pm/

An Internet connection is required.

For detailed instructions, visit the PlayMemories Home support page.

https://www.sony.co.jp/pmh-se/

Connect the product to your computer using the USB cable, then turn the product on.

New functions may be added to PlayMemories Home. Even if PlayMemories Home has already been installed

on your computer, connect this product and your computer again.

Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the camera is in operation or the access screen is

displayed. Doing so may damage the data.

A: To the USB Type-C terminal

B: To the USB jack of the computer

401

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Connecting to a computer

Note

Do not turn on/off or restart the computer, or wake the computer from sleep mode when a USB connection has been established

between the computer and the camera. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before turning on/off or restarting the computer, or

waking the computer from sleep mode, disconnect the camera from the computer.

Related Topic

USB Connection

USB LUN Setting

Insert a sufficiently charged battery pack into the camera.

Turn on the camera and the computer.

Check that [USB Connection] under

(Setup) is set to [Mass Storage].

Connect the camera to the computer using the USB cable (A).

When you connect the camera to the computer for the first time, the procedure for recognizing the camera may

start automatically on the computer. Wait until the procedure is finished.

If you connect the product to your computer using the USB cable when [USB Power Supply] is set to [On],

power is supplied from your computer. (Default setting: [On])

Use the USB Type-C cable (supplied) or a USB-standard cable.

Use a USB 3.2-compatible computer and the USB Type-C cable (supplied) for higher-speed communications.

402

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home

PlayMemories Home allows you to easily import images. For details on PlayMemories Home functions, see the Help of

PlayMemories Home.

Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For Windows)

When the AutoPlay Wizard appears after making a USB connection between this product and a computer, click [Open

folder to view files] → [OK] → [DCIM]. Then copy the desired images to the computer.

Importing images to the computer without using PlayMemories Home (For Mac)

Connect the product to your Mac computer. Double-click the newly recognized icon on the desktop → the folder in which

the image you want to import is stored. Then drag and drop the image file on to the hard disk icon.

Note

For operations such as importing XAVC S movies or AVCHD movies to the computer, use PlayMemories Home.

Do not edit or otherwise process AVCHD or XAVC S movie files/folders from the connected computer. Movie files may be

damaged or become unplayable. Do not delete or copy AVCHD movies or XAVC S movies on the memory card from the

computer. Sony is not held liable for consequences resulting from such operations via the computer.

If you delete images or perform other operations from the connected computer, the image database file may become

inconsistent. In this case, repair the image database file.

403

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Disconnecting the camera from the computer

Perform steps 1 and 2 below before performing the following operations:

Disconnecting the USB cable.

Removing a memory card.

Turning off the product.

Note

On Mac computers, drag and drop the memory card icon or the drive icon into the “Trash” icon. The camera will be disconnected

from the computer.

On some computers, the disconnection icon may not appear. In this case, you can skip the steps above.

Do not remove the USB cable from the camera while the access lamp is lit. The data may be damaged.

Click

(Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media ) in the taskbar.

Click the displayed message.

404

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and

storing images on the computer.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.

For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/pcremote.php

Menu item details

PC Remote:

Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])

PC Remote Cnct Method:

Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]. ([USB]/[Wired

LAN]/[Wi-Fi Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])

Pairing:

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wired LAN] or [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.

Wi-Fi Direct Info.:

Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to

[Wi-Fi Direct].

Still Img. Save Dest.:

Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC

Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])

RAW+J PC Save Img:

Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].

([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])

PC Save Image Size:

Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The

original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])

How to connect the camera and the computer

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]

Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wired LAN]

Connect the camera to the computer or a switching hub using a commercially available LAN cable. The camera and the

computer need to be paired in advance.

Connect the camera and the computer or switching hub using the LAN cable, and select MENU→

(Network) → [PC

Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, then use Remote Camera Tool to pair the camera and the computer.

Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the camera to finish pairing.

MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.

Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge (Remote) on the computer.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge (Remote).

The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct

Method].

405

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]

Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.

Select MENU→

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information

(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information

displayed on the camera.

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]

Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be

paired in advance.

Select MENU→

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the

wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge

(Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the camera

to finish pairing.

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

Note

When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is

set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be

released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot shoot with [PC Remote].

[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [

File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

406

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Computer

You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access point or wireless broadband

router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on

your computer and register the access point on the product.

Note

Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the images to your computer.

You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.

If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB connection and follow the

instructions in PlayMemories Home.

Proxy movies cannot be transferred.

Related Topic

Installing PlayMemories Home

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Start your computer.

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Computer] → the desired memory card slot.

407

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP

servers is required.

For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

Related Topic

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

MENU →

(Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.

408

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Imaging Edge

Imaging Edge is a software suite that includes functions such as remote shooting from a computer, and adjusting or

developing RAW images recorded with the camera.

Viewer:

You can display and search images.

Edit:

You can edit images with various corrections such as tone curve and sharpness, and develop images recorded in RAW

format.

Remote:

You can adjust the camera settings or shoot images from a computer connected to the camera with a USB cable, Wi-Fi,

or wired LAN.

To control the camera using the computer, select MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote] →

[On], and then connect the camera to the computer with a USB cable, Wi-Fi, or wired LAN.

For details on how to use Imaging Edge, refer to the support page.

https://www.sony.net/disoft/help/

Installing Imaging Edge on your computer

Download and install the software by accessing the following URL:

https://www.sony.net/disoft/d/

Related Topic

USB Connection

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

409

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Remote Camera Tool

Remote Camera Tool is software for PC remote shooting using a wired LAN. You can change the camera settings and

shoot images from a computer by connecting the camera to a computer or switching hub using a LAN cable.

For details on how to install and use Remote Camera Tool, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/app/remotecameratool/l/index.php

MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote] → [On].1.

MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct Method] → [Wired LAN].2.

Connect the camera and the computer using a LAN cable.3.

Configure the required LAN settings.4.

Launch Remote Camera Tool on the computer to perform remote shooting.5.

410

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Selecting a disc to be created

You can create a disc that can be played back on other devices from a movie recorded on this camera.

What devices can play back the disc depends on the disc type. Select a disc type suitable for the playback devices you

will be using.

Depending on the movie type, the movie format may be converted when creating a disc.

High-definition image quality (HD) (Blu-ray Disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on a Blu-ray Disc, creating a high-definition image quality

(HD) disc.

A Blu-ray Disc enables you to record longer-duration high-definition image quality (HD) movies than DVD discs.

Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD

Players: Blu-ray Disc playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 4, etc.)

High-definition image quality (HD) (AVCHD recording disc)

High-definition image quality (HD) movies can be recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a high-

definition image quality (HD) disc.

Writable movie formats: XAVC S, AVCHD

Players: AVCHD format playback devices (Sony Blu-ray Disc players, PlayStation 4, etc.)

You cannot play these kinds of discs on ordinary DVD players.

Standard definition image quality (STD)

Standard definition image quality (STD) movies converted from high-definition image quality (HD) movies can be

recorded on DVD media such as DVD-R discs, creating a standard image quality (STD) disc.

Writable movie formats: AVCHD

Players: Ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can play back DVD discs, etc.)

Hint

You can use the following types of 12 cm discs with PlayMemories Home.

BD-R/DVD-R/DVD+R/DVD+R DL: Non-rewritable

BD-RE/DVD-RW/DVD+RW: Rewritable

Additional recording is not possible.

Always maintain your “PlayStation 4” to use the latest version of the “PlayStation 4” system software.

Note

4K movies cannot be recorded on a disc in 4K image quality.

Related Topic

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies

Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies

411

Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies

412

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies

You can create Blu-ray Discs that can be played back on Blu-ray Disc playback devices (such as Sony Blu-ray Disc

players or the PlayStation 4, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create Blu-ray Discs using PlayMemories

Home.

Your computer must be able to create Blu-ray Discs.

When you create a Blu-ray Disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. The

necessary software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet connection is needed.)

For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create Blu-ray Discs using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.

For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

Note

When creating Blu-ray discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the XAVC S movie format, the image quality is

converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i). It is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.

To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.

Related Topic

Selecting a disc to be created

Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies

Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies

413

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality

movies

You can create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) that can be played back on AVCHD-compatible playback devices

(such as Sony Blu-ray Disc players or the PlayStation 4, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD discs (AVCHD recording

discs) using PlayMemories Home.

Your computer must be able to create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs).

When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. The necessary

software is automatically added to your computer. (An Internet connection is needed.)

For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help guide for PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using a Blu-ray recorder, etc.

For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

Note

When creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the XAVC S movie

format, the image quality is converted to 1920×1080 (60i/50i). It is not possible to create discs with the original image quality.

To record movies with the original image quality, copy movies to a computer or an external medium.

When creating AVCHD recording discs using PlayMemories Home from movies recorded in the AVCHD movie format with [

Record Setting] set to [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)], the image quality is converted and it is not possible to create discs with the

original image quality. This conversion can take a long time. To record movies with the original image quality, use a Blu-ray Disc.

Related Topic

Selecting a disc to be created

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies

Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies

414

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Creating DVD discs from standard image quality movies

You can create DVD discs that can be played back on ordinary DVD playback devices (DVD players, computers that can

play back DVD discs, etc.).

A. How to create using a computer

With a Windows computer, you can copy movies imported to the computer and create DVD disc using PlayMemories

Home.

Your computer must be able to create DVD discs.

When you create a DVD disc for the first time, connect your camera to the computer using a USB cable. Install the

dedicated add-on software following the on-screen instructions. (An internet connection is needed.)

For details on how to create a disc using PlayMemories Home, refer to the Help for PlayMemories Home.

B. How to create using a device other than a computer

You can also create DVD discs using a Blu-ray recorder, HDD recorder, etc.

For details, refer to the device's operating instructions.

Related Topic

Selecting a disc to be created

Creating Blu-ray Discs from high-definition image quality movies

Creating DVD discs (AVCHD recording discs) from high-definition image quality movies

415

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using MENU items

You can change settings related to all the camera operations including shooting, playback, and operating method. You

can also execute camera functions from the MENU.

Hint

You can display the menu screen by assigning the [MENU] function to a custom key using [

Custom Key] or [ Custom

Key], and then pressing that key.

Related Topic

Add Item

Press the MENU button to display the menu screen.

Select the desired setting you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel or by

turning the control wheel, and then press the center of the control wheel.

Select a MENU tab (A) at the top of the screen, and press the left/right side of the control wheel to move to

another MENU tab.

You can move to another MENU tab by turning the front dial.

You can move to the next MENU tab by pressing the Fn button.

You can go back to the previous screen by pressing the MENU button.

Select the desired setting value, and press the center to confirm your selection.

416

Display From My Menu

417

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Format (still image)

Sets the file format for still images.

Menu item details

RAW:

Digital processing is not performed on this file format. Select this format to process images on a computer for

professional purposes.

RAW & JPEG:

A RAW image and a JPEG image are created at the same time. This is suitable when you need two image files, a JPEG

for viewing, and a RAW for editing.

JPEG:

The image is recorded in the JPEG format.

About RAW images

To open a RAW image file recorded with this camera, the software Imaging Edge is needed. With Imaging Edge, you

can open a RAW image file, then convert it into a popular image format such as JPEG or TIFF, or readjust the white

balance, saturation or contrast of the image.

You cannot apply [Auto HDR] or [Picture Effect] functions with RAW images.

RAW images recorded with this camera have a resolution of 14 bits per pixel. However, resolution is limited to 12 bits

in the following shooting modes:

[

Long Exposure NR]

[BULB]

[Cont. Shooting] when [

RAW File Type] is set to [Compressed]

You can set whether RAW images are compressed or uncompressed using [

RAW File Type].

Note

If you do not intend to edit the images on your computer, we recommend that you record in JPEG format.

You cannot add DPOF (print order) registration marks to RAW images.

Related Topic

JPEG Image Size (still image)

RAW File Type (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

418

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

RAW File Type (still image)

Selects the file type for RAW images.

Menu item details

Compressed:

Records images in compressed RAW format. The file size of the image will be approximately half of that with

[Uncompressed].

Uncompressed:

Records images in uncompressed RAW format. When [Uncompressed] is selected for [

RAW File Type], the file size

of the image will be larger than if it were recorded in compressed RAW format.

Note

When [Uncompressed] is selected for [

RAW File Type], the icon on the screen switches to . is also displayed

while an image shot in uncompressed RAW format is played back.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ RAW File Type] → desired setting.

419

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

JPEG Quality (still image)

Selects the JPEG image quality when [

File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG] or [JPEG].

Menu item details

Extra fine/Fine/Standard:

Since the compression rate increases from [Extra fine] to [Fine] to [Standard], the file size decreases in the same order.

This allows more files to be recorded on one memory card, but the image quality is lower.

Related Topic

File Format (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Quality] → desired setting.

420

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

JPEG Image Size (still image)

The larger the image size, the more detail will be reproduced when the image is printed on large-format paper. The

smaller the image size, the more images can be recorded.

Menu item details

When recording in the full frame size

When recording in the APS-C-equivalent size

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ JPEG Image Size] → desired setting.

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

L: 24M 6000×4000 pixels

M: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

S: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

L︓21M 5328×4000 pixels

M︓9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

S︓5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

L: 20M 6000×3376 pixels

M: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

S: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

L: 16M 4000×4000 pixels

M: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

S: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 3:2

L: 10M 3936×2624 pixels

M: 6.0M 3008×2000 pixels

S: 2.6M 1968×1312 pixels

421

Note

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], the image size for RAW images corresponds to “L.”

Related Topic

Aspect Ratio (still image)

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 4:3

L︓9.2M 3488×2624 pixels

M︓5.3M 2656×2000 pixels

S︓2.3M 1744×1312 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 16:9

L: 8.7M 3936×2216 pixels

M: 5.1M 3008×1688 pixels

S: 2.2M 1968×1112 pixels

When [ Aspect Ratio] is set to 1:1

L: 6.9M 2624×2624 pixels

M: 4.0M 2000×2000 pixels

S: 1.7M 1312×1312 pixels

422

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aspect Ratio (still image)

Menu item details

3:2:

Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film

4:3:

The aspect ratio is 4:3.

16:9:

The aspect ratio is 16:9.

1:1:

The horizontal and vertical ratio is equal.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Aspect Ratio] → desired setting.

423

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

APS-C/Super 35mm

Sets whether to record in APS-C-equivalent size for still images and in Super 35mm-equivalent size for movies. If you

select [On] or [Auto], you can use an APS-C size dedicated lens on this product.

Menu item details

On:

Records in either APS-C-equivalent size or Super 35mm-equivalent size.

Auto:

Automatically sets the capture range according to the lens.

Off:

Always captures 35mm full-frame image sensor pictures.

Note

When you attach an APS-C compatible lens and set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [Off], you may not achieve the desired shooting

results.

When you set [APS-C/Super 35mm] to [On], the angle of view will be the same as when shooting with an APS-C size image

sensor.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [APS-C/Super 35mm] → desired setting.

424

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Long Exposure NR (still image)

When you set the shutter speed to 1 second(s) or longer (long exposure shooting), noise reduction is turned on for the

duration that the shutter is open. With the function turned on, the grainy noise typical of long exposures is reduced.

Menu item details

On:

Activates noise reduction for the same duration that the shutter is open. When noise reduction is in progress, a message

appears and you cannot take another picture. Select this to prioritize the image quality.

Off:

Does not activate noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note

[

Long Exposure NR] is not available when [ Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Noise reduction may not be activated even if [

Long Exposure NR] is set to [On] in the following situations:

[Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting] or [Cont. Bracket].

[

Long Exposure NR] cannot be set to [Off] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Long Exposure NR] → desired setting.

425

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

High ISO NR (still image)

When shooting with high ISO sensitivity, the product reduces noise that becomes more noticeable when the product

sensitivity is high.

Menu item details

Normal:

Activates high ISO noise reduction normally.

Low:

Activates high ISO noise reduction moderately.

Off:

Does not activate high ISO noise reduction. Select this to prioritize the timing of shooting.

Note

[

High ISO NR] is fixed to [Normal] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW], this function is not available.

[

High ISO NR] does not work for RAW images when the [ File Format] is [RAW & JPEG].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ High ISO NR] → desired setting.

426

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Color Space (still image)

The way colors are represented using combinations of numbers or the range of color reproduction is called “color

space.” You can change the color space depending on the purpose of the image.

Menu item details

sRGB:

This is the standard color space of the digital camera. Use [sRGB] in normal shooting, such as when you intend to print

out the images without any modification.

AdobeRGB:

This color space has a wide range of color reproduction. When a large part of the subject is vivid green or red, Adobe

RGB is effective. The file name of the recorded image starts with “_.”

Note

[AdobeRGB] is for applications or printers that support color management and DCF2.0 option color space. Images may not be

printed or viewed in the correct colors if you use applications or printers that do not support Adobe RGB.

When displaying images that were recorded with [AdobeRGB] on non-Adobe RGB-compliant devices, the images will be

displayed with low saturation.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Color Space] → desired setting.

427

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Lens Comp.

Compensates for shading in the corners of the screen or distortion of the screen, or reduces color deviation at the

corners of the screen caused by certain lens characteristics.

Menu item details

Shading Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically compensate for darkness in the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Chromatic Aberration Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically reduce color deviation at the corners of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Distortion Comp.:

Sets whether to automatically compensate for distortion of the screen. ([Auto]/[Off])

Note

This function is only available when using an automatic compensation compliant lens.

Darkness in the corners of the screen may not be corrected with [Shading Comp.], depending on the lens type.

Depending on the attached lens, [Distortion Comp.] is fixed to [Auto], and you cannot select [Off].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Lens Comp.] → desired setting.

428

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Self-timer Type

When shooting with the self-timer, sets how many images are recorded and how many seconds elapse from when you

press the shutter button until when the shutter is released.

Menu item details

Self-timer(Single):

Shoots one image using the self-timer (10 seconds / 5 seconds / 2 seconds).

Self-timer(Cont):

Shoots images continuously using the self-timer (3 images after 10 seconds / 5 images after 10 seconds / 3 images after

5 seconds / 5 images after 5 seconds / 3 images after 2 seconds / 5 images after 2 seconds).

Related Topic

Self-timer

Self-timer(Cont)

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Self-timer Type] → desired setting.

The setting screen for [Self-timer Type] can be displayed by pressing the Fn button.

429

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bracket Settings

You can set the type of bracket or the self-timer in bracket shooting mode, and the shooting order for exposure

bracketing or white balance bracketing.

Menu item details

Bracket Type:

Sets the type of bracket shooting.

(Cont. Bracket/Single Bracket/WB bracket/DRO Bracket)

Selftimer during Bracket:

Sets whether to use the self-timer during bracket shooting. Also sets the number of seconds until the shutter is released

if using the self-timer.

(OFF/2 Sec/5 Sec/10 Sec)

Bracket order:

Sets the order of exposure bracketing and white balance bracketing.

(0→-→+/-→0→+)

Related Topic

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

WB bracket

DRO Bracket

Select (Bracket) by turning the drive mode dial.

Turn the drive mode dial while holding down the drive mode dial lock release button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Bracket Settings] → desired setting.

430

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Interval Shoot Func.

You can automatically shoot a series of still images with the shooting interval and number of shots that you set in

advance (Interval shooting). You can then create a movie from the still images produced by interval shooting using the

computer software Imaging Edge (Viewer). You cannot create a movie from the still images on the camera.

For details on interval shooting, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/interval.php

Menu item details

Interval Shooting:

Sets whether to perform interval shooting. ([On]/[Off])

Shooting Start Time:

Sets the time from when you press the shutter button to when interval shooting starts. (1 second to 99 minutes 59

seconds)

Shooting Interval:

Sets the shooting interval (time from when one exposure starts to when the exposure for the next shot starts). (1 second

to 60 seconds)

Number of Shots:

Sets the number of shots for interval shooting. (1 shot to 9999 shots)

AE Tracking Sensitivity:

Sets the tracking sensitivity of the auto exposure against the change in luminance during interval shooting. If you select

[Low], exposure changes during interval shooting will be smoother. ([High]/[Mid]/[Low])

Shutter Type in Interval:

Sets the shutter type during interval shooting. ([Mechanical Shutter]/[Electronic Shutter])

Shoot Interval Priority:

Sets whether or not to prioritize the shooting interval when the exposure mode is [Program Auto] or [Aperture Priority]

and the shutter speed becomes longer than the time set for [Shooting Interval]. ([On]/[Off])

Hint

If you press the shutter button during interval shooting, interval shooting will end and the camera will return to the standby screen

for interval shooting.

To go back to the normal shooting mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval

Shooting] → [Off].

If you press a key to which one of the following functions has been assigned at the moment when shooting starts, the function will

remain active during interval shooting even without you holding down the button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → [Interval Shooting] → [On].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Interval Shoot Func.] → Select the item you want to set and the

desired setting.

Press the shutter button.

When the time set for [Shooting Start Time] has elapsed, shooting will start.

When the number of shots set for [Number of Shots] is completed, the camera will return to the standby screen

for interval shooting.

431

[AEL hold]

[

AEL hold]

[AF/MF Control Hold]

[Regist. AF Area hold]

[AWB Lock Hold]

[My Dial 1 during Hold] to [My Dial 3 during Hold]

If you set [Display as Group] to [On], still images shot with the interval shooting function will be displayed in groups.

Still images shot with interval shooting can be played back continuously on the camera. If you intend to create a movie using the

still images, you can preview the result.

Note

You may not be able to record the set number of images depending on the remaining battery level and the amount of free space

on the recording medium. Supply power via USB while shooting, and use a memory card with sufficient space.

When the shooting interval is short, the camera may get hot easily. Depending on the ambient temperature, you may not be able

to record the set number of images because the camera may stop recording to protect the equipment.

During interval shooting (including the time between pressing the shutter button and the start of shooting), you cannot operate the

dedicated shooting setting screen or MENU screen. However, you can adjust some settings such as the shutter speed with using

the customized dial or control wheel.

During interval shooting, auto review is not displayed.

[Shutter Type in Interval] is set to [Electronic Shutter] as a default, regardless of the setting for [

Shutter Type].

Interval shooting is unavailable in the following situations:

The shooting mode is set to other than P/A/S/M

Related Topic

Imaging Edge

Cont. PB for Interval

Supplying power from a wall outlet (wall socket)

432

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to shoot an image after recalling often-used modes or camera settings registered with [

Memory] in advance.

Hint

To recall settings registered to the memory card, set the mode dial to 1, 2, 3 (Memory recall), then select the desired number by

pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

If you recall settings registered to the memory card, the settings are recalled from the memory card in the slot specified in [

Select Media]. You can confirm the memory card slot by selecting MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [ Select Media].

Settings registered to a memory card using another camera of the same model name can be recalled with this camera.

Note

If you set [

/ Recall] after completing the shooting settings, the registered settings are given priority and the

original settings may become invalid. Check the indicators on the screen before shooting.

Related Topic

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Set the mode dial to 1, 2, or 3 (Memory recall).

Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

You can also recall registered modes or settings by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [

/ Recall].

433

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Memory (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Allows you to register up to 3 often-used modes or product settings to the product and up to 4 (M1 through M4) to the

memory card. You can recall the settings using just the mode dial.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu

of the camera.

Aperture (F number)

Shutter speed

To change registered settings

Change the setting to the desired one and re-register the setting to the same mode number.

Note

M1 through M4 can be selected only when a memory card is inserted into the product.

When registering the settings on a memory card, only a memory card that has been selected using [

Select Media] can be

used.

Program Shift cannot be registered.

For some functions, the position of the dial and the setting actually used for shooting may not match. If this happens, shoot

images by referring to the information displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic

Recall (Camera Settings1/Camera Settings2)

Set the product to the setting you want to register.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ / Memory] → desired number.

Press the center of the control wheel to confirm.

434

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Select Media (Memory recall)

Selects the memory card slot from which settings are recalled or to which settings are registered for M1 through M4.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects the slot 2.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Select Media] → desired slot.

435

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Registering shooting settings to a custom key (Reg. Custom Shoot Set)

You can register shooting settings (such as exposure, focus setting, drive mode, etc.) to a custom key in advance and

temporarily recall them while holding down the key. Simply press the custom key to switch the settings quickly and

release the key to go back to the original settings. This function is useful when recording active scenes such as sports.

Items that can be registered

You can register various functions for shooting. The items that can actually be registered are displayed on the menu

of the camera.

Exposure

Focus setting

Drive mode (other than self-timer)

To recall registered settings

Hint

You can change the settings for [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] after assigning one of the registration numbers to the custom key using

[

Custom Key].

Note

The registration numbers [Recall Custom hold 1] through [Recall Custom hold 3] are available only when the shooting mode is

set to P/A/S/M.

Depending on the attached lens and the status of the camera when the registered setting recall is executed, the registered

settings may not take effect.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Reg. Custom Shoot Set] → Select a registration number from [Recall

Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

The setting screen for the selected number will be displayed.

Using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, select the check boxes for the functions that you

want to recall with one of the registration numbers and press the center to check each box.

mark will be displayed in the boxes for the functions.

To cancel a selection, press the center again.

Select the function that you want to adjust using the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel, and

press the center to adjust the function to the desired setting.

Select [Import Current Setting] to register the current settings of the camera to the registration number that you

chose.

Select [Register].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → Select the desired key and then select one of the

registration numbers from [Recall Custom hold 1] to [Recall Custom hold 3].

On the shooting screen, press the shutter button while holding down the key to which you assigned one of the

registration numbers.

The registered settings are activated while you are holding down the custom key.

436

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

437

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AF-S

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when [Focus Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF] or

[DMF] and the subject is remaining still.

Menu item details

AF:

Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.

Release:

Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Balanced Emphasis:

Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-C

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-S] → desired setting.

438

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AF-C

Sets whether to release the shutter even if the subject is not in focus when the continuous AF is activated and the

subject is in motion.

Menu item details

AF:

Prioritizes focusing. The shutter will not be released until the subject is in focus.

Release:

Prioritizes the shutter's release. The shutter will be released even if the subject is out of focus.

Balanced Emphasis:

Shoots with a balanced emphasis on both focusing and shutter release.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Priority Set in AF-S

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AF-C] → desired setting.

439

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Area

Selects the focusing area. Use this function when it is difficult to focus properly in the auto focus mode.

Menu item details

Wide :

Focuses on a subject covering the whole range of the screen automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway

down in the still image shooting mode, a green frame is displayed around the area that is in focus.

Zone :

Select a zone on the monitor on which to focus, and the product will automatically select a focus area.

Center :

Focuses automatically on a subject in the center of the image. Use together with the focus-lock function to create the

composition you want.

Flexible Spot :

Allows you to move the focusing frame to a desired point on the screen and focus on an extremely small subject in a

narrow area.

Expand Flexible Spot :

If the product cannot focus on a single selected point, it uses focus points around the flexible spot as a secondary priority

area for focusing.

Tracking:

When the shutter button is pressed and held halfway down, the product tracks the subject within the selected autofocus

area. This setting is available only when the [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF]. Point the cursor at [Tracking] on the

[Focus Area] setting screen, and then select the desired area to start tracking using the left/right sides of the control

wheel. You can also move the tracking start area to the desired point by designating the area as a zone, flexible spot or

expand flexible spot.

Examples of the focusing frame display

The focusing frame differs as follows.

When focusing on a larger area

When focusing on a smaller area

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area] → desired setting.

440

When [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], the focusing frame may switch between “When focusing on a larger

area” and “When focusing on a smaller area” depending on the subject or situation.

When you attach an A-mount lens with a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA1 or LA-EA3) (sold separately), the focusing frame

for “When focusing on a smaller area” may be displayed.

When focus is achieved automatically based on the whole range of the monitor

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, the [Focus Area] setting is disabled and the focusing

frame is shown by the dotted line. The AF operates with priority on and around the center area.

To move the focus area

You can move the focus area in [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot], [Tracking:

Expand Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Zone] by operating the multi-selector. If you assign [Focus Standard] to the

center of the multi-selector beforehand, you can move the focusing frame back to the center of the monitor by

pressing the center of the multi-selector.

You can move the focusing frame quickly by touching and dragging it on the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On],

and set [Func. of Touch Operation] to [Touch Focus] beforehand.

To track the subject temporarily (Tracking On)

You can temporarily change the setting for [Focus Area] to [Tracking] while you press and hold down the custom key to

which you have assigned [Tracking On] in advance. The [Focus Area] setting before you activated [Tracking On] will

switch to the equivalent [Tracking] setting.

For example:

Hint

In the default settings, [Focus Area] is assigned to the C2 button.

[Focus Area] before you activate [Tracking On] [Focus Area] while [Tracking On] is active

[Wide] [Tracking: Wide]

[Flexible Spot: S] [Tracking: Flexible Spot S]

[Expand Flexible Spot] [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

441

Note

[Focus Area] is locked to [Wide] in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]

The focus area may not light up during continuous shooting or when the shutter button is pressed all the way down at once.

When the mode dial is set to

(Movie) or or during movie shooting, [Tracking] cannot be selected as the [Focus Area].

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical) (Switch V/H AF Area)

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

442

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Settings

Configures the focus functions using the front dial/rear dial or the control wheel.

When the focus mode is set to auto focus or Direct Manual Focus

You can adjust the focus area settings and the position of the focusing frame. The focusing frame can be moved only

when the [Focus Area] is set to the following:

[Zone]

[Flexible Spot]

[Expand Flexible Spot]

[Tracking: Zone]

[Tracking: Flexible Spot]

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]

Front dial: Moves the focusing frame up/down.

Rear dial: Moves the focusing frame right/left.

Control wheel: Selects the focus area.

When the focus mode is set to Manual Focus

You can set the area to be magnified when focusing manually.

Front dial: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.

Rear dial: Moves the area to be magnified right/left.

Control wheel: Moves the area to be magnified up/down.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Settings].

Perform settings using the front/rear dial or control wheel.

443

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Area Limit

By limiting the types of available focus area settings in advance, you can more quickly select settings for [Focus Area].

Hint

When you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a desired key by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or

[

Custom Key], the focus area changes every time you press the assigned key. By limiting the types of selectable focus areas

with [Focus Area Limit] in advance, you can more quickly select the focus area setting you want.

If you assign [Switch Focus Area] to a custom key, it is recommended that you limit the types of focus areas with [Focus Area

Limit].

Note

Types of focus areas that do not have a check mark cannot be selected using MENU or the Fn (function) menu. To select one,

add a check mark using [Focus Area Limit].

If you remove the check mark for a focus area registered with [

Switch V/H AF Area] or [ AF Area Registration], the

registered settings will change.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Area Limit] → Add check marks to the focus areas that you

want to use, and then select [OK].

The types of focus areas marked with

will be available as settings.

444

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Adjusting the focus area settings to the camera’s orientation (horizontal/vertical)

(Switch V/H AF Area)

You can set whether to switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the

camera (horizontal/vertical). This function is useful when shooting scenes for which you have to change the camera

position frequently, such as portraits or sports scenes.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not switch the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera

(horizontal/vertical).

AF Point Only:

Switches the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera (horizontal/vertical). The [Focus

Area] is fixed.

AF Point + AF Area:

Switches both the [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame according to the orientation of the camera

(horizontal/vertical).

An example when [AF Point + AF Area] is selected

(A) Vertical: [Flexible Spot] (Upper left corner)

(B) Horizontal: [Flexible Spot] (Upper right corner)

Three camera orientations are detected: horizontal, vertical with the side of the shutter button facing up, and vertical

with the side of the shutter button facing down.

Note

If the setting for [

Switch V/H AF Area] is changed, the focus settings for each camera orientation will not be retained.

The [Focus Area] and the position of the focusing frame will not change even when [

Switch V/H AF Area] is set to [AF Point

+ AF Area] or [AF Point Only] in the following situations:

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Movie], or [S&Q Motion]

While the shutter button is pressed halfway down

During movie shooting

While using the digital zoom function

While the auto-focusing is activated

When [Focus Settings] are activated

During continuous shooting

During the countdown for the self-timer

When [Focus Magnifier] is activated

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Switch V/H AF Area] → desired setting.

445

When you shoot images right after the power is turned on and the camera is vertical, the first shot is taken with the horizontal

focus setting or with the last focus setting.

The orientation of the camera cannot be detected when the lens is facing up or down.

Related Topic

Focus Area

446

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Illuminator (still image)

The AF illuminator supplies fill light to focus more easily on a subject in dark surroundings. In the time between pressing

the shutter button halfway down and locking the focus, the AF illuminator lights up to allow the camera to focus easily.

Menu item details

Auto:

The AF illuminator lights up automatically in dark surroundings.

Off:

Does not use the AF illuminator.

Note

You cannot use [

AF Illuminator] in the following situations:

When the shooting mode is [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].

When the focus mode is set to [Continuous AF].

When [Focus Magnifier] is activated.

When a Mount Adaptor is attached.

If the Multi Interface Shoe is equipped with a flash with an AF illuminator function, when the flash is turned on, the AF illuminator

will turn on as well.

The AF illuminator emits a very bright light. Although there is no health hazard, do not look directly into the AF illuminator at close

range.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Illuminator] → desired setting.

447

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

[Face/Eye AF Set.] is used to determine whether or not the camera focuses with priority on faces/eyes.

There are two methods for performing [Eye AF], with some differences between their specifications. Select the

appropriate method according to your purpose.

[Eye AF] via [Face/Eye AF Set.]

[Eye AF] via a custom key

Details can be found here.

Subject detection

The camera will detect faces/eyes with greater

priority.

The camera will detect faces/eyes

exclusively.

Advance

preparation

Select [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Face/Eye Priority in

AF] → [On].

Assign [Eye AF] to the desired key using [

Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

How to perform

[Eye AF]

Press the shutter button halfway down.

Press the key to which you have assigned

the [Eye AF] function*.

Specifications

When the camera detects a face or eye inside

or around the designated focus area, it

focuses on the face or eye with greater

priority.

If the camera does not detect any faces or

eyes inside or around the designated focus

area, it will focus on another detectable

subject.

The camera focuses exclusively on

faces or eyes anywhere on the screen,

regardless of the setting for [Focus

Area].

The camera will not automatically focus

on another subject if no face or eye is

detected anywhere on the screen.

Focus mode Follows the setting designated with [Focus Mode]

Follows the setting designated with [Focus

Mode]

Focus area Follows the setting designated with [Focus Area]

The focus area temporarily becomes the

entire screen, regardless of the setting for

[Focus Area].

How the following

functions under

[Face/Eye AF Set.]

work

Subject

Detection

Right/Left Eye

Select

Face/Eye

Frame Display

Animal Eye

Display

Follows the setting designated with each menu

item

Follows the setting designated with each

menu item

Regardless of whether [Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.] is set to [On] or [Off], you can use [Eye AF] via a custom key while

you are pressing the custom key to which you have assigned [Eye AF].

448

Hint

Maintaining focus on a moving eye or face (Eye AF + Tracking)

If you use the [Tracking] function under [Focus Area], you can maintain focus on a moving eye or face. For details, refer to the

following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/ilc/autofocus/ilce9m2/l/eyeaf.php

Menu item details

Face/Eye Priority in AF :

Sets whether or not to detect faces or eyes inside the focusing area and focus on the eyes (Eye AF) when autofocus is

activated. ([On]/[Off])

(Note: The camera operations are different when using the custom key to execute [Eye AF].)

Subject Detection :

Selects the target to be detected.

[Human]: Detects human faces/eyes.

[Animal]: Detects animal eyes. Animal faces are not detected.

Right/Left Eye Select :

Specifies the eye to be detected when [Subject Detection] is set to [Human]. If [Right Eye] or [Left Eye] is selected, only

the selected eye is detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], [Right/Left Eye Select] cannot be used.

[Auto]: The camera detects eyes automatically.

[Right Eye]: The right eye of the subject (the eye on the left side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

[Left Eye]: The left eye of the subject (the eye on the right side from the photographer’s perspective) is detected.

Face/Eye Frame Display :

Sets whether or not to display the face/eye detection frame when a human face or eyes are detected. ([On]/[Off])

Animal Eye Display :

Sets whether or not to display the eye detection frame when the eye of an animal is detected. ([On]/[Off])

Face detection frame

When the product detects a face, the gray face detection frame appears. When the product determines that autofocus is

enabled, the face detection frame turns white.

In case you have registered the priority order for each face using [Face Registration], the product automatically selects

the first prioritized face and the face detection frame over that face turns white. The face detection frames of other

registered faces turn reddish-purple.

Eye detection frame

A white eye detection frame appears when an eye is detected and the camera determines that autofocusing is possible,

depending on the settings.

The eye detection frame is displayed as follows when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → desired setting item.

449

[Eye AF] by custom key

The Eye AF function can also be used by assigning [Eye AF] to a custom key. The camera can focus on eyes as long as

you are pressing the key. This is useful when you want to temporarily apply the Eye AF function to the entire screen

regardless of the setting for [Focus Area]. The camera does not focus automatically if no faces or eyes are detected.

(Note: When you try to focus on eyes by pressing the shutter button halfway down, the camera only detects faces or

eyes inside or around the focus area designated with [Focus Area]. If the camera detects no faces or eyes, it performs

normal auto-focusing.)

[Switch Right/Left Eye] by custom key

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human] and [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Right Eye] or [Left Eye], you can switch

the eye to be detected by pressing the custom key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], you can temporarily switch the eye to be detected by pressing the custom

key to which you have assigned the [Switch Right/Left Eye] function.

The temporary left/right selection is cancelled when you perform the following operations, etc. The camera returns to

automatic eye detection.

Pressing the center of the control wheel

Pressing the center of the multi-selector

Stopping pressing the shutter button halfway down (only during still image shooting)

Stopping pressing the custom key to which [AF On] or [Eye AF] is assigned (only during still image shooting)

Pressing the MENU button

Hint

When [Right/Left Eye Select] is not set to [Auto], or you execute [Switch Right/Left Eye] using the custom key, the eye detection

frame appears. Even when [Right/Left Eye Select] is set to [Auto], if [Face/Eye Frame Display] is set to [On], the eye detection

frame will appear over detected eyes during movie shooting.

If you want the face or eye detection frame to disappear within a certain period of time after the camera has focused on the face

or eye, set [AF Area Auto Clear] to [On].

Note

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Human], the eyes of animals are not detected. When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal],

human faces are not detected.

When [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the following functions cannot be used.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → desired key, then assign the [Eye

AF] function to the key.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face/Eye AF Set.] → [Subject Detection] → desired setting.2.

Point the camera at the face of a human or animal, and press the key to which you have assigned the [Eye AF]

function.

To shoot a still image, press the shutter button while pressing the key.

450

Right/Left Eye Select

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Regist. Faces Priority

The [Eye AF] function may not function very well in the following situations:

When the person is wearing sunglasses.

When the front hair covers the person’s eyes.

In low-light or back-lit conditions.

When the eyes are closed.

When the subject is in the shade.

When the subject is out of focus.

When the subject is moving too much.

If the subject is moving too much, the detection frame may not be displayed correctly over their eyes.

Depending on the circumstances, the eyes cannot be focused.

When the camera cannot focus on human eyes, it will detect and focus on the face instead. The camera cannot focus on eyes

when no human faces are detected.

The product may not detect faces at all or may accidentally detect other objects as faces in some conditions.

When recording movies with [Subject Detection] set to [Animal], you cannot use the eye detection function.

The eye detection frame is not displayed when the Eye AF function is unavailable.

You cannot use the face/eye detection function with the following functions:

Zoom functions other than the optical zoom.

[Posterization] under [Picture Effect]

Focus Magnifier

Movie shooting with [

Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p]

When [

Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps] during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], [ Record Setting] is set to [30p 100M]/[25p 100M] or [30p 60M]/[25p 60M],

and [

4K Output Select] is set to [Memory Card+HDMI]

Up to 8 faces of your subjects can be detected.

Even if [Face/Eye Frame Display] or [Animal Eye Display] is set to [Off], a green focusing frame will be displayed over faces or

eyes that are in focus.

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is locked to [On].

To detect animal eyes, arrange the composition so that both eyes and the nose of the animal are within the angle of view. Once

you focus on the animal’s face, the animal’s eyes will be detected more easily.

Even when [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal], the eyes of some types of animals cannot be detected.

Related Topic

Focus Mode

Focus Area

AF Area Auto Clear

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

451

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Tracking Sens. (still image)

You can select the AF track sensitivity when the subject goes out of focus in still image mode.

Menu item details

5(Responsive) / 4 / 3(Standard) / 2 / 1(Locked on):

Select [5(Responsive)] to focus responsively on subjects at different distances.

Select [1(Locked on)] to keep the focus on a specific subject when other things are crossing in front of the subject.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Tracking Sens.] → desired setting.

452

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Aperture Drive in AF (still image)

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize the auto-focusing tracking performance or to prioritize silence.

Menu item details

Focus Priority:

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize auto-focusing performance.

Standard:

Uses the standard aperture drive system.

Silent Priority:

Changes the aperture drive system to prioritize silence so that the sound from the aperture drive is quieter than in

[Standard].

Note

When [Focus Priority] is selected, sound from the aperture drive may be audible, or the aperture effect may not be visible on the

monitor. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become slower or the screen may flicker. To avoid these phenomena, change

the setting to [Standard].

When [Silent Priority] is selected, the focusing speed may become slower, and it may be more difficult to focus on a subject.

Focus during continuous shooting is locked to the setting of the first shot when the parameter for [Aperture Drive in AF] is set to

[Standard] or [Silent Priority], and the F-value is greater than F16.

The effect may differ depending on the lens you use and the shooting conditions.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Aperture Drive in AF] → desired setting.

453

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF w/ shutter (still image)

Selects whether to focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down. Select [Off] to adjust the focus

and the exposure separately.

Menu item details

On:

The auto focus operates when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

The auto focus does not operate even if you press the shutter button halfway down.

Useful method to micro-adjust the focus

When an A-mount lens is attached, activating the auto focus function with a button other than the shutter button lets you

focus more precisely in combination with manual focusing.

Related Topic

AF On

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Pre-AF (still image)

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF w/ shutter] → desired setting.

Set [

AF w/ shutter] to [Off].1.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → assign the [Focus Magnifier]

functions to the desired keys.

Set [

Eye-Start AF] to [Off] to avoid auto focusing when you look through the viewfinder.3.

Press the AF-ON button to focus.4.

Press the key to which the [Focus Magnifier] function is assigned, and then rotate the focus ring for micro-

adjustments of the focus.

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.6.

454

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Pre-AF (still image)

The product automatically adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down. During focusing operations,

the screen may shake.

Menu item details

On:

Adjusts focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

Does not adjust focus before you press the shutter button halfway down.

Note

[

Pre-AF] is available only when an E-mount lens is mounted.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Pre-AF] → desired setting.

455

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Eye-Start AF (still image)

Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through an Electronic Viewfinder.

Menu item details

On:

Auto focusing starts when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Off:

Auto focusing does not start when you look through the Electronic Viewfinder.

Hint

[

Eye-Start AF] is available when an A-mount lens and a Mount Adaptor (LA-EA2, LA-EA4) (sold separately) are attached.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Eye-Start AF] → desired setting.

456

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

You can move the focusing frame to a preassigned position temporarily using a custom key. This function is useful when

shooting scenes in which the subject’s movements are predictable; for example, sports scenes. With this function, you

can switch the focus area quickly according to the situation.

How to register focus area

How to call up the registered focus area

Hint

When a focusing frame is registered using [

AF Area Registration], the registered focusing frame flashes on the monitor.

If you assign [Regist AF Area tggle] to a custom key, you can use the registered focusing frame without holding down the key.

If [Reg. AF Area+AF On] is assigned to a custom key, auto focusing using the registered focusing frame is performed when the

key is pressed.

Note

A focus area cannot be registered in the following situations:

The mode dial is set to either

(Movie) or

While [Touch Focus] is being performed

While using the digital zoom function

While [Touch Tracking] is being performed

While focusing

While performing focus lock

You cannot assign [Regist. AF Area hold] to [Left Button], [Right Button], or [Down Button].

You cannot call up the registered focus area in the following situations:

The mode dial is set to either

(Auto Mode), (Movie) or

When [ AF Area Registration] is set to [On], the [Lock Operation Parts] setting is locked to [Off].

Related Topic

Focus Area

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF Area Registration] → [On].1.

Set the focus area to the desired position and then hold down the Fn (Function) button.2.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] → desired key, then select [Regist. AF Area hold].1.

Set the camera to the shooting mode, hold down the key to which [Regist. AF Area hold] has been assigned and

then press the shutter button to shoot images.

457

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Deleting a registered AF Area (Del. Regist. AF Area)

Deletes the focusing frame position that was registered using [

AF Area Registration].

Related Topic

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Del. Regist. AF Area].

458

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Frame Color

You can specify the color of the frame indicating the focusing area. If the frame is difficult to see because of the subject,

make it more visible by changing its color.

Menu item details

White:

Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in white.

Red:

Displays the frame indicating the focusing area in red.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Frame Color] → desired color.

459

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Area Auto Clear

Sets whether the focus area should be displayed all the time or should disappear automatically shortly after focus is

achieved.

Menu item details

On:

The focus area disappears automatically shortly after focus is achieved.

Off:

The focus area is displayed all the time.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [AF Area Auto Clear] → desired setting.

460

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Disp. cont. AF area

You can set whether or not to display the area that is in focus when [Focus Area] is set to [Wide] or [Zone], in

[Continuous AF] mode.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the focus area that is in focus.

Off:

Does not display the focus area that is in focus.

Note

When [Focus Area] is set to one of the following, the focusing frames in the area that is in focus turn green:

[Center]

[Flexible Spot]

[Expand Flexible Spot]

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Disp. cont. AF area] → desired setting.

461

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Phase Detect. Area

Sets whether or not to display the Phase Detection AF area.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the Phase Detection AF area.

Off:

Does not display the Phase Detection AF area.

Note

Phase Detection AF is available only with compatible lenses. If an incompatible lens is attached, you will be unable to use Phase

Detection AF. Phase Detection AF may not operate even with some compatible lens, such as lenses purchased in the past that

have not been updated. For details on compatible lenses, visit the Sony web site in your area, or consult your Sony dealer or

local authorized Sony service facility.

When using an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately) to attach an A-Mount lens (sold separately), this product’s

Phase Detection AF cannot be used.

When shooting images using a full-frame-size-compatible lens, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed even if [Phase

Detect. Area] is set to [On].

When recording movies, the Phase Detection AF area will not be displayed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Phase Detect. Area] → desired setting.

462

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Circ. of Focus Point

Sets whether to allow the focusing frame to jump from one end to the other when you move the focusing frame with

[Focus Area] set to [Zone], [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Zone], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. This function is useful when you want to move the focusing frame from one end to the

other quickly.

Menu item details

Does Not Circulate :

The cursor does not move when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Circulate :

The cursor jumps to the opposite end when you try to move the focusing frame past the end.

Note

Even if you set [Circ. of Focus Point] to [Circulate], the focusing frame will not circulate diagonally.

Related Topic

Focus Area

MENU→

(Camera Settings1)→[Circ. of Focus Point] → desired setting.

When [Circulate] is selected:

463

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Micro Adj.

Allows you to adjust the auto-focusing position and register an adjusted value for each lens when using A-mount lenses

with an LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

Use this function only when adjustments are needed. Note that the auto focus function may not be performed at a proper

position when using this adjustment.

Hint

It is recommended that you adjust the position under actual shooting conditions. Set [Focus Area] to [Flexible Spot] and use a

bright subject with high contrast when you adjust.

Note

When you attach a lens for which you have already registered a value, the registered value appears on the screen. [±0] appears

for lenses for which a value has not yet been registered.

If [-] is displayed as the value, then a total of 30 lenses have been registered and no new lens can be registered. To register a

new lens, attach a lens for which the registration can be erased, and set its value to [±0], or reset the values of all the lenses

using [Clear].

The [AF Micro Adj.] supports Sony, Minolta, or Konica-Minolta lenses. If you perform [AF Micro Adj.] with lenses other than the

supported lenses, the registered settings for the supported lenses may be affected. Do not perform [AF Micro Adj.] with an

unsupported lens.

You cannot set [AF Micro Adj.] individually for a Sony, Minolta, and Konica-Minolta lens of the same specification.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [AF Micro Adj.].

Select [AF Adjustment Set.] → [On].

[amount] → desired value.

The larger the value you select, the farther the autofocused position will be from the product. The smaller the

value you select, the closer the autofocused position will be to the product.

464

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Comp.

Normally, exposure is set automatically (auto exposure). Based on the exposure value set by auto exposure, you can

make the entire image brighter or darker if you adjust [Exposure Comp.] to the plus side or minus side, respectively

(exposure compensation).

Release the exposure compensation dial lock, and turn the exposure compensation dial (A).

+ (over) side:

Images become brighter.

- (under) side:

Images become darker.

Pressing the lock button (B) at the center switches the exposure compensation dial between the locked and

unlocked status. The dial is unlocked when the lock button is popped up and the white line is visible.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -3.0 EV to +3.0 EV.

You can confirm the exposure compensation value that you set on the shooting screen.

Monitor

Viewfinder

465

To set the exposure compensation value using the MENU

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV when the exposure compensation

dial is set to “0.”

MENU→

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Comp.] → desired setting.

Hint

You can operate the exposure compensation dial any time you want while the exposure compensation dial lock is released. The

exposure compensation dial lock prevents unintentional changes to exposure compensation values.

Note

You cannot perform the exposure compensation in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When using [Manual Exposure], you can perform the exposure compensation only when [ISO] is set to [ISO AUTO].

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] or [Dial Ev Comp] in MENU.

Only a value between -3.0 EV and +3.0 EV with the equivalent image brightness appears on the screen when shooting. If you set

an exposure compensation value outside this range, the image brightness on the screen will not be affected, but the value will be

reflected in the recorded image.

You can adjust the exposure compensation value within the range of -2.0 EV to +2.0 EV for movies.

If you shoot a subject in extremely bright or dark conditions, or when you use the flash, you may not be able to get a satisfactory

effect.

When you set the exposure compensation dial to “0” from a setting other than “0,” the exposure value switches to “0” regardless

of the [Exposure Comp.] setting.

Related Topic

Exposure step

Dial Ev Comp

Exp.comp.set

Cont. Bracket

Single Bracket

Zebra Setting

466

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Reset EV Comp.

Sets whether to maintain the exposure value set using [Exposure Comp.] when you turn off the power when the

exposure compensation dial position is set to “0.”

Menu item details

Maintain:

Maintains the settings.

Reset:

Resets the settings.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Reset EV Comp.] → desired setting.

467

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO

Sensitivity to light is expressed by the ISO number (recommended exposure index). The larger the number, the higher

the sensitivity.

Menu item details

ISO AUTO:

Sets the ISO sensitivity automatically.

ISO 50 – ISO 204800:

Sets the ISO sensitivity manually. Selecting a larger number increases the ISO sensitivity.

Hint

You can change the range of ISO sensitivity that is set automatically in [ISO AUTO] mode. Select [ISO AUTO] and press the right

side of the control wheel, and set the desired values for [ISO AUTO Maximum] and [ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note

[ISO AUTO] is selected when using the following functions:

[Intelligent Auto]

When the ISO sensitivity is set to a value lower than ISO 100, the range for recordable subject brightness (dynamic range) may

decrease.

The higher the ISO value, the more noise will appear on the images.

The available ISO settings will differ depending on whether you are shooting still images, shooting movies, or shooting slow-

motion/quick-motion movies.

ISO values between 50 and 25600 are available in the following situations:

[

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

[

Shutter Type] is set to [Auto] and [Drive Mode] is set to [Cont. Shooting].

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value larger than 102400,

the setting is automatically switched to 102400. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When shooting movies, ISO values between 100 and 102400 are available. If the ISO value is set to a value smaller than 100,

the setting is automatically switched to 100. When you finish recording the movie, the ISO value returns to the original setting.

When you select [ISO AUTO] with the shooting mode set to [P], [A], [S] or [M], the ISO sensitivity will be automatically adjusted

within the set range.

ISO (ISO) on the control wheel → select desired setting.

You can also select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO].

You can change the value by 1/3 EV steps by turning the front dial as well as by turning the control wheel. You

can change the value by 1 EV steps by turning the rear dial.

468

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO Range Limit

You can limit the range of ISO sensitivity when the ISO sensitivity is set manually.

To set the range for [ISO AUTO]

If you want to adjust the range of ISO sensitivity that is automatically set in the [ISO AUTO] mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO] → [ISO AUTO], and then press the right side of the control wheel to select

[ISO AUTO Maximum]/[ISO AUTO Minimum].

Note

ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified range become unavailable. To select ISO sensitivity values beyond the specified

range, reset [ISO Range Limit].

Related Topic

ISO Setting: ISO

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO Range Limit] → [Minimum] or [Maximum], and

select the desired values.

469

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

ISO Setting: ISO AUTO Min. SS

If you select [ISO AUTO] when the shooting mode is P (Program Auto) or A (Aperture Priority), you can set the shutter

speed at which the ISO sensitivity starts changing.

This function is effective for shooting moving subjects. You can minimize subject blurring while also preventing camera

shake.

Menu item details

FASTER (Faster)/FAST (Fast):

The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds faster than [Standard], so you can prevent camera shake and

subject blurring.

STD (Standard):

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens.

SLOW (Slow)/SLOWER (Slower):

The ISO sensitivity will start to change at shutter speeds slower than [Standard], so you can shoot images with less

noise.

1/16000 ― 30":

The ISO sensitivity starts to change at the shutter speed you have set.

Hint

The difference in shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts to change between [Faster], [Fast], [Standard], [Slow], and [Slower]

is 1 EV.

Note

If the exposure is insufficient even when the ISO sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO Maximum] in [ISO AUTO], in order to shoot with

an appropriate exposure, the shutter speed will be slower than the speed set in [ISO AUTO Min. SS].

In the following situations, the shutter speed may not function as set:

When the maximum shutter speed has changed based on the [

Shutter Type] setting.

When using the flash to shoot bright scenes. (The maximum shutter speed is limited to the flash-syncing speed of 1/250

second.)

When using the flash to shoot dark scenes with the [Flash Mode] set to [Fill-flash]. (The minimum shutter speed is limited to the

speed automatically determined by the camera.)

Related Topic

Program Auto

Aperture Priority

ISO Setting: ISO

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ISO Setting] → [ISO AUTO Min. SS] → desired setting.

470

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Metering Mode

Selects the metering mode that sets which part of the screen to measure for determining the exposure.

Menu item details

Multi:

Measures light on each area after dividing the total area into multiple areas and determines the proper exposure of the

entire screen (Multi-pattern metering).

Center:

Measures the average brightness of the entire screen, while emphasizing the central area of the screen (Center-

weighted metering).

Spot:

Measures only inside the metering circle. This mode is suitable for measuring light on a specified part of the entire

screen. The size of the metering circle can be selected from [Spot: Standard] and [Spot: Large]. The position of the

metering circle depends the setting for [Spot Metering Point].

Entire Screen Avg.:

Measures the average brightness of the entire screen. The exposure will be stable even if the composition or the position

of the subject changes.

Highlight:

Measures the brightness while emphasizing the highlighted area on the screen. This mode is suitable for shooting the

subject while avoiding overexposure.

Hint

When [Spot] is selected and [Focus Area] is set to either [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot] while [Spot Metering Point] is set to [Focus Point Link], the spot metering point can be

coordinated with the focus area.

When [Multi] is selected and [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is set to [On], the camera measures brightness based on detected

faces.

When [Metering Mode] is set to [Highlight] and the [D-Range Optimizer] or [Auto HDR] function is activated, the brightness and

the contrast will be corrected automatically by dividing the image into small areas and analyzing the contrast of light and shadow.

Make settings based on the shooting circumstances.

Note

[Metering Mode] is locked to [Multi] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

Other zoom functions than the optical zoom

In [Highlight] mode, the subject may be dark if a brighter part exists on the screen.

Related Topic

AE lock

Spot Metering Point

Face Priority in Multi Metering

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Metering Mode] → desired setting.

471

Auto HDR

472

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Priority in Multi Metering

Sets whether the camera measures brightness based on detected faces when [Metering Mode] is set to [Multi].

Menu item details

On:

The camera measures brightness based on detected faces.

Off:

The camera measures brightness using the [Multi] setting, without detecting faces.

Note

When the shooting mode is set to [Intelligent Auto], [Face Priority in Multi Metering] is locked to [On].

When [Face/Eye Priority in AF] is set to [On] and [Subject Detection] is set to [Animal] under [Face/Eye AF Set.], [Face Priority in

Multi Metering] does not work.

Related Topic

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Priority in Multi Metering] → desired setting.

473

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Spot Metering Point

Sets whether to coordinate the spot metering position with the focus area when [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot],

[Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot].

Menu item details

Center:

The spot metering position does not coordinate with the focus area, but always meters brightness at the center.

Focus Point Link:

The spot metering position coordinates with the focus area.

Note

When [Focus Area] is set to other than [Flexible Spot]/[Expand Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Flexible Spot]/[Tracking: Expand Flexible

Spot], the spot metering position is locked to the center.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot], the spot metering position coordinates

to the tracking start position, but does not coordinate with the tracking of the subject.

Related Topic

Focus Area

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Spot Metering Point] → desired setting.

474

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure step

You can adjust the setting increment for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure compensation values.

Menu item details

0.3EV / 0.5EV

Note

Even if you set [Exposure step] to [0.5EV], the exposure value adjusted using the exposure compensation dial changes in steps

of 0.3EV.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure step] → desired setting.

475

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AEL w/ shutter (still image)

Sets whether to fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Select [Off] to adjust the focus and the exposure separately.

Menu item details

Auto:

Fixes the exposure after adjusting the focus automatically when you press the shutter button halfway down when [Focus

Mode] is set to [Single-shot AF].

On:

Fixes the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down.

Off:

Does not fix the exposure when you press the shutter button halfway down. Use this mode when you want to adjust

focus and exposure separately.

The product keeps adjusting the exposure while shooting in [Cont. Shooting] mode.

Note

Operation using the AEL button is prioritized over the [

AEL w/ shutter] settings.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AEL w/ shutter] → desired setting.

476

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Std. Adjust

Adjusts this camera's standard for the correct exposure value for each metering mode.

Metering Mode

The set standard value will be applied when you select the corresponding metering mode in MENU →

(Camera

Settings1) → [Metering Mode].

Multi/ Center/ Spot/ Entire Screen Average/ Highlight

Note

The exposure compensation will not be affected when [Exposure Std. Adjust] is changed.

The exposure value will be locked according to the value set for [

Spot] during using spot AEL.

The standard value for M.M (Metered Manual) will be changed according to the value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust].

The value set in [Exposure Std. Adjust] is recorded in Exif data separately from the exposure compensation value. The amount of

exposure standard value will not be added to the exposure compensation value.

If you set [Exposure Std. Adjust] during bracketing shooting, the number of shots for the bracketing will be reset.

Related Topic

Metering Mode

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exposure Std. Adjust] → desired metering mode.

Select the desired value as the metering standard.

You can set a value from -1 EV to +1 EV in 1/6 EV increments.

477

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Flash Mode

You can set the flash mode.

Menu item details

Flash Off:

The flash does not operate.

Autoflash:

The flash works in dark environments or when shooting towards bright light.

Fill-flash:

The flash works every time you trigger the shutter.

Slow Sync.:

The flash works every time you trigger the shutter. Slow sync shooting allows you to shoot a clear image of both the

subject and the background by slowing the shutter speed.

Rear Sync.:

The flash works right before the exposure is completed every time you trigger the shutter. Rear sync shooting allows you

to shoot a natural image of the trail of a moving subject such as a moving car or a walking person.

Note

The default setting depends on the shooting mode.

Some [Flash Mode] settings are not available, depending on the shooting mode.

Related Topic

Using flash (sold separately)

Wireless Flash

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Flash Mode] → desired setting.

478

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Flash Comp.

Adjusts the amount of flash light in a range of –3.0 EV to +3.0 EV. Flash compensation changes the amount of flash light

only. Exposure compensation changes the amount of flash light along with the change of the shutter speed and aperture.

Note

[Flash Comp.] does not work when the shooting mode is set to the following modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

The higher flash effect (+ side) may not be visible due to the limited amount of flash light available, if the subject is outside the

maximum range of the flash. If the subject is very close, the lower flash effect (- side) may not be visible.

If you attach an ND filter to the lens or attach a diffuser or a color filter to the flash, the appropriate exposure may not be achieved

and images may turn out dark. In this case, adjust [Flash Comp.] to the desired value.

Related Topic

Using flash (sold separately)

MENU → (Camera Settings1) → [Flash Comp.] → desired setting.

Selecting higher values (+ side) makes the flash level higher, and lower values (- side) makes the flash level

lower.

479

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exp.comp.set

Sets whether to apply the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light, or just ambient light.

Menu item details

Ambient&flash:

Applies the exposure compensation value to control both flash light and ambient light.

Ambient only:

Applies the exposure compensation value to control ambient light only.

Related Topic

Flash Comp.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Exp.comp.set] → desired setting.

480

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wireless Flash

There are two methods for wireless flash shooting: light-signal flash shooting that uses the light of the flash attached to

the camera as a signal light, and radio-signal flash shooting that uses wireless communication. To perform radio-signal

flash shooting, use a compatible flash or the Wireless Radio Commander (sold separately). For details on how to set

each method, refer to the instruction manual of the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not use the wireless flash function.

On:

Uses the wireless flash function to make an external flash or flashes emit light at a distance from the camera.

Note

The off-camera flash may emit light after receiving a light signal from a flash used as the controller of another camera. If this

occurs, change the channel of your flash. For details on how to change the channel, refer to the instruction manual for the flash.

For the flash that is compatible with wireless flash shooting, visit the Sony website, or consult your Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Wireless Flash] → [On].

Remove the shoe cap from the camera, and then attach the flash or the Wireless Radio Commander.

When performing light-signal wireless flash shooting, set the attached flash as the controller.

When performing radio-signal wireless flash shooting with a flash attached to the camera, set the attached flash

as the commander.

Set up an off-camera flash that is set to wireless mode, or that is attached to the Wireless Radio Receiver

(sold separately).

You can perform a test flashing by assigning the [Wireless Test Flash] function to a custom key using [

Custom Key], and then pressing that key.

481

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Red Eye Reduction

When using the flash, it is fired two or more times before shooting to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

Menu item details

On:

The flash is always fired to reduce the red-eye phenomenon.

Off:

Does not use Red Eye Reduction.

Note

Red Eye Reduction may not produce the desired effects. It depends on individual differences and conditions, such as distance to

the subject, or whether the subject looks at the pre-strobe or not.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Red Eye Reduction] → desired setting.

482

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

White Balance

Corrects the tone effect of the ambient light condition to record a neutral white subject in white. Use this function when

the color tones of the image did not come out as you expected, or when you want to change the color tones on purpose

for photographic expression.

Menu item details

Auto / Daylight / Shade / Cloudy / Incandescent / Fluor.: Warm White /

Fluor.: Cool White / Fluor.: Day White / Fluor.: Daylight / Flash / Underwater Auto :

When you select a light source that illuminates the subject, the product adjusts the color tones to suit to the selected light

source (preset white balance). When you select [Auto], the product automatically detects the light source and adjusts the

color tones.

C.Temp./Filter:

Adjusts the color tones depending on the light source. Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for

photography.

Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3:

Memorizes the basic white color under the light conditions for the shooting environment.

Hint

You can display the fine adjustment screen and perform fine adjustments of the color tones as required by pressing the right side

of the control wheel. When [C.Temp./Filter] is selected, you can change the color temperature by turning the rear dial instead of

pressing the right side of the control wheel.

If the color tones do not come out as you expected in the selected settings, perform [WB bracket] shooting.

or is displayed only when [Priority Set in AWB] is set to [Ambience] or [White].

Note

[White Balance] is fixed to [Auto] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

If you use a mercury lamp or a sodium lamp as a light source, the accurate white balance will not be obtained because of the

characteristics of the light. It is recommended to shoot images using a flash or select [Custom 1] to [Custom 3].

Related Topic

Capturing a standard white color to set the white balance (custom white balance)

Priority Set in AWB

WB bracket

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [White Balance] → desired setting.

483

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Priority Set in AWB

Selects which tone to prioritize when shooting under lighting conditions such as incandescent light when [White Balance]

is set to [Auto].

Menu item details

Standard:

Shoots with standard auto white balance. The camera automatically adjusts the color tones.

Ambience:

Prioritizes the color tone of the light source. This is suitable when you want to produce a warm atmosphere.

White:

Prioritizes a reproduction of white color when the color temperature of the light source is low.

Related Topic

White Balance

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Priority Set in AWB] → desired setting.

484

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

D-Range Optimizer (DRO)

By dividing the image into small areas, the product analyzes the contrast of light and shadow between the subject and

the background, and creates an image with the optimal brightness and gradation.

Menu item details

D-Range Optimizer: Auto:

Corrects the brightness automatically.

D-Range Optimizer: Lv1 ― D-Range Optimizer: Lv5:

Optimizes the gradation of a recorded image for each divided area. Select the optimization level from Lv1 (weak) to Lv5

(strong).

Note

In the following situations, [DRO/Auto HDR] is fixed to [Off]:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off]

When shooting with [D-Range Optimizer], the image may be noisy. Select the proper level by checking the recorded image,

especially when you enhance the effect.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [D-Range Optimizer].

Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

485

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto HDR

Shoots three images using different exposures and combines the images with correct exposure, the bright parts of an

underexposed image, and the dark parts of an overexposed image to create images with a greater range of gradation

(High Dynamic Range). One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded.

Menu item details

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. Auto:

Corrects the brightness automatically.

Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 1.0EV ― Auto HDR: Exposure Diff. 6.0EV:

Sets the exposure difference, based on the contrast of the subject. Select the optimization level from 1.0EV (weak) to

6.0EV (strong).

For example, if you set the exposure value to 2.0 EV, three images will be composed with the following exposure levels:

-1.0 EV, correct exposure and +1.0 EV.

Hint

The shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:

Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.

Do not change the composition before shooting.

Note

This function is not available when the [

File Format] is [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG].

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Auto HDR] is not available in the following situations:

When [Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].

You cannot start the next shot until the capture process is completed after you shoot.

You may not obtain the desired effect depending on the luminance difference of a subject and the shooting conditions.

When the flash is used, this function has little effect.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when product shake or subject blur occurs, you may not obtain good HDR images.

will be displayed over the recorded image to inform you when the camera detects image blurring. Change the

composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [DRO/Auto HDR] → [Auto HDR].

Select the desired setting using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

486

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Creative Style

Allows you to set the desired image processing and finely adjust contrast, saturation and sharpness for each image

style.

Menu item details

Standard:

For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and beautiful colors.

Vivid:

The saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers,

spring greenery, blue sky, or ocean views.

Neutral:

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Creative Style].

Select the desired style or [Style Box] using the top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

To adjust

(Contrast), (Saturation) and (Sharpness), select the desired item using the right/left

sides, and then select the value using the top/bottom sides.

When selecting [Style Box], move to the right side using the right side of the control wheel, and then select

the desired style.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

(A): Displayed only when Style Box is selected

487

The saturation and sharpness are lowered for shooting images in subdued tones. This is also suitable for capturing

image material to be modified with a computer.

Clear:

For shooting images in clear tones with limpid colors in highlight, suitable for capturing radiant light.

Deep:

For shooting images with deep and dense colors, suitable for capturing the solid presence of the subject.

Light:

For shooting images with bright and simple colors, suitable for capturing a refreshingly light ambience.

Portrait:

For capturing skin in a soft tone, ideally suited for shooting portraits.

Landscape:

The saturation, contrast, and sharpness are heightened for shooting vivid and crisp scenery. Distant landscapes also

stand out more.

Sunset:

For shooting the beautiful red of the setting sun.

Night Scene:

The contrast is lowered for reproducing night scenes.

Autumn leaves:

For shooting autumn scenes, vividly highlighting the reds and yellows of changing leaves.

Black & White:

For shooting images in black and white monotone.

Sepia:

For shooting images in sepia monotone.

Registering preferred settings (Style Box):

Select the six style box (the boxes with numbers on the left side (

)) to register preferred settings. Then select the

desired settings using the right button.

You can call up the same style with slightly different settings.

To set [Contrast], [Saturation] and [Sharpness]

[Contrast], [Saturation], and [Sharpness] can be adjusted for each image style preset such as [Standard] and

[Landscape], and for each [Style Box] to which you can register preferred settings.

Select an item to be set by pressing the right/left sides of the control wheel, then set the value using the top/bottom sides

of the control wheel.

Contrast:

The higher the value selected, the more the difference of light and shadow is accentuated, and the bigger the effect on

the image.

Saturation:

The higher the value selected, the more vivid the color. When a lower value is selected, the color of the image is

restrained and subdued.

Sharpness:

Adjusts the sharpness. The higher the value selected, the more the contours are accentuated, and the lower the value

selected, the more the contours are softened.

Note

[Creative Style] is fixed to [Standard] in the following situations:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Picture Effect] is set to other than [Off].

When this function is set to [Black & White] or [Sepia], [Saturation] cannot be adjusted.

488

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Picture Effect

Select the desired effect filter to achieve more impressive and artistic images.

Menu item details

Off:

Disables the [Picture Effect] function.

Toy Camera:

Creates a soft image with shaded corners and reduced sharpness.

Pop Color:

Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones.

Posterization:

Creates a high contrast, abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors, or in black and white.

Retro Photo:

Creates the look of an aged photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast.

Soft High-key:

Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere: bright, transparent, ethereal, tender, soft.

Partial Color:

Creates an image which retains a specific color, but converts others to black and white.

High Contrast Mono.:

Creates a high-contrast image in black and white.

Rich-tone Mono.:

Creates an image in black and white with rich gradation and reproduction of details.

Hint

You can perform detailed settings for some items using the left/right sides of the control wheel.

Note

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, setting the zoom scale larger makes [Toy Camera] less effective.

When [Partial Color] is selected, images may not retain the selected color, depending on the subject or shooting conditions.

You cannot check the following effects on the shooting screen, because the product processes the image after the shot. Also, you

cannot shoot another image until image processing is finished. You cannot use these effects with movies.

[Rich-tone Mono.]

In the case of [Rich-tone Mono.], the shutter is released three times for one shot. Be careful about the following:

Use this function when the subject is motionless or does not flash light.

Do not change the composition during shooting.

When the contrast of the scene is low or when significant camera-shake or subject blur has occurred, you may not be able to

obtain good HDR images. If the product detects such a situation,

appear on the recorded image to inform you of this

situation. Change the composition or re-shoot the image carefully to avoid image blur, as needed.

This function is not available in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

When [

File Format] is set to [RAW] or [RAW & JPEG], this function is not available.

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Picture Effect] → desired setting.

489

490

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shutter AWB Lock (still image)

You can set whether or not to lock the white balance while the shutter button is pressed when [White Balance] is set to

[Auto] or [Underwater Auto].

This function prevents unintentional changes to the white balance during continuous shooting or when shooting with the

shutter button pressed halfway down.

Menu item details

Shut. Halfway Down:

Locks the white balance while the shutter button is pressed halfway down, even in the auto white balance mode. The

white balance is also locked during continuous shooting.

Cont. Shooting:

Locks the white balance to the setting in the first shot during continuous shooting, even in the auto white balance mode.

Off:

Operates with the normal auto white balance.

About [AWB Lock Hold] and [AWB Lock Toggle]

You can also lock the white balance in the auto white balance mode by assigning [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle]

to the custom key. Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [

Custom Key]. If you press the assigned key during shooting, the white balance will be locked.

The [AWB Lock Hold] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment while the

button is pressed.

The [AWB Lock Toggle] function locks the white balance by stopping the automatic white balance adjustment after the

button is pressed once. When you press the button again, the AWB lock is released.

If you want to lock the white balance during movie shooting in the auto white balance mode, select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → Assign [AWB Lock Hold] or [AWB Lock Toggle] using [ Custom Key].

Hint

When you shoot with the flash while the automatic white balance is locked, the resulting color tones may be unnatural because

the white balance was locked before the flash was emitted. In this case, set [

Shutter AWB Lock] to [Off] or [Cont. Shooting],

and do not use the [AWB Lock Hold] function or [AWB Lock Toggle] function when shooting. Alternatively, set [White Balance] to

[Flash].

Related Topic

White Balance

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Shutter AWB Lock] → desired setting.

491

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Magnifier

You can check the focus by enlarging the image before shooting.

Unlike with [

MF Assist], you can magnify the image without operating the focus ring.

To use the focus magnifier function by touch operation

You can magnify the image and adjust the focus by touching the monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Then, select the appropriate settings under [Touch Panel/Pad]. When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can

perform [Focus Magnifier] by double-tapping the area to focus on while shooting with the monitor.

While shooting with the viewfinder, a frame is displayed in the center of the monitor by double-tapping and you can move

the frame by dragging it. The image is magnified by pressing the center of the multi-selector.

Hint

While using the focus magnifier function, you can move the magnified area by dragging it on the touch panel.

To exit the focus magnifier function, double-tap the monitor again. When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the focus

magnifier function is ended by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

Related Topic

MF Assist (still image)

Focus Magnif. Time

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

Press the center of the multi-selector to enlarge the image and select the area you want to enlarge by

pressing the multi-selector up/down/left/right.

Each time you press the center, the magnification scale will change.

You can set the initial magnification by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus

Mag.].

Confirm the focus.

Press the

(Delete) button to bring the magnified position into the center of an image.

When the focus mode is [Manual Focus], you can adjust the focus while an image is magnified. If [

AF in

Focus Mag.] is set to [Off], the [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled when the shutter button is pressed

halfway down.

When the shutter button is pressed halfway down while an image is magnified during the auto-focusing,

different functions are performed depending on the [

AF in Focus Mag.] setting.

When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [On]: Auto-focusing is performed again.

When [

AF in Focus Mag.] is set to [Off]: The [Focus Magnifier] function is canceled.

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) →

[Focus Magnif. Time].

Press the shutter button fully down to shoot the image.

492

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

Touch Operation

493

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Focus Magnif. Time

Set the duration for which an image is to be magnified using the [

MF Assist] or [Focus Magnifier] function.

Menu item details

2 Sec:

Magnifies the images for 2 seconds.

5 Sec:

Magnifies the images for 5 seconds.

No Limit:

Magnifies the images until you press the shutter button.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MF Assist (still image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif. Time] → desired setting.

494

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Initial Focus Mag. (still image)

Sets the initial magnification scale when using [Focus Magnifier]. Select a setting that will help you frame your shot.

Menu item details

Full-frame shooting

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x4.7:

Displays a 4.7-times enlarged image.

APS-C/Super 35mm size shooting

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x3.1:

Displays a 3.1-times enlarged image.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

495

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF in Focus Mag. (still image)

You can focus on the subject more accurately using auto-focus by magnifying the area where you want to focus. While

the magnified image is displayed, you can focus on a smaller area than the flexible spot.

Hint

Use of a tripod is recommended to accurately identify the location you want to magnify.

You can check the auto-focusing result by magnifying the displayed image. If you want to readjust the focus position, adjust the

focus area on the magnified screen and then press the shutter button halfway down.

Note

If you enlarge an area at the edge of the screen, the camera may not be able to focus.

The exposure and white balance cannot be adjusted while the displayed image is being magnified.

[

AF in Focus Mag.] is unavailable in the following situations:

During movie shooting

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF].

When using a Mount Adaptor (sold separately).

While the displayed image is being magnified, the following functions are unavailable:

[Eye AF]

[

Eye-Start AF]

[

Pre-AF]

[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ AF in Focus Mag.] → [On].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnifier].

Magnify the image by pressing the center of the multi-selector, and then adjust the position by pressing the

multi-selector up/down/left/right.

The magnification scale changes each time you press the center.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

The focus will be achieved at point of

in the center of the screen.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot.

The camera exits the magnified display after shooting.

496

497

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

MF Assist (still image)

Enlarges the image on the screen automatically to make manual focusing easier. This works in Manual Focus or Direct

Manual Focus shooting.

Hint

You can set how long the image is to be shown magnified by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Focus Magnif.

Time].

Note

You cannot use [

MF Assist] when shooting movies. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

[

MF Assist] is not available when a Mount Adaptor is attached. Use the [Focus Magnifier] function instead.

Related Topic

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

Focus Magnif. Time

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ MF Assist] → [On].

Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

The image is enlarged. You can magnify images further by pressing the center of the control wheel.

498

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Peaking Setting

Sets the peaking function, which enhances the outline of in-focus areas during shooting with Manual Focus or Direct

Manual Focus.

Menu item details

Peaking Display:

Sets whether to display peaking.

Peaking Level:

Sets the level of enhancement of in-focus areas.

Peaking Color:

Sets the color used to enhance in-focus areas.

Note

Since the product recognizes sharp areas as in focus, the effect of peaking differs, depending on the subject and lens.

The outline of in-focus ranges is not enhanced on devices connected via HDMI.

Related Topic

Manual Focus

Direct manual focus (DMF)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Peaking Setting] → desired setting.

499

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Anti-flicker Shoot. (still image)

Detects flickering/blinking from artificial light sources such as fluorescent lighting and times the shooting of images to

moments when flickering will have less of an impact.

This function reduces differences in the exposure and color tone caused by flickering between the upper area and the

lower area of an image shot with fast shutter speed and during continuous shooting.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not reduce influences caused by flickering.

On:

Reduces influences caused by flickering. When the camera detects flickering while the shutter button is pressed halfway

down,

(flicker icon) will be displayed.

Hint

The color tone of the shot result may vary when you shoot the same scene using a different shutter speed. If that happens, we

recommend that you shoot in [Shutter Priority] or [Manual Exposure] mode with a fixed shutter speed.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button.

You can perform anti-flicker shooting by pressing the shutter button halfway down or pressing the AF-ON (AF On) button, even

when in the manual focus mode.

Note

When you set [

Anti-flicker Shoot.] to [On], the shutter release lag may increase slightly. In the continuous shooting mode, the

shooting speed may slow down or the interval between shots may become irregular.

The camera detects flickering when the frequency of the light source is 100 Hz or 120 Hz only.

The camera cannot detect flickering depending on the light source and shooting conditions, such as a dark background.

Even if the camera detects flickering, the influences caused by flickering may not be reduced enough depending on the light

source or the shooting situation. We recommend that you take test shots beforehand.

[

Anti-flicker Shoot.] is not available when shooting in the following situations:

While bulb shooting

Movie shooting mode

When [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter]

The color tone of the shot results may differ depending on the setting of [

Anti-flicker Shoot.].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [ Anti-flicker Shoot.] → [On].

Press the shutter button halfway down, and then shoot the image.

The product detects flickering when the shutter button is pressed halfway down.

500

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (New Registration)

If you register faces in advance, the product can focus on the registered face as a priority.

Note

Up to eight faces can be registered.

Shoot the face from the front in a brightly lit place. The face may not be registered correctly if it is obscured by a hat, a mask,

sunglasses, etc.

Related Topic

Regist. Faces Priority

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [New Registration].

Align the guide frame with the face to be registered, and press the shutter button.

When a confirmation message appears, select [Enter].

501

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

When multiple faces are registered to be given priority, the face registered first will be given priority. You can change the

priority order.

Related Topic

Regist. Faces Priority

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Order Exchanging].

Select a face to change the order of priority.

Select the destination.

502

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Face Registration (Delete)

Deletes a registered face.

Note

Even if you execute [Delete], the data for registered face will remain in the product. To delete the data for registered faces from

the product, select [Delete All].

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Face Registration] → [Delete].

If you select [Delete All], you can delete all registered faces.

503

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Regist. Faces Priority

Sets whether to focus with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

Menu item details

On:

Focuses with higher priority on faces registered using [Face Registration].

Off:

Focuses without giving higher priority to registered faces.

Hint

To use the [Regist. Faces Priority] function, set as follows.

[Face/Eye Priority in AF] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [On]

[Subject Detection] under [Face/Eye AF Set.]: [Human]

Related Topic

Focusing on eyes (Face/Eye AF Set.)

Face Registration (New Registration)

Face Registration (Order Exchanging)

MENU →

(Camera Settings1) → [Regist. Faces Priority] → desired setting.

504

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Movie: Exposure Mode

You can set the exposure mode for movie shooting.

Menu item details

Program Auto:

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

Aperture Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

Shutter Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

Manual Exposure:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Set the mode dial to

(Movie).

MENU→

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

505

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

You can select the exposure mode for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting. You can change the setting and playback

speed for slow-motion/quick-motion shooting with [

S&Q Settings].

Menu item details

Program Auto:

Allows you to shoot with the exposure adjusted automatically (both the shutter speed and the aperture value).

Aperture Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the aperture value manually.

Shutter Priority:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the shutter speed manually.

Manual Exposure:

Allows you to shoot after adjusting the exposure (both the shutter speed and the aperture value) manually.

Related Topic

S&Q Settings

Set the mode dial to

(S&Q Motion).

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → desired setting.

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

506

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Format (movie)

Selects the movie file format.

Menu item details

Note

When [

File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size reaches approx.

2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ File Format] → desired setting.

File

Format

Characteristics

XAVC

S 4K

Records movies in 4K resolution (3840×2160).

You can save movies on a computer using the

PlayMemories Home software.

XAVC

S HD

Records movies in crisper quality than AVCHD

with larger amounts of data.

AVCHD

The AVCHD format has a high degree of

compatibility with storage devices other than

computers.

You can save movies on a computer or create a disc that

supports this format using the PlayMemories Home

software.

507

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Record Setting (movie)

Selects the frame rate and bit-rate for movie recording.

Menu item details

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K]

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD]

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Record Setting] → desired setting.

The higher the bit-rate, the higher the image quality.

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

30p 100M/ 25p 100M Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

30p 60M/ 25p 60M Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (30p/25p).

24p 100M * Approx. 100 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

24p 60M * Approx. 60 Mbps Records movies in 3840×2160 (24p).

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record

Setting

Bit-rate Description

60p 50M/50p

50M

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).

60p 25M/50p

25M

Approx. 25

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (60p/50p).

30p 50M/25p

50M

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).

30p 16M/25p

16M

Approx. 16

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (30p/25p).

24p 50M *

Approx. 50

Mbps

Records movies in 1920×1080 (24p).

120p 100M/100p

100M

Approx. 100

Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.

You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing

devices.

508

When [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

Note

Creating an AVCHD recording disc from movies that were recorded with [60i 24M(FX)]/[50i 24M(FX)] as the [

Record Setting]

takes a long time because the image quality of movies is converted. If you want to store movies without converting them, use a

Blu-ray Disc.

[120p]/[100p] cannot be selected for the following settings.

[Intelligent Auto]

In full-frame shooting, the angle of view will be narrower under the following conditions:

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [ Record Setting] is set to [30p]

Related Topic

APS-C/Super 35mm

Record

Setting

Bit-rate Description

120p 60M/100p

60M

Approx. 60

Mbps

Records high-speed movies in 1920×1080 (120p/100p). You can record movies

in 120 fps or 100 fps.

You can create smoother slow-motion movies by using compatible editing

devices.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Record Setting Bit-rate Description

60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 24 Mbps at maximum Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).

60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) Approx. 17 Mbps on average Records movies in 1920×1080 (60i/50i).

509

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

S&Q Settings

You can record a moment that cannot be captured by the naked eye (slow-motion recording), or record a long-term

phenomenon into a compressed movie (quick-motion recording). For example, you can record an intense sports scene,

the moment when a bird starts to fly, a blooming flower, and a changing view of clouds or a starry sky. Sound will not be

recorded.

Menu item details

Record Setting:

Selects the frame rate of the movie.

Frame Rate:

Selects the shooting frame rate.

Playback speed

The playback speed will vary as below depending on the assigned [

Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC

Set the mode dial to

(S&Q Motion).

Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Exposure Mode] → and select the desired setting of

slow-motion/quick-motion (

Program Auto, Aperture Priority, Shutter Priority, or

Manual Exposure).

Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ S&Q Settings] and select the desired settings for [

Record Setting] and [ Frame Rate].

Press the MOVIE (movie) button to start recording.

Press the MOVIE button again to stop recording.

Frame Rate

Record Setting

24p 30p 60p

120fps 5 times slower 4 times slower -

60fps 2.5 times slower 2 times slower Normal playback speed

30fps 1.25 times slower Normal playback speed 2 times quick

15fps 1.6 times quick 2 times quick 4 times quick

8fps 3 times quick 3.75 times quick 7.5 times quick

4fps 6 times quick 7.5 times quick 15 times quick

2fps 12 times quick 15 times quick 30 times quick

1fps 24 times quick 30 times quick 60 times quick

510

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL

When [

Frame Rate] is set to [120fps]/[100fps], you cannot set [ Record Setting] to [60p]/[50p].

Note

In slow-motion recording, the shutter speed becomes faster and you may not be able to obtain the proper exposure. If this

happens, decrease the aperture value or adjust the ISO sensitivity to a higher value.

For an estimation of recordable time, refer to “Recordable movie times.”

The bit-rate of a recorded movie varies depending on the settings for [

Frame Rate] and [ Record Setting].

The movie will be recorded in XAVC S HD format.

During slow-motion/quick-motion recording, the following functions are not available.

[TC Run] under [TC/UB Settings]

[

TC Output] under [HDMI Settings]

[

4K Output Select]

Related Topic

S&Q Motion: Exposure Mode

Recordable movie times

Frame Rate

Record Setting

25p 50p

100fps 4 times slower -

50fps 2 times slower Normal playback speed

25fps Normal playback speed 2 times quick

12fps 2.08 times quick 4.16 times quick

6fps 4.16 times quick 8.3 times quick

3fps 8.3 times quick 16.6 times quick

2fps 12.5 times quick 25 times quick

1fps 25 times quick 50 times quick

511

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Proxy Recording

Sets whether to simultaneously record low-bit-rate proxy movies when recording XAVC S movies. Since proxy movies

are small in file size, they are suitable for transferring to smartphones or uploading to websites.

Menu item details

On :

Proxy movies are simultaneously recorded.

Off :

Proxy movies are not recorded.

Hint

Proxy movies are recorded in the XAVC S HD format (1280×720) at 9 Mbps. The frame rate of the proxy movie is the same as

that of the original movie.

Proxy movies are not displayed on the playback screen (single-image playback screen or image index screen).

is displayed

over movies for which a proxy movie was simultaneously recorded.

Note

Proxy movies cannot be played back on this camera.

Proxy recording is not available in the following situations.

When [

File Format] is set to [AVCHD]

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S HD] and [ Record Setting] is set to [120p]/[100p]

Deleting/protecting movies that have proxy movies removes/protects both the original and proxy movies. You cannot

delete/protect only original movies or proxy movies.

Movies cannot be edited on this camera.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Movie recording formats

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

Memory cards that can be used

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Proxy Recording] → desired setting.

512

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF drive speed (movie)

You can switch focusing speed when using autofocus in movie mode.

Menu item details

Fast:

Sets the AF drive speed to fast. This mode is suitable for shooting active scenes, such as sports.

Normal:

Sets the AF drive speed to normal.

Slow:

Sets the AF drive speed to slow. With this mode, the focus switches smoothly when the subject to be focused is

changed.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ AF drive speed] → desired setting.

513

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AF Tracking Sens. (movie)

You can set the AF sensitivity in movie mode.

Menu item details

Responsive:

Sets the AF sensitivity to high. This mode is useful when recording movies in which the subject is moving quickly.

Standard:

Sets the AF sensitivity to normal. This mode is useful when there are obstacles in front of the subject or in crowded

places.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ AF Tracking Sens.]→desired setting.

514

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Slow Shutter (movie)

Sets whether or not to adjust the shutter speed automatically when recording movies if the subject is dark.

Menu item details

On:

Uses Auto Slow Shutter. The shutter speed automatically slows when recording in dark locations. You can reduce noise

in the movie by using a slow shutter speed when recording in dark locations.

Off:

Does not use Auto Slow Shutter. The recorded movie will be darker than when [On] is selected, but you can record

movies with smoother motion and less object blur.

Note

[

Auto Slow Shutter] does not function in the following situations:

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

(Shutter Priority)

(Manual Exposure)

When [ISO] is set to other than [ISO AUTO]

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Auto Slow Shutter] → desired setting.

515

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Initial Focus Mag. (movie)

Sets the initial magnification scale for [Focus Magnifier] in the movie shooting mode.

Menu item details

x1.0:

Displays the image with the same magnification as the shooting screen.

x4.0:

Displays a 4.0-times enlarged image.

Related Topic

Focus Magnifier

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Initial Focus Mag.] → desired setting.

516

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Recording

Sets whether to record sounds when shooting movies. Select [Off] to avoid recording the sounds of the lens and the

camera operating.

Menu item details

On:

Records sound (stereo).

Off:

Does not record sound.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Recording] → desired setting.

517

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Rec Level

You can adjust the audio recording level while checking the level meter.

Menu item details

Turns up the audio recording level.

Turns down the audio recording level.

Reset:

Resets the audio recording level to the default setting.

Hint

When you record audio movies with loud volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a lower sound level. Doing so enables you to record

more realistic audio. When you record audio movies with lower volumes, set [Audio Rec Level] to a greater sound level to make

the sound easier to hear.

Note

Regardless of the [Audio Rec Level] settings, the limiter always operates.

[Audio Rec Level] is available only when the shooting mode is set to movie mode.

[Audio Rec Level] is unavailable during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

The [Audio Rec Level] settings are applied for both the internal microphone and the

(microphone) terminal input.

The setting for [Audio Rec Level] does not apply to recordings made using [Voice Memo].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Rec Level].

Select the desired level using the right/left sides of the control wheel.

518

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Level Display

Sets whether to display the audio level on the screen.

Menu item details

On:

Displays the audio level.

Off:

Does not display the audio level.

Note

The audio level is not displayed in the following situations:

When [Audio Recording] is set to [Off].

When DISP (Display Setting) is set to [No Disp. Info.].

During slow-motion/quick-motion shooting

The audio level is also displayed while shooting stand-by in movie recording mode.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Level Display] → desired setting.

519

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio Out Timing

You can set echo cancellation during audio monitoring and prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio

during HDMI output.

Menu item details

Live:

Outputs audio without delay. Select this setting when audio deviation is a problem during audio monitoring.

Lip Sync:

Outputs audio and video in sync. Select this setting to prevent undesirable deviations between video and audio.

Note

Using an external microphone may result in a slight delay. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the

microphone.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio Out Timing] → desired setting.

520

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wind Noise Reduct.

Sets whether or not to reduce wind noise by cutting the low-range sound of the input audio from the built-in microphone.

Menu item details

On:

Reduces wind noise.

Off:

Does not reduce wind noise.

Note

Setting this item to [On] where wind is not blowing sufficiently hard may cause normal sound to be recorded with too low volume.

When an external microphone (sold separately) is used, [Wind Noise Reduct.] does not function.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Wind Noise Reduct.] → desired setting.

521

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Marker Display (movie)

Sets whether or not to display markers set using [

Marker Settings] on the monitor or the viewfinder while shooting

movies.

Menu item details

On:

Markers are displayed. The markers are not recorded.

Off:

No marker is displayed.

Note

The markers are displayed when the mode dial is set to

(Movie) or , or when shooting movies.

You cannot display markers when using [Focus Magnifier].

The markers are displayed on the monitor or viewfinder. (You cannot output the markers.)

Related Topic

Marker Settings (movie)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Display] → desired setting.

522

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Marker Settings (movie)

Sets the markers to be displayed while shooting movies.

Menu item details

Center:

Sets whether or not to display the center marker in the center of the shooting screen.

[Off]/[On]

Aspect:

Sets the aspect marker display.

[Off]/[4:3]/[13:9]/[14:9]/[15:9]/[1.66:1]/[1.85:1]/[2.35:1]

Safety Zone:

Sets the safety zone display. This becomes the standard range that can be received by a general household TV.

[Off]/[80%]/[90%]

Guideframe:

Sets whether or not to display the guide frame. You can verify whether the subject is level or perpendicular to the ground.

[Off]/[On]

Hint

You can display several markers at the same time.

Place the subject on the cross point of the [Guideframe] to make a balanced composition.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Marker Settings] → desired setting.

523

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Video Light Mode

Sets the illumination setting for the HVL-LBPC LED light (sold separately).

Menu item details

Power Link:

The video light turns on/off in sync with the ON/OFF operation of this camera.

REC Link:

The video light turns on/off in sync with movie recording start/stop.

REC Link&STBY:

The video light turns on when movie recording starts and dims when not recording (STBY).

Auto:

The video light automatically turns on when it is dark.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Video Light Mode] → desired setting.

524

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Movie w/ shutter

You can start or stop recording movies by pressing the shutter button, which is bigger and easier to press than the

MOVIE (Movie) button.

Menu item details

On:

Enables movie recording using the shutter button when the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion].

Off:

Disables movie recording using the shutter button.

Hint

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can still start or stop recording movies using the MOVIE button.

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you can use the shutter button to start or stop recording movies on an external

recording/playback device using [

REC Control].

Note

When [Movie w/ shutter] is set to [On], you cannot focus by pressing the shutter button halfway down during movie recording.

Related Topic

Shooting movies

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Movie w/ shutter] → desired setting.

525

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shutter Type (still image)

You can set whether to shoot with a mechanical shutter or an electronic shutter.

Menu item details

Auto:

The shutter type is automatically switched based on the shooting conditions and shutter speed.

Mechanical Shutter:

Shoot with the mechanical shutter only.

Electronic Shutter:

Shoot with the electronic shutter only.

Hint

In the following situations, set the [

Shutter Type] to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].

When shooting with a high-speed shutter in a bright environment such as outside in bright sunlight, the beach, or snowy

mountains.

When you want to increase the speed of continuous shooting.

Note

In rare cases, the shutter sound may be produced when the power is turned off even if the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic

Shutter]. However, this is not a malfunction.

In the following situations, the mechanical shutter will be activated even if the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

When capturing a standard white color for the custom white balance

[Face Registration]

The following functions are unavailable when the [

Shutter Type] is set to [Electronic Shutter].

Flash shooting

Long Exposure NR

Bulb shooting

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)

MENU→

(Camera Settings2)→[ Shutter Type]→desired setting.

526

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

e-Front Curtain Shutter

The electronic front curtain shutter function shortens the time lag between when the shutter button is pressed and the

shutter is released. You can use [e-Front Curtain Shutter] when [

Shutter Type] is set to [Mechanical Shutter].

Menu item details

On:

Uses the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Off:

Does not use the electronic front curtain shutter function.

Note

When you shoot at high shutter speeds with a large-aperture lens attached, out-of-focus circle produced by the bokeh effect may

get cut off because of the shutter mechanism. If this happens, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].

When a lens made by another manufacturer (including a Minolta/Konica-Minolta lens) is used, set this function to [Off]. If you set

this function to [On], the correct exposure will not be set or the image brightness will be uneven.

When you shoot at high shutter speeds, the image brightness may become uneven depending on the shooting environment. In

such cases, set [e-Front Curtain Shutter] to [Off].

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [e-Front Curtain Shutter] → desired setting.

527

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Release w/o Lens

Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no lens is attached.

Menu item details

Enable:

Releases the shutter when no lens is attached. Select [Enable] when attaching the product to an astronomical telescope,

etc.

Disable:

Does not release the shutter when a lens is not attached.

Note

Correct metering cannot be achieved when you use lenses that do not provide a lens contact, such as the lens of an astronomical

telescope. In such cases, adjust the exposure manually by checking it on the recorded image.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Lens] → desired setting.

528

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Release w/o Card

Sets whether the shutter can be released when no memory card has been inserted.

Menu item details

Enable:

Releases the shutter even if no memory card has been inserted.

Disable:

Does not release the shutter when no memory card has been inserted.

Note

When no memory card has been inserted, the images shot will not be saved.

The default setting is [Enable]. It is recommended that you select [Disable] prior to actual shooting.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Release w/o Card] → desired setting.

529

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

SteadyShot

Sets whether or not to use the SteadyShot function.

Menu item details

On:

Uses [SteadyShot].

Off:

Does not use [SteadyShot].

We recommend that you set [Off] when using a tripod, etc.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → desired setting.

530

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

SteadyShot Settings

You can shoot with an appropriate SteadyShot setting for the attached lens.

Menu item details

Auto:

Performs the SteadyShot function automatically according to the information obtained from the attached lens.

Manual:

Performs the SteadyShot function according to the focal-length set using [SteadyS. Focal Len.]. (8mm-1000mm)

Check the focal-length index (A) and set the focal-length.

Note

The SteadyShot function may not work optimally when the power has just been turned on, right after you point the camera

towards a subject, or when the shutter button has been pressed all the way down without stopping halfway.

When using a tripod, etc., make sure to turn off the SteadyShot function because this can cause any malfunction when shooting.

[SteadyShot Settings] will be unavailable when MENU→

(Camera Settings2)→[SteadyShot] is set to [Off].

When the camera cannot obtain focal length information from the lens, the SteadyShot function does not work correctly. Set

[SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set [SteadyS. Focal Len.] to match the lens you are using. The current set value of the

SteadyShot focal length will display to the side of

When using an SEL16F28 lens (sold separately) with a teleconverter, etc., set [SteadyShot Adjust.] to [Manual] and set the focal

length.

When you set [SteadyShot] to [On]/[Off], the SteadyShot settings of the camera and lens switch at the same time.

If a lens equipped with a SteadyShot switch is attached, the settings can only be changed using that switch on the lens. You

cannot switch the settings using the camera.

Related Topic

SteadyShot

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [SteadyShot] → [On].

[SteadyShot Settings] → [SteadyShot Adjust.] → desired setting.

531

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Clear Image Zoom/Digital Zoom (Zoom)

When you use a zoom function other than the optical zoom, you can exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom.

Related Topic

Zoom Setting

The zoom features available with this product

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → [ClearImage Zoom] or [Digital Zoom].

When a power zoom lens is mounted, move the zoom lever or the zoom ring of the zoom lens to enlarge

subjects.

When you exceed the zoom range of the optical zoom, the camera automatically switches to another zoom than

the optical zoom.

When a lens other than a power zoom lens is mounted, select MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Zoom]

→ desired value.

Press the center of the control wheel to exit.

You can also assign the [Zoom] function to the desired button by selecting MENU →

(Camera Settings2)

→ [

Custom Key] or [ Custom Key].

532

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zoom Setting

You can select the zoom setting of the product.

Menu item details

Optical zoom only:

Limits the zoom range to the optical zoom. You can use the Smart Zoom function if you set [

JPEG Image Size] to

[M] or [S].

ClearImage Zoom :

Select this setting to use Clear Image Zoom. Even if the zoom range exceeds the optical zoom, the product magnifies

images using an image process with less deterioration.

Digital Zoom :

When the zoom range of the Clear Image Zoom is exceeded, the product magnifies images to the largest scale.

However, the image quality will deteriorate.

Note

Set [Optical zoom only] if you want to magnify images within the range in which image quality does not deteriorate.

Related Topic

The zoom features available with this product

About zoom scale

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Setting] → desired setting.

533

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zoom Ring Rotate

Assigns zoom in (T) or zoom out (W) functions to the zoom ring rotation direction. Available only with power zoom lenses

that support this function.

Menu item details

Left(W)/Right(T):

Assigns zoom out (W) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-in (T) function to right-handed rotation.

Right(W)/Left(T):

Assigns zoom in (T) function to left-handed rotation and zoom-out (W) function to right-handed rotation.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zoom Ring Rotate] → desired setting.

534

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

Allows you to set the screen display modes that can be selected using DISP (Display Setting) in shooting mode.

Menu item details

Graphic Display :

Shows basic shooting information. Graphically shows the shutter speed and aperture value.

Display All Info. :

Shows recording information.

No Disp. Info. :

Does not show recording information.

Histogram :

Displays the luminance distribution graphically.

Level :

Indicates whether the product is level in both the front-back (A) and horizontal (B) directions. When the product is level in

either direction, the indicator turns to green.

For viewfinder*:

Displays only shooting information on the monitor, not the subject. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the

viewfinder.

Monitor Off*:

Always turns the monitor off when shooting images. You can use the monitor when playing back images or operating

MENU. This setting is a display setting for shooting with the viewfinder.

Note

If you tilt the product forward or backward by a large degree, the level error will be great.

The product may have a margin of error of almost ±1° even when the inclination is corrected by the level.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] or [Finder] → desired setting → [Enter].

The items marked with

are available.

These screen modes are available only in the setting for [Monitor].

535

Related Topic

Switching the screen display (while shooting/during playback)

536

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

FINDER/MONITOR

Sets the method for switching the display between the viewfinder and the monitor.

Menu item details

Auto:

When you look into the viewfinder, the eye sensor reacts and the display is switched to the viewfinder automatically.

Viewfinder(Manual):

The monitor is turned off and the image is displayed only in the viewfinder.

Monitor(Manual):

The viewfinder is turned off and the image is always displayed on the monitor.

Hint

You can assign the [FINDER/MONITOR] function to your preferred key.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → set [Finder/Monitor Sel.] to

the preferred key.

If you want to retain the viewfinder display or the monitor display, set [FINDER/MONITOR] to [Viewfinder(Manual)] or

[Monitor(Manual)] beforehand.

You can keep the monitor off when you take your eyes off the viewfinder during recording by setting the monitor display to

[Monitor Off] using the DISP button. Select MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [DISP Button] → [Monitor] and add a check

mark to [Monitor Off] beforehand.

Note

When the monitor is pulled out, the eye sensor of the camera will not detect your eye approaching even if [FINDER/MONITOR] is

set to [Auto]. The image will continue to be displayed on the monitor.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

DISP Button (Monitor/Finder)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [FINDER/MONITOR] → desired setting.

537

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Finder Frame Rate (still image)

Display the subject's movements more smoothly by adjusting the frame rate of the viewfinder during still image shooting.

This function is convenient when shooting a fast-moving subject.

Menu item details

Standard:

Displays the subject at a normal frame rate on the viewfinder.

High:

Displays the movements of the subject more smoothly on the viewfinder.

Note

When [

Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the resolution of the viewfinder is lowered.

Even when [

Finder Frame Rate] is set to [High], the setting may switch to [Standard] automatically depending on the

temperature of the shooting environment and the shooting conditions.

[

Finder Frame Rate] is locked to [Standard] in the following situations:

During playback

During HDMI connection

When the temperature inside the camera's body is high

During continuous shooting with [

Shutter Type] set to [Auto] or [Electronic Shutter].

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU → (Camera Settings2) →[ Finder Frame Rate] → desired setting.

This function can be assigned to key of your choice using [

Custom Key].

538

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Zebra Setting

Sets a zebra pattern, which appears over part of an image if the brightness level of that part meets the IRE level that you

have set. Use this zebra pattern as a guide to adjust the brightness.

Menu item details

Zebra Display:

Sets whether to display the zebra pattern.

Zebra Level:

Adjusts the brightness level of the zebra pattern.

Hint

You can register values to check the correct exposure or overexposure as well as the brightness level for [Zebra Level]. The

settings for correct exposure confirmation and overexposure confirmation are registered to [Custom1] and [Custom2] respectively

in the default settings.

To check the correct exposure, set a standard value and the range for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear on

areas that fall within the range you set.

To check the overexposure, set a minimum value for the brightness level. The zebra pattern will appear over areas with a

brightness level equal to or higher than the value you set.

Note

The zebra pattern is not displayed on devices connected via HDMI.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Zebra Setting] → desired setting.

539

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Grid Line

Sets whether the grid line is displayed or not. The grid line will help you to adjust the composition of images.

Menu item details

Rule of 3rds Grid:

Place main subjects close to one of the grid lines that divide the image into thirds for a well-balanced composition.

Square Grid:

Square grids make it easier to confirm the horizontal level of your composition. This is useful for assessing the

composition when shooting landscapes, closeups, or when performing camera scanning.

Diag. + Square Grid:

Place a subject on the diagonal line to express an uplifting and powerful feeling.

Off:

Does not display the grid line.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Grid Line] → desired setting.

540

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Exposure Set. Guide

You can set whether to display a guide when you change the exposure.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not display the guide.

On:

Displays the guide.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Exposure Set. Guide] → desired setting.

541

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Live View Display

Sets whether or not to show images altered with effects of the exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style],

or [Picture Effect] on the screen.

Menu item details

Setting Effect ON:

Displays Live View in conditions close to what your picture will look like as a result of applying all your settings. This

setting is useful when you want to shoot pictures while checking the results of the shot on the Live View screen.

Setting Effect OFF:

Displays Live View without the effects of exposure compensation, white balance, [Creative Style], or [Picture Effect].

When this setting is used, you can easily check the image composition.

Live View is always displayed with the appropriate brightness even in [Manual Exposure] mode.

When [Setting Effect OFF] is selected, the

icon is displayed on the Live View screen.

Hint

When you use a third-party flash, such as a studio flash, Live View Display may be dark for some shutter speed settings. When

[Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], Live View Display will be displayed brightly, so that you can easily check the

composition.

Note

[Live View Display] cannot be set to [Setting Effect OFF] in the following shooting modes:

[Intelligent Auto]

[Movie]

[S&Q Motion]

When [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], the brightness of the shot image will not be the same as that of the

displayed Live View.

Even if [Live View Display] is set to [Setting Effect OFF], when you use the electrical shutter, images will look as if your settings

were applied.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Live View Display] → desired setting.

542

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Shoot. Start Disp.

Sets whether or not to indicate the shutter release timing with a black screen during blackout-free shooting. The black

screen makes it easier to visually confirm when the shutter is released.

Menu item details

On:

The screen blacks out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

Off:

The screen does not black out when shooting the first image during blackout-free shooting.

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Start Disp.] → desired setting.

543

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Displaying the release timing (Shoot. Timing Disp.)

Sets whether or not to display marks (such as a frame) on the screen while shooting. This function is useful in situations

where it is difficult to determine the timing of shooting just by looking at the screen, such as when the shutter sound is

turned off.

Menu item details

On: Type1:

Displays a frame (dark color) around the focusing frame.

On: Type2:

Displays a frame (light color) around the focusing frame.

On: Type3:

Displays

(dark color) in the four corners of the screen.

On: Type4:

Displays

(light color) in the four corners of the screen.

Off:

Does not display the shutter release timing during blackout-free shooting.

[On: Type1] / [On: Type2] (Example: [Focus Area] is set to [Center])

[On: Type3] / [On: Type4]

Related Topic

Using the electronic shutter

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Shoot. Timing Disp.] → desired setting.

544

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Displaying continuous shooting remaining time indicator (Cont. Shoot. Length)

Sets whether to display an indicator of the remaining time for which continuous shooting can be performed at the same

shooting speed.

Menu item details

Always Display:

Always displays the indicator when the drive mode is set to [Cont. Shooting].

Shoot.-Only Display:

Displays the indicator only while continuous shooting is performed.

Not Displayed:

Does not display the indicator.

Hint

When the internal camera memory for buffering is full, “SLOW” will be displayed and the continuous shooting speed will

decrease.

Related Topic

Cont. Shooting

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Cont. Shoot. Length] → desired setting.

545

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Review

You can check the recorded image on the screen right after the shooting. You can also set the display time for Auto

Review.

Menu item details

10 Sec/5 Sec/2 Sec:

Displays the recorded image on the screen right after shooting for the selected duration of time. If you perform a

magnifying operation during Auto Review, you can check that image using the magnified scale.

Off:

Does not display the Auto Review.

Note

When you use a function that performs image processing, the image before processing may be displayed temporarily, followed by

the image after processing.

The DISP (Display Setting) settings are applied for the Auto Review display.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Auto Review] → desired setting.

546

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

You can use the custom key function to assign the functions you use most frequently to easily operable keys. This lets

you skip the process of selecting items from MENU, so you can recall the functions more quickly. You can also assign

[Not set] to easily operable keys to prevent accidental operation.

You can separately assign functions to custom keys for the still image shooting mode (

Custom Key), movie

shooting mode (

Custom Key), and playback mode ( Custom Key).

Assignable functions vary depending on the keys.

You can assign functions to the following keys.

For examples of custom key settings, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/custom.php

Hint

You can recall functions more quickly by using the Function menu to configure each setting directly from the Fn button, along with

the custom keys. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

The following is the procedure for assigning the [Eye AF] function to the AEL button.

AF-ON Button1.

Custom Button 32.

Custom Button 23.

Custom Button 14.

AEL Button5.

Center Button6.

Control Wheel /Left Button/Right Button/Down Button7.

Custom Button 48.

Multi-Slc Center Btn9.

Fn/

Button10.

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key].

If you want to assign a function to recall while shooting movies, select [

Custom Key]. If you want to assign

a function to recall while playing back images, select [

Custom Key].

547

Note

You can also assign shooting functions to the focus hold button on the lens. However, some lenses do not have a focus hold

button.

If you assign [Follow Custom (

)] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], but the function is one that is unavailable in the

movie shooting mode such as [

JPEG Quality] or [Flash Mode], the function will not be recalled when you press the key in the

movie shooting mode.

If you assign [Follow Custom (

/ )] to a custom key using [ Custom Key], the camera will switch to the shooting mode

and recall the assigned function when you press the key in the playback mode.

Related Topic

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

Move to the [Rear1] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [AEL Button] and

press the center of the control wheel.

Press the left/right side of the control wheel until [Eye AF] is displayed. Select [Eye AF], and then press the

center.

If you press the AEL button in the still image shooting mode and eyes are detected, [Eye AF] will activate, and

the camera will focus on the eyes. Shoot images while holding down the AEL button.

548

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using Fn (Function) button (Function menu)

The Function menu is a menu of 12 functions that is displayed at the bottom of the screen when you press the Fn

(Function) button in the shooting mode. You can access frequently used functions more quickly by registering them to

the function menu.

For details on functions that can be registered to the function menu, refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/function.php

Hint

You can register twelve functions to the Function menus for still image shooting and movie shooting, respectively.

You can recall functions more quickly by using the custom key function to assign frequently used functions to desired keys, along

with the function menu. Refer to the related functions under “Related Topic” at the bottom of this page.

Press the DISP on the control wheel repeatedly to display a screen mode other than [For viewfinder], and

then press the Fn (Function) button.

Select the desired function by pressing the top/bottom/left/right side of the control wheel.

549

To adjust settings from the dedicated setting screens

Select the desired function in step 2, then press the center of the control wheel. The dedicated setting screen for the

function will appear. Follow the operating guide (A) to adjust settings.

To change the functions in the function menu (Function Menu Set.)

The following is the procedure for changing [Drive Mode] in the still image function menu to [Grid Line].

To change the movie function menu, select a movie function menu item in Step 2.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Select the desired setting by turning the front dial, and press the center of the control wheel.

Some functions can be fine-tuned using the rear dial.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Function Menu Set.].1.

Select

(Drive Mode) from among the twelve still image function menu items using the top/bottom/left/right

side of the control wheel, and then press the center.

Move to the [Display/Auto Review] screen using the left/right side of the control wheel. Then, select [Grid Line] and

press the center of the control wheel.

(Grid Line) will be displayed in the former location of (Drive Mode) in the function menu.

550

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Changing the function of the dial temporarily (My Dial Settings)

You can assign the desired functions to the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel, and register up to three combinations

of settings as “My Dial” settings. You can quickly recall or switch registered “My Dial” settings by pressing the custom key

you assigned in advance.

Registering functions to “My Dial”

Register the functions that you want to assign to the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel as [My Dial 1] through

[My Dial 3].

Assigning a key to recall “My Dial”

Assign a custom key to recall the registered “My Dial” settings.

Menu item details

My Dial 1 during Hold /My Dial 2 during Hold/My Dial 3 during Hold:

While you hold down the key, the functions that you registered in [My Dial Settings] are assigned to the dial/wheel.

My Dial 1→2→3 :

Each time you press the key, the function changes in the following sequence: “Normal function → Function of My Dial 1

→ Function of My Dial 2 → Function of My Dial 3 → Normal function.”

Toggle My Dial 1 /Toggle My Dial 2/Toggle My Dial 3:

The function registered using [My Dial Settings] is maintained even if you do not hold down the key. Press the key again

to return to the normal function.

Shooting while switching “My Dial”

During shooting, you can recall “My Dial” using the custom key, and shoot as you change the shooting setting by turning

the front dial, the rear dial, and the control wheel.

In the following example, the functions listed below are registered to "My Dial," and [My Dial 1→2→3] is assigned to the

C1 (Custom 1) button.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [My Dial Settings].1.

Select a dial or wheel for

(My Dial 1), and press the center of the control wheel.2.

Select the desired function to assign using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center of the control wheel.

Select “--” (Not set) for a dial or wheel to which you do not want to assign any function.

After you select functions for all of the dials and the wheel in (My Dial 1) by repeating Steps 2 and 3, select [OK].

The settings for

(My Dial 1) will be registered.

If you want to register

(My Dial 2) and (My Dial 3) as well, follow the same procedure as described above.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key] or [ Custom Key] → Select the key that you want to use

to recall “My Dial.”

Select the number of the “My Dial” setting that you want to recall or the pattern for switching “My Dial.”2.

My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

551

Note

“My Dial” settings in which every dial/wheel is set to [Not set] are not recalled when you press the custom key. They are also

skipped in [My Dial 1→2→3].

Even if a dial/wheel has been locked using the [Lock Operation Parts] function, it will be unlocked temporarily when “My Dial” is

recalled.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

My Dial 1 My Dial 2 My Dial 3

Control wheel ISO White Balance Not set

Front dial Av Creative Style Move AF Point:L/R

Rear dial Tv Picture Effect Move AF Point:U/D

Press the C1 (Custom1) button.

The functions registered to [My Dial 1] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial, and the rear dial.

The icons shown below are displayed in the lower part of the screen.

Turn the control wheel to set the ISO value, turn the front dial to set the aperture value, and turn the rear dial to set

the shutter speed.

Press the C1 button again. The functions registered to [My Dial 2] will be assigned to the control wheel, the front dial,

and the rear dial.

Turn the control wheel to set [White Balance], turn the front dial to set [Creative Style], and turn the rear dial to set

[Picture Effect].

Press the C1 button again, and change the setting values for the functions registered to [My Dial 3].5.

Press the shutter button to shoot.6.

552

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Dial Setup

You can switch the functions of the front/rear dial.

Menu item details

Tv Av:

The front dial is used to change the shutter speed and the rear dial to change the aperture value.

Av Tv:

The front dial is used to change the aperture value and the rear dial to change the shutter speed.

Note

The [Dial Setup] function is enabled when the shooting mode is set to “M.”

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Dial Setup] → desired setting.

553

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Av/Tv Rotate

Sets the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel when changing the aperture value or shutter

speed.

Menu item details

Normal:

Does not change the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.

Reverse:

Reverses the direction of rotation for the front dial, rear dial, or control wheel.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Av/Tv Rotate] → desired setting.

554

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Dial Ev Comp

You can adjust the exposure using the front dial or rear dial when the exposure compensation dial is set to “0.” You can

adjust the exposure in a range of -5.0 EV to +5.0 EV.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not enable exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.

Front dial/ Rear dial:

Enables exposure compensation with the front or rear dial.

Note

When the exposure compensation function is assigned to the front or rear dial, any function that had been assigned to that dial

previously is re-assigned to another dial.

The settings of the exposure compensation dial will be prioritized over [Exposure Comp.] in MENU or the exposure settings using

the front or rear dial.

Related Topic

Exposure Comp.

Set the exposure compensation dial to "0."

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Dial Ev Comp] → desired setting.

555

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Function Ring(Lens)

You can choose which of the following functions to assign to the function ring on the lens: power-assisted focusing

(power focus), or switching the angle of view between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm (available only with

compatible lenses).

For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the lens.

Menu item details

Power Focus:

The focusing position moves toward infinity when you turn the function ring to the right. The focusing position moves to

the closer range when you turn the function ring to the left.

/Full Frame Select:

The angle of view switches between full frame and APS-C/Super 35 mm when the function ring is turned.

The angle of view switches regardless of the direction in which you turn the function ring.

Related Topic

APS-C/Super 35mm

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Function Ring(Lens)]→ desired setting.

556

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

[Touch Focus] allows you to specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. This function is available

when [Focus Area] is set to a parameter other than [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or

[Tracking: Expand Flexible Spot]. Select MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] beforehand.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the still image mode

You can specify a position where you want to focus using touch operations. After touching the monitor and specifying a

position, press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Specifying the position where you want to focus in the movie recording mode (spot focus)

The camera will focus on the touched subject. Spot focus is not available when shooting with the viewfinder.

Hint

In addition to the touch focus function, touch operations such as the following are also available.

When [Focus Area] is set to [Flexible Spot], [Expand Flexible Spot], [Tracking: Flexible Spot] or [Tracking: Expand Flexible

Spot], the focusing frame can be moved using touch operations.

When the [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus], the focus magnifier can be used by double-tapping the monitor.

Note

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Focus].

Touch the monitor.

When shooting with the monitor, touch the position where you want to focus.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can move the position of the focus by touching and dragging on the

monitor while looking through the viewfinder.

To cancel focusing with touch operations, touch or press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the

monitor, and press the center of the control wheel if shooting with the viewfinder.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

Touch the subject on which you want to focus before or during recording.

When you touch the subject, the focus mode temporarily switches to manual focus and the focus can be adjusted

using the focus ring.

To cancel spot focus, touch

or press the center of the control wheel.

557

The touch focus function is not available in the following situations:

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].

When using the digital zoom

When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Touch Panel/Pad

558

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

You can use touch operations to select a subject you want to track in the still image and movie recording modes.

Select MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → [On] in advance.

Hint

To cancel tracking, touch

or press the center of the control wheel.

Note

[Touch Tracking] is unavailable in the following situations:

When shooting movies with [

Record Setting] set to [120p]/[100p].

When [Focus Mode] is set to [Manual Focus].

When using the Smart Zoom, Clear Image Zoom and Digital Zoom

When using the LA-EA2 or LA-EA4 Mount Adaptor

Related Topic

Touch Operation

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Func. of Touch Operation] → [Touch Tracking].

Touch the subject that you want to track on the monitor.

Tracking will start.

When shooting with the viewfinder, you can use the touch pad to select a subject you want to track.

Press the shutter button halfway down to focus.

Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot images.

559

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

MOVIE Button

Sets whether or not to activate the MOVIE (Movie) button.

Menu item details

Always:

Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button in any mode.

Movie Mode Only:

Starts movie recording when you press the MOVIE button only if the shooting mode is set to [Movie] or [S&Q Motion]

mode.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [MOVIE Button] → desired setting.

560

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Lock Operation Parts

You can set whether the multi-selector, dials, and wheel can be locked by pressing and holding down the Fn (Function)

button.

Menu item details

Off:

Does not lock the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, or control wheel even if you press and hold down the Fn (Function)

button.

Multi-Selector Only:

Locks the multi-selector.

Dial + Wheel:

Locks the front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.

All:

Locks the multi-selector, front dial, rear dial, and control wheel.

Hint

You can release the lock by holding the Fn (Function) button down again.

Note

If you set [

AF Area Registration] to [On], [Lock Operation Parts] will be fixed to [Off].

Related Topic

Registering the current focus area (AF Area Registration) (still image)

MENU → (Camera Settings2) → [Lock Operation Parts] → desired setting.

To lock the operating parts, hold down the Fn (function) button until the message “Locked.” appears on the

monitor.

561

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Audio signals

Selects whether the product produces a sound or not.

Menu item details

On:all:

Sounds are produced for example when the focus is achieved by pressing the shutter button halfway down.

On:other than e-shut:

Sounds are produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button halfway down, etc. The electronic shutter does not

produce any sounds.

On:e-shutter only:

Only the electronic shutter produces sounds. Sounds are not produced when focusing by pressing the shutter button

halfway down, etc.

Off:

Sounds are not produced.

Note

If [Focus Mode] is set to [Continuous AF], the camera will not beep when it focuses on a subject.

MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [Audio signals] → desired setting.

562

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

You can transfer still images, XAVC S movies, slow-motion movies, or quick-motion movies to a smartphone and view

them. The application Imaging Edge Mobile must be installed on your smartphone.

Menu item details

Select on This Device:

Selects an image on the product to be transferred to the smartphone.

(1) Select from among [This Image], [All with this date] or [Multiple Images].

The options displayed may differ depending on the View Mode selected on the camera.

(2) If you select [Multiple Images], select the desired images using the center of the control wheel, then press MENU →

[Enter].

Select on Smartphone:

Displays all images recorded on the product’s memory card on the smartphone.

Note

You can only transfer images that are saved on the camera's memory card.

You can only transfer images that are saved on the memory card in the memory card slot being played back. To change which

memory card slot is being played back, select MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → the desired slot.

You can select an image size to be sent to the smartphone from [Original], [2M] or [VGA].

To change the image size, refer to the following steps.

For Android smartphone

Start Imaging Edge Mobile, and change the image size by [Settings] → [Copy Image Size].

For iPhone/iPad

Select Imaging Edge Mobile in the setting menu, and change the image size by [Copy Image Size].

RAW images are converted to JPEG format when they are sent.

You cannot send AVCHD format movies.

MENU → (Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Send to Smartphone] → desired setting.

If you press the

(Send to Smartphone) button in playback mode, the setting screen for [Send to

Smartphone] will appear.

If the product is ready for the transfer, the information screen appears on the product. Connect the

smartphone and the product using that information.

The setting method for connecting the smartphone and the product varies depending on the smartphone.

563

Depending on the smartphone, the transferred movie may not be played back correctly. For example, the movie may not play

smoothly, or there may be no sound.

Depending on the format of the still image, movie, slow-motion movie, or quick-motion movie, it may not be possible to play it

back on a smartphone.

This product shares the connection information for [Send to Smartphone] with a device that has permission to connect. If you

want to change the device that is permitted to connect to the product, reset the connection information by following these steps.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset]. After resetting the connection information, you must register the

smartphone again.

When [Airplane Mode] is set to [On], you cannot connect this product and the smartphone. Set [Airplane Mode] to [Off].

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

Sending images to a smartphone (NFC One-touch Sharing)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

Airplane Mode

564

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Sending Target (proxy movies)

When transferring XAVC S video to a smartphone with [Send to Smartphone], you can set whether to transfer the low-

bit-rate proxy movie or the high-bit-rate original movie.

Menu item details

Proxy Only:

Transfers only proxy movies.

Original Only:

Transfers only original movies.

Proxy & Original:

Transfers both proxy and original movies.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Proxy Recording

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [ Sending Target] → desired setting.

565

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Smartphone Func.: Cnct. during Power OFF

Sets whether or not to accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off. When [Cnct.

during Power OFF] is set to [On], you can browse images on the camera's memory card and transfer images from the

camera to a smartphone by operating the smartphone.

Menu Item Details

On :

Accepts Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

The battery level is depleted gradually while the camera is turned off. If you do not want to use [Cnct. during Power

OFF], turn it off.

Off :

Does not accept Bluetooth connections from a smartphone while the camera is turned off.

How to browse/transfer images on the smartphone

Advance Preparation

Operations

Note

If the smartphone is not operated for a certain period of time, the Bluetooth connection will become deactivated. Select [Camera

Remote Power ON/OFF] again on the smartphone.

When the camera is turned on, the camera switches to the shooting mode, and [Send to Smartphone Func.] ends.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Bluetooth Settings

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → desired setting.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] on the camera.1.

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Smartphone Func.] → [Cnct. during Power OFF] → [On].2.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] on the camera to display the screen for pairing.3.

Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on the smartphone, and then select the camera to be paired on the [Camera Remote

Power ON/OFF] screen.

Turn off the camera.1.

Select the camera on the [Camera Remote Power ON/OFF] screen of Imaging Edge Mobile to turn on the camera.

The camera’s access lamp will light up, and the browsing and transferring functions will become available.

566

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Send to Computer

You can transfer images stored in the product to a computer connected to a wireless access point or wireless broadband

router and easily make backup copies using this operation. Before starting this operation, install PlayMemories Home on

your computer and register the access point on the product.

Note

Depending on the application settings of your computer, the product will turn off after saving the images to your computer.

You can transfer images from the product to only one computer at a time.

If you want to transfer images to another computer, connect the product and the computer via a USB connection and follow the

instructions in PlayMemories Home.

Proxy movies cannot be transferred.

Related Topic

Installing PlayMemories Home

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Start your computer.

MENU →

(Network) → [Send to Computer] → the desired memory card slot.

567

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

FTP Transfer Func.

You can set up image transferring using an FTP server or transfer images to the FTP server. Basic knowledge of FTP

servers is required.

For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

Related Topic

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

MENU →

(Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → desired setting.

568

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

View on TV

You can view images on a network-enabled TV by transferring them from the product without connecting the product and

TV with a cable. For some TVs, you may need to perform operations on the TV. For details, refer to the operating

instructions supplied with the TV.

Slideshow settings

You can change the slideshow settings by pressing the down side of the control wheel.

Playback Selection:

Selects the group of images to be shown.

Folder View(Still):

Selects from [All] and [All in Folder].

Date View:

Selects from [All] and [All in Date Rng.].

Interval:

Selects from [Short] and [Long].

Effects*:

Selects from [On] and [Off].

Playback Image Size:

Selects from [HD] and [4K].

Note

You can only transfer images that are saved on the memory card in the memory card slot being played back. To change the

memory card slot to be played back, select MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → the desired slot.

You can use this function on a TV that supports DLNA renderer.

You can view images on a Wi-Fi Direct-enabled TV or network-enabled TV (including wired network-enabled TVs).

If you connect TV and this product and do not use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to register your access point first.

Displaying the images on the TV may take time.

Movies cannot be shown on a TV via Wi-Fi. Use an HDMI cable (sold separately).

MENU →

(Network) → [View on TV] → desired device to be connected.

When you want to play back images using slideshow, press the center of the control wheel.

To display the next/previous image manually, press the right/left sides of the control wheel.

To change the device to be connected, press the down side of the control wheel, then select [Device list].

The settings are effective only for BRAVIA TV which is compatible with the functions.

569

When [Display as Group] is set to [On], only the first image of the group is transferred to the TV.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

570

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Sets the condition for connecting the camera to a smartphone.

Menu item details

Ctrl w/ Smartphone:

Sets whether to connect the camera and a smartphone using Wi-Fi. ([On]/[Off])

Connection:

Displays the QR code or SSID used to connect the camera to a smartphone.

Always Connected:

Sets whether to keep the camera connected to a smartphone. If this item is set to [On], once you connect the camera to

a smartphone, it will remain connected to the smartphone at all times. If it is set to [Off], the camera will connect to a

smartphone only when the connection procedure is performed.

Note

If [Always Connected] is set to [On], the power consumption will be greater than when it is set to [Off].

Related Topic

Controlling the camera using a smartphone (NFC One-touch remote)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an Android smartphone (SSID)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (QR Code)

Controlling the camera using an iPhone or iPad (SSID)

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → desired setting.

571

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

Uses a Wi-Fi or USB connection, etc. to control the camera from a computer, including such functions as shooting and

storing images on the computer.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.

For details on [PC Remote Function], refer to the following URL:

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/support/tutorial/ilc/l/ilce-9m2/pcremote.php

Menu item details

PC Remote:

Sets whether or not to use the [PC Remote] function. ([On] / [Off])

PC Remote Cnct Method:

Selects the connection method when the camera is connected to a computer using [PC Remote]. ([USB]/[Wired

LAN]/[Wi-Fi Direct]/[Wi-Fi Access Point])

Pairing:

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wired LAN] or [Wi-Fi Access Point], pair the camera with the computer.

Wi-Fi Direct Info.:

Displays the information needed to connect to the camera from the computer when [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to

[Wi-Fi Direct].

Still Img. Save Dest.:

Sets whether or not to save still images to both the camera and the computer during PC Remote shooting. ([PC

Only]/[PC+Camera]/[Camera Only])

RAW+J PC Save Img:

Selects the file type for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera].

([RAW & JPEG]/[JPEG Only]/[RAW Only])

PC Save Image Size:

Selects the file size for images to be transferred to the computer when [Still Img. Save Dest.] is set to [PC+Camera]. The

original-sized JPEG file or a 2M-equivalent JPEG file can be transferred. ([Original]/[2M])

How to connect the camera and the computer

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [USB]

Connect the camera and the computer using a USB Type-C cable (supplied).

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wired LAN]

Connect the camera to the computer or a switching hub using a commercially available LAN cable. The camera and the

computer need to be paired in advance.

Connect the camera and the computer or switching hub using the LAN cable, and select MENU→

(Network) → [PC

Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, then use Remote Camera Tool to pair the camera and the computer.

Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the camera to finish pairing.

MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → Select an item to set, and then select the desired setting.

Connect the camera to the computer, and then launch Imaging Edge (Remote) on the computer.

You can now operate the camera using Imaging Edge (Remote).

The connection method between the camera and the computer depends on the setting for [PC Remote Cnct

Method].

572

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Direct]

Use the camera as an access point, and connect the computer to the camera directly via Wi-Fi.

Select MENU→

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Wi-Fi Direct Info.] to display the Wi-Fi connection information

(SSID and password) for the camera. Connect the computer and the camera using the Wi-Fi connection information

displayed on the camera.

When [PC Remote Cnct Method] is set to [Wi-Fi Access Point]

Connect the camera and the computer via Wi-Fi using a wireless access point. The camera and the computer need to be

paired in advance.

Select MENU→

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push] or [Access Point Set.] to connect the camera to the

wireless access point. Connect the computer to the same wireless access point.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [Pairing] on the camera, and then use Imaging Edge

(Remote) to pair the camera and the computer. Select [OK] on the pairing confirmation screen displayed on the camera

to finish pairing.

Pairing information is deleted when you initialize the camera.

Note

When an unrecordable memory card is inserted into the camera, you cannot record still images even if [Still Img. Save Dest.] is

set to [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera].

When [Camera Only] or [PC+Camera] is selected and no memory card is inserted into the camera, the shutter will not be

released even if [Release w/o Card] is set to [Enable].

While a still image is being played back on the camera, you cannot shoot with [PC Remote].

[RAW+J PC Save Img] can only be selected when [

File Format] is set to [RAW & JPEG].

573

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Airplane Mode

When you board an airplane, etc., you can temporarily disable all the wireless-related functions including Wi-Fi.

MENU →

(Network) → [Airplane Mode] → desired setting.

If you set [Airplane Mode] to [On], an airplane mark will be displayed on the screen.

574

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

If your access point has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button, you can register the access point to this product easily.

Note

[WPS Push] works only if the security setting of your access point is set to WPA or WPA2 and your access point supports the Wi-

Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button method. If the security setting is set to WEP or your access point does not support the Wi-Fi

Protected Setup (WPS) button method, perform [Access Point Set.].

For details about the available functions and settings of your access point, see the access point operating instructions or contact

the administrator of the access point.

A connection may not be possible or the communication distance may be shorter depending on the surrounding conditions, such

as the type of wall material and the presence of obstructions or radio waves between the product and access point. In this case,

change the location of the product or move the product closer to the access point.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

MENU →

(Network) →[Wi-Fi Settings] → [WPS Push].

Push the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button on the access point to connect.

575

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

You can register your access point manually. Before starting the procedure, check the SSID name of the access point,

security system, and password. The password may be preset in some devices. For details, see the access point

operating instructions, or consult the access point administrator.

Other setting items

Depending on the status or the setting method of your access point, you may want to set more items.

WPS PIN:

Displays the PIN code you enter into the connected device.

Priority Connection:

Select [On] or [Off].

IP Address Setting:

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Access Point Set.].

Select the access point you want to register.

When the desired access point is displayed on the screen: Select the desired access point.

When the desired access point is not displayed on the screen: Select [Manual Setting] and set the access

point.

If you select [Manual Setting], input the SSID name of the access point, then select the security system.

Input the password, and select [OK].

Access points without the mark do not require a password.

Select [OK].

576

Select [Auto] or [Manual].

IP Address:

If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the set address.

Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:

If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Note

To give the registered access point priority in the future, set [Priority Connection] to [On].

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

How to use the keyboard

577

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Frequency Band (models supporting 5 GHz)

Sets the frequency band for Wi-Fi communications. [5GHz] has faster communication speeds and more stable data

transfers than [2.4GHz]. The [Frequency Band] setting only applies to [Send to Smartphone], [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and

[PC Remote] (Wi-Fi Direct).

Menu item details

2.4GHz/5GHz

Note

If there are both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz access points with the same SSID and encryption format, the access point with the stronger

radio field will be displayed.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Frequency Band] → desired setting.

578

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: Display Wi-Fi Info.

Displays Wi-Fi information for the camera such as the MAC address, IP address, etc.

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [Display Wi-Fi Info.].

579

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wi-Fi Settings: SSID/PW Reset

This product shares connection information for [Send to Smartphone], [

Connection] under [Ctrl w/ Smartphone], and

the Wi-Fi Direct connections using [PC Remote Function] with devices that have permission to connect. If you want to

change which devices have permission to connect, reset the connection information.

Note

If you connect this product to a smartphone after resetting the connection information, you must make the settings for the

smartphone again.

If you connect this product to a computer with Wi-Fi Direct after resetting the connection information, you must reconfigure the

settings of the computer.

Related Topic

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Ctrl w/ Smartphone

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

MENU →

(Network) → [Wi-Fi Settings] → [SSID/PW Reset] → [OK].

580

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bluetooth Settings

Controls the settings for connecting the camera to a smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander via a Bluetooth

connection.

If you want to pair the camera and smartphone in order to use the location information link function, refer to “Location

Info. Link Set..”

If you want to perform pairing in order to use a Bluetooth remote commander, refer to “Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl.”

Menu item details

Bluetooth Function (On/Off):

Sets whether to activate or not the Bluetooth function of the camera.

Pairing:

Displays the screen for pairing the camera and smartphone or Bluetooth remote commander.

Disp Device Address:

Displays the BD address of the camera.

Related Topic

Location Info. Link Set.

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → desired setting.

581

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Location Info. Link Set.

You can use the application Imaging Edge Mobile to obtain location information from a smartphone that is connected

with your camera using Bluetooth communication. You can record the obtained location information when shooting

images.

Preparation in advance

To use the location information linking function of the camera, the application Imaging Edge Mobile is required.

If “

Location Information Linkage” is not displayed on the top page of Imaging Edge Mobile, you need to perform the

following steps beforehand.

Operating procedure

: Operations performed on the smartphone

: Operations performed on the camera

Install Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone.

You can install Imaging Edge Mobile from the application store of your smartphone. If you have already installed

the application, update it to the latest version.

Transfer a pre-recorded image to your smartphone using the [Send to Smartphone] function of the camera.

After you transfer an image recorded using the camera to your smartphone, “Location Information Linkage” will

appear on the top page of the application.

: Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Do not perform the Bluetooth pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen. In steps 2 to 7, the pairing

operation is performed using the camera and the application Imaging Edge Mobile.

If you accidentally perform the pairing operation on the smartphone setting screen in step 1, cancel the pairing

and then perform the pairing operation by following Steps 2 through 7 using the camera and the application

Imaging Edge Mobile.

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On].2.

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing].3.

: Launch Imaging Edge Mobile on your smartphone and tap “Location Information Linkage.”

If “Location Information Linkage” is not displayed, follow the steps in “Preparation in advance” above.

: Activate [Location Information Linkage] on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge

Mobile.

: Follow the instructions on the [Location Information Linkage] setting screen of Imaging Edge Mobile, and then

select your camera from the list.

: Select [OK] when a message is displayed on the monitor of the camera.

Pairing of the camera and Imaging Edge Mobile is complete.

582

Menu item details

Location Info. Link:

Sets whether to obtain the location information by linking with a smartphone.

Auto Time Correct.:

Sets whether to automatically correct the date setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Auto Area Adjust.:

Sets whether to automatically correct the area setting of the camera using information from a linked smartphone.

Icons displayed when obtaining the location information

(Obtaining location information): The camera is obtaining the location information.

(Location information cannot be obtained): The camera cannot obtain the location information.

(Bluetooth connection available): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is established.

(Bluetooth connection unavailable): Bluetooth connection with the smartphone is not established.

Hint

Location information can be linked when Imaging Edge Mobile is running on your smartphone even if the smartphone monitor is

off. However, if the camera has been turned off for a while, location information may not be linked immediately when you turn the

camera back on. In this case, location information will be linked immediately if you open the Imaging Edge Mobile screen on the

smartphone.

When Imaging Edge Mobile is not operating, such as when the smartphone is restarted, launch Imaging Edge Mobile to resume

location information linking.

If the location information linking function does not work properly, see the following notes and perform pairing again.

Confirm that the Bluetooth function of your smartphone is activated.

Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.

Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

Delete the pairing information for the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile.

Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

For more detailed instructions, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iem/btg/

Note

When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To perform pairing again, delete the pairing information for

the camera registered in Imaging Edge Mobile before trying again.

The location information will not be recorded when it cannot be obtained, such as when the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.

The camera can be paired with up to 15 Bluetooth devices, but can link the location information with that of only one smartphone.

If you want to link the location information with that of another smartphone, turn off the [Location Information Linkage] function of

the smartphone that is already linked.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the

paired smartphone.

When pairing the camera and your smartphone, be sure to use the [Location Information Linkage] menu on Imaging Edge Mobile.

To use the location information linkage function, set [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [Off].

The communication distance for Bluetooth or Wi-Fi may vary depending on the conditions of use.

Supported smartphones

Refer to the support page for the latest information.

https://www.sony.net/iem/

: On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [ Location Info. Link Set.] → [Location Info. Link] → [On].

(obtaining location information icon) will be displayed on the monitor of the camera. Location information

obtained by your smartphone using GPS, etc., will be recorded when shooting images.

583

For details on Bluetooth versions compatible with your smartphone, check the product website for your smartphone.

Related Topic

Imaging Edge Mobile

Send to Smartphone Func.: Send to Smartphone

Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

584

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl

You can operate the camera using a Bluetooth remote commander RMT-P1BT (sold separately). Select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Bluetooth Function] → [On] in advance. Refer to the instruction manual for the

Bluetooth remote commander as well.

Menu item details

On:

Enables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Off:

Disables Bluetooth remote commander operation.

Hint

The Bluetooth connection is only active while you are operating the camera using the Bluetooth remote commander.

If the function does not work properly, check the following notes and then try pairing again.

Confirm that the camera is not connected with other devices using the Bluetooth function.

Confirm that [Airplane Mode] for the camera is set to [Off].

Execute [Reset Network Set.] of the camera.

Note

When you initialize the camera, the pairing information is also deleted. To use the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing

again.

If the Bluetooth connection is unstable, remove any obstacles, such as people or metal objects from between the camera and the

paired Bluetooth remote commander.

You cannot use the function for linking location information with a smartphone while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

You cannot use an infrared remote commander while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

While [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On], the camera will not switch to the power-saving mode. Change the setting to [Off] when

you are done using the Bluetooth remote commander.

On the camera, select MENU → (Network) → [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] → [On].

If there is no Bluetooth device currently paired with the camera, the screen for pairing as described in Step 2 will

appear.

On the camera, select MENU →

(Network) → [Bluetooth Settings] → [Pairing] to display the screen for

pairing.

On the Bluetooth remote commander, perform pairing.

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Bluetooth remote commander.

On the camera, select [OK] on the confirmation screen for the Bluetooth connection.

Pairing is complete, and you can now operate the camera from the Bluetooth remote commander. After pairing

the device once, you can connect the camera and the Bluetooth remote commander again in the future by

setting [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] to [On].

585

Related Topic

Bluetooth Settings

586

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Wired LAN Setting

Configures a wired LAN.

Menu item details

IP Address Setting:

Sets whether to configure the IP address for the wired LAN automatically or manually.

Display Wired LAN Info.:

Displays wired LAN information for this product such as the MAC address or IP address.

IP Address:

If you are entering the IP address manually, enter the fixed address.

Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Primary DNS Server/Second DNS Server:

If you have set [IP Address Setting] to [Manual], enter each address according to your network environment.

Related Topic

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Network) → [Wired LAN Setting] → desired setting.

587

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Edit Device Name

You can change the device name for Wi-Fi Direct, [PC Remote], or Bluetooth connections.

Related Topic

Wi-Fi Settings: WPS Push

Wi-Fi Settings: Access Point Set.

Operating the camera from a computer (PC Remote Function)

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Network) → [Edit Device Name].

Select the input box, then input the device name→[OK].

588

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Importing root certification to the camera (Import Root Certificate)

Imports a root certificate needed to verify a server from a memory card. Use this function for encrypted communications

during FTP transfer.

For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

MENU →

(Network) → [Import Root Certificate].

589

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Security(IPsec)

Encrypts data when the camera and a computer communicate via a wired LAN or Wi-Fi connection.

Menu item details

IPsec ([On]/[Off]):

Sets whether or not the [Security(IPsec)] function is used.

Dest. IP Address:

Sets the IP address of the device to connect using the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Shared Key:

Sets the shared key used by the [Security(IPsec)] function.

Note

Use at least eight and no more than 20 alphanumeric characters or symbols for [Shared Key].

For IPsec communications, the device to connect must be compatible with IPsec.

Depending on the device, communications may not be possible or the communication speed may be slow.

On this camera, IPsec operates in transport mode only and uses IKEv2.

The algorithms are AES with 128-bit keys in CBC mode/Diffie-Hellman 3072-bit modp group/PRF-HMAC-SHA-256/HMAC-SHA-

384-192.

The authentication expires after 24 hours.

Encrypted communications can only be made with devices that are configured correctly. Communications with other devices are

not encrypted.

For details on the IPsec configuration, consult the administrator of the network for your device.

MENU →

(Network) → [Security(IPsec)] → desired setting.

590

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Reset Network Set.

Resets all the network settings to default settings.

MENU →

(Network) → [Reset Network Set.] → [Enter].

591

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Protecting images (Protect)

Protects recorded images against accidental erasure. The

mark is displayed on protected images.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Applies the protection of the selected multiple images.

(1) Select the image to be protected, then press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check

box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the

mark.

(2) To protect other images, repeat step (1).

(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Protects all images in the selected folder.

All with this date:

Protects all images taken on the selected date.

Cancel All in this Folder:

Cancels the protection of all images in the selected folder.

Cancel All with this date:

Cancels the protection of all images taken on the selected date.

All Images in This Group:

Protects all the images in the selected group.

Cancel All in This Group:

Cancels the protection of all the images in the selected group.

Hint

If you assign [Protect] to the key of your choice using MENU →

(Camera Settings2) → [ Custom Key], you can protect

images or cancel protection by simply pressing the key. The [Protect] function is assigned to the C3 button in the default settings.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be protected. To select and protect particular images within

the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Protect] → desired setting.

592

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rotating an image (Rotate)

Rotates a recorded image counter-clockwise.

Note

Even if you rotate a movie file, it will be played back horizontally on the monitor or viewfinder of the camera.

You may not be able to rotate images shot using other products.

When viewing rotated images on a computer, the images may be displayed in their original orientation depending on the

software.

Display the image to be rotated, then select MENU →

(Playback) → [Rotate].

Press the center of the control wheel.

The image is rotated counter-clockwise. The image rotates as you press the center.

If you rotate the image once, the image remains rotated even after the product is turned off.

593

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Deleting multiple selected images (Delete)

You can delete multiple selected images. Once you have deleted an image, you cannot restore it. Confirm the image to

be deleted beforehand.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Deletes the selected images.

(1) Select the images to be deleted, then press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check

box. To cancel the selection, press the center again to remove the

mark.

(2) To delete other images, repeat step (1).

(3) MENU → [OK].

All in this Folder:

Deletes all images in the selected folder.

All with this date:

Deletes all images taken on the selected date.

All Other Than This Img.:

Deletes all images in the group except the selection.

All Images in This Group:

Deletes all images in the selected group.

Hint

Perform [Format] to delete all images, including protected images.

To display the desired folder or date, select the desired folder or date during playback by performing the following procedure:

(Image Index) button → select the bar on the left using the control wheel → select the desired folder or date using the

top/bottom sides of the control wheel.

If you select a group in [Multiple Img.], all the images in the group will be deleted. To select and delete particular images within

the group, execute [Multiple Img.] while displaying the images within the group.

Note

The protected images cannot be deleted.

The menu items that can be selected vary according to the [View Mode] setting and the selected content.

Related Topic

Deleting a displayed image

Format

MENU →

(Playback) → [Delete] → desired setting.

594

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rating

You can assign ratings to recorded images on a scale from

to to make it easier to find images. Combining this

function with [Image Jump Setting] allows you to find a desired image quickly.

Hint

You can also assign ratings when playing back images by using the custom key. Assign [Rating] to the desired key using [

Custom Key] beforehand, and then press the custom key while playing back an image to which you want to assign a rating. The

number of

(Rating) changes each time you press the custom key.

Note

You can assign ratings to still images only.

Related Topic

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Rating].

The image rating selection screen will appear.

Press the left/right sides of the control wheel to display an image to which you want to assign a rating, and

then press the center.

Select the number of

(Rating) by pressing the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center.

Press the MENU button to exit the rating setting screen.

595

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rating Set(Custom Key)

Sets the available number of

when rating images with the key to which you have assigned [Rating] using [

Custom Key].

Related Topic

Rating

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Rating Set(Custom Key)].

Add a

mark to the number of that you want to activate.

You can select the checked number when setting [Rating] using the custom key.

596

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Specifying images to be printed (Specify Printing)

You can specify in advance on the memory card which still images you want to print out later. The

(print order)

icon will appear on the specified images. DPOF refers to “Digital Print Order Format.”

DPOF setting will be retained after the image is printed. We recommend that you cancel this setting after printing.

Menu item details

Multiple Img.:

Selects images to order printing.

(1) Select an image and press the center of the control wheel. The

mark is displayed in the check box. To cancel

the selection, press the center again and delete the

mark.

(2) Repeat step (1) to print other images. To select all the images from a certain date or in a certain folder, select the

check box for the date or folder.

(3) MENU → [OK].

Cancel All:

Clears all DPOF marks.

Print Setting:

Sets whether to print the date on images registered with DPOF marks.

The position or size of the date (inside or outside of the image) may differ depending on the printer.

Note

You cannot add the DPOF mark to the following files:

RAW images

The number of copies cannot be specified.

Some printers do not support the date print function.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Specify Printing] → desired setting.

597

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

You can record shooting conditions or image descriptions with your voice, and attach the audio files to images as voice

memos.

Voice memos can be transferred to a computer together with images, and played back on the computer.

To play back voice memos

To delete voice memos

Hint

If you assign [Voice Memo hold] to a custom key using [

Custom Key], a voice memo will be recorded while the key is

pressed. If you assign [Voice Memo toggle] to a custom key, voice memo recording will start when you press the key, and stop

when you press the key again. During voice memo playback, playback will start when the key is pressed, and stop when it is

pressed again.

You can still record a voice memo for a protected still image.

Note

You cannot attach a voice memo to a movie.

One voice memo file of up to 60 seconds in duration can be attached per still image.

You cannot add another voice memo to a still image to which a voice memo has already been attached, or overwrite the content

of a voice memo that has already been attached. First delete the attached voice memo, and then record a new voice memo.

You cannot change the microphone input level for recording.

The built-in microphone is used for voice memo recording. You cannot use an external audio input device.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo]

The image selection screen will appear.

Select a still image to which you want to attach a voice memo.

While holding down the center of the control wheel, record your voice.

A voice memo file (.WAV) with the same file name as the still image will be saved in the folder where the

corresponding still image is saved.

Recording continues while the center of the control wheel is pressed. The recording stops when the button is

released.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo].1.

Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to play back is attached.

is displayed on still images having attached voice memos.

Press the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo].1.

Select a still image to which a voice memo you want to delete is attached.2.

Press the bottom of the control wheel, and then select [OK].3.

598

Related Topic

Voice Memo PB Volume

Assigning frequently used functions to buttons (Custom Key)

599

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Voice Memo PB Volume

Adjusts the playback volume for voice memos.

Hint

While playing back a voice memo, you can display the volume control screen by pressing the bottom of the control wheel.

Related Topic

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo PB Volume]

Adjust the volume by pressing the left/right side of the control wheel.

600

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Copying images from one memory card to another (Copy)

You can copy images from a memory card in a slot that is selected using [Select Playback Media] to a memory card in

another slot.

Hint

You can select the type of images to be displayed by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [View Mode].

Note

If images in a group are copied, the copied images will not be displayed as a group on the destination memory card.

If protected images are copied, the protection will be canceled on the destination memory card.

It may take a long time when many images are to be copied. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

XAVC S movies can only be copied to a memory card that supports XAVC S movies. A message will be displayed on the monitor

of the camera when images cannot be copied.

Related Topic

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Copy].

All of the contents with a date or in a folder currently being played back will be copied to a memory card in another

slot.

601

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Photo Capture

Captures a chosen scene in a movie to save as a still image. First shoot a movie, then pause the movie during playback

to capture decisive moments that tend to be missed when shooting still images, and save them as still images.

Related Topic

Shooting movies

Playing back movies

Display the movie that you want to capture as a still image.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Photo Capture].

Play back the movie and pause it.

Find the desired scene using forward slow playback, reverse slow playback, displays the next frame, and

displays the previous frame, and then stop the movie.

Press

(Photo Capture) to capture the chosen scene.

The scene is saved as a still image.

602

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarges the image being played back. Use this function to check the focus of the image, etc.

Hint

You can also enlarge an image being played back using MENU.

You can change the initial magnification and initial position of enlarged images by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [

Enlarge Initial Mag.] or [ Enlarge Initial Position].

You can also enlarge an image by double-tapping the monitor. In addition, you can drag and move the magnified position on the

monitor. Set [Touch Operation] to [On] beforehand.

Note

You cannot enlarge movies.

Related Topic

Touch Operation

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position

Display the image you want to enlarge, and then press the button.

Turn the control wheel to adjust the zoom scale. By rotating the front/rear dial, you can switch to the previous or

next image while keeping the same zoom scale.

The view will zoom in on the part of the image where the camera focused during shooting. If the focus location

information cannot be obtained, the camera will zoom in on the center of the image.

Select the portion you want to enlarge by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel.

Press the MENU button or the center of the control wheel to exit the playback zoom.

603

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarge Initial Mag.

Sets the initial magnification scale when playing back enlarged images.

Menu item details

Standard. Mag.:

Displays an image with the standard magnification.

Previous Mag.:

Displays an image with the previous magnification. The previous magnification is stored even after exiting the playback

zoom mode.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Position

MENU →

(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Mag.] → desired setting.

604

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Enlarge Initial Position

Sets the initial position when enlarging an image in playback.

Menu item details

Focused Position:

Enlarges the image from the point of focus during shooting.

Center:

Enlarges the image from the center of the screen.

Related Topic

Enlarging an image being played back (Enlarge Image)

Enlarge Initial Mag.

MENU →

(Playback) → [ Enlarge Initial Position] → desired setting.

605

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cont. PB for Interval

Continuously plays back images shot using interval shooting.

You can create movies from still images produced by interval shooting using the computer software Imaging Edge

(Viewer). You cannot create movies from the still images on the camera.

Hint

On the playback screen, you can start continuous playback by pressing the down button while displaying an image in the group.

You can resume play or pause by pressing the down button during playback.

You can change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during playback. You can also change the

playback speed by selecting MENU →

(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval].

You can continuously play back images shot with continuous shooting as well.

Related Topic

Interval Shoot Func.

PB Speed for Interval

Imaging Edge

MENU →

(Playback) → [Cont. PB for Interval].

Select the image group that you want to play back, and then press the center of the control wheel.

606

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

PB Speed for Interval

Sets the playback speed for still images during [Cont. PB for

Interval].

Hint

You can also change the playback speed by turning the front/rear dial or the control wheel during [Cont. PB for

Interval].

Related Topic

Cont. PB for Interval

MENU →

(Playback) → [PB Speed for Interval] → desired setting.

607

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back images using slideshow (Slide Show)

Automatically plays back images continuously.

Menu item details

Repeat:

Select [On], in which images are played back in a continuous loop, or [Off], in which the product exits the slideshow

when all the images are played back once.

Interval:

Select the display interval for images from among [1 Sec], [3 Sec], [5 Sec], [10 Sec] or [30 Sec].

To quit the slideshow in the middle of playback

Press the MENU button to quit the slideshow. You cannot pause the slideshow.

Hint

During playback, you can display the next/previous image by pressing the right/left side of the control wheel.

You can activate a slideshow only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View] or [Folder View(Still)].

MENU →

(Playback) → [Slide Show] → desired setting.

Select [Enter].

608

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

Selects the memory card slot to be played back.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects the slot 2.

Note

No image is played back when no memory card is inserted in the selected slot. Select a slot into which a memory card has been

inserted.

When you select [Date View] in [View Mode], the camera only plays back images from a memory card selected using [Select

Playback Media].

Related Topic

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

MENU →

(Playback) → [Select Playback Media] → desired slot.

609

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Sets the View Mode (image display method).

Menu item details

Date View:

Displays the images by date.

Folder View(Still):

Displays only still images.

AVCHD View:

Displays only AVCHD-format movies.

XAVC S HD View:

Displays only XAVC S HD-format movies.

XAVC S 4K View:

Displays only XAVC S 4K-format movies.

MENU →

(Playback) → [View Mode] → desired setting.

610

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Playing back images on the image index screen (Image Index)

You can display multiple images at the same time in playback mode.

To change the number of images to be displayed

MENU →

(Playback) → [Image Index] → desired setting.

Menu item details

9 Images/25 Images

To return to single-image playback

Select the desired image and press the center of the control wheel.

To display a desired image quickly

Select the bar on the left of the image index screen using the control wheel, then press the top/bottom sides of the

control wheel. While the bar is being selected, you can display the calendar screen or folder selection screen by pressing

the center. In addition, you can switch View Mode by selecting an icon.

Related Topic

Switching between still images and movies (View Mode)

Press the

(Image Index) button while the image is being played back.

Select the image by pressing the top/bottom/right/left sides of the control wheel or turning the control

wheel.

611

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display as Group

Sets whether or not to display continuously shot images or images shot using interval shooting as a group.

Menu item details

On:

Displays images as a group.

Off:

Does not display images as a group.

Hint

The following images are grouped.

Images shot with [Drive Mode] set to [Cont. Shooting] (One sequence of images shot continuously by holding down the shutter

button during continuous shooting becomes one group.)

Images shot with [

Interval Shoot Func.] (Images shot during one session of interval shooting become one group.)

On the image index screen,

is displayed over the group.

Note

Images can be grouped and displayed only when [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. When it is not set to [Date View], images

cannot be grouped and displayed, even if [Display as Group] is set to [On].

If you delete the group, all the images in the group will be deleted. Any voice memos attached to images in the group will also be

deleted.

Related Topic

Cont. Shooting

Interval Shoot Func.

MENU →

(Playback) → [Display as Group] → desired setting.

612

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rotating recorded images automatically (Display Rotation)

Selects the orientation when playing back recorded images.

Menu item details

Auto:

When you rotate the camera, the displayed image rotates automatically by detecting the orientation of the camera.

Manual:

Images shot vertically are displayed vertically. If you have set the image orientation using the [Rotate] function, the image

will be displayed accordingly.

Off:

Images are always displayed horizontally.

Note

Movies shot vertically are played back horizontally on the screen or the finder of the camera during movie playback.

Related Topic

Rotating an image (Rotate)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Display Rotation] → desired setting.

613

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Setting the method for jumping between images (Image Jump Setting)

Sets which dial and method to use for jumping between images during playback. This function is useful when you want

to find one of many recorded images. You can also quickly find protected images or images set with a particular rating.

Menu item details

Select Dial:

Selects the dial to use for jumping between images.

Image Jump Method:

Sets the method for playing back with Image Jump.

Note

A group is counted as one image when [Image Jump Method] is set to [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images].

When [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images], or [By 100 images], Image Jump will

only be available if [View Mode] is set to [Date View]. If [View Mode] is not set to [Date View], the camera will always play back

every image without jumping when you use the dial selected with [Select Dial].

When you use the Image Jump function and [Image Jump Method] is set to a parameter other than [One by one], [By 10 images],

or [By 100 images], movie files are always skipped.

Related Topic

Rating

Protecting images (Protect)

MENU →

(Playback) → [Image Jump Setting] → desired item.

614

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Monitor Brightness

Adjust the brightness of the screen.

Menu item details

Manual:

Adjusts the brightness within the range of –2 to +2.

Sunny Weather:

Sets the brightness appropriately for shooting outdoors.

Note

The [Sunny Weather] setting is too bright for shooting indoors. Set [Monitor Brightness] to [Manual] for indoor shooting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Monitor Brightness] → desired setting.

615

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Viewfinder Bright.

When using the viewfinder, this product adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder according to the surrounding

environment.

Menu item details

Auto:

Adjusts the brightness automatically.

Manual:

Selects the brightness of the viewfinder within the range of –2 to +2.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Viewfinder Bright.] → desired setting.

616

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Finder Color Temp.

Adjusts the color temperature of the electronic viewfinder.

Menu item details

-2 to +2:

When you select “-,” the viewfinder screen changes to a warmer color, and when you select “+,” it changes to a colder

color.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Finder Color Temp.] → desired setting.

617

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Volume Settings

Sets the sound volume for movie playback.

Adjusting the volume during playback

Press the bottom side of the control wheel while playing back movies to display the operation panel, then adjust the

volume. You can adjust the volume while listening to the actual sound.

Note

To change the sound volume of [Voice Memo], use MENU →

(Playback) → [Voice Memo PB Volume].

Related Topic

Attaching audio files to images (Voice Memo)

Voice Memo PB Volume

MENU →

(Setup) → [Volume Settings] → desired setting.

618

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete confirm.

You can set whether [Delete] or [Cancel] is selected as a default on the delete confirmation screen.

Menu item details

"Delete" first:

[Delete] is selected as the default setting.

"Cancel" first:

[Cancel] is selected as the default setting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Delete confirm.] → desired setting.

619

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Power Save Start Time

Sets time intervals to automatically switch to power save mode when you are not performing operations to prevent

wearing down the battery pack. To return to shooting mode, perform an operation such as pressing the shutter button

halfway down.

Menu item details

30 Min/5 Min/2 Min/1 Min/10 Sec

Note

Turn off the product when you do not use it for a long time.

The power save function is deactivated in the following situations:

While power is being supplied via USB

While playing back slideshows

During FTP transfer

While recording movies

While connected to a computer or TV

While [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On]

When [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On]

MENU →

(Setup) → [Power Save Start Time] → desired setting.

620

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Auto Power OFF Temp.

Sets the temperature of the camera at which the camera turns off automatically during shooting. When it is set to [High],

you can continue shooting even when the temperature of the camera gets hotter than normal.

Menu item details

Standard:

Sets the standard temperature for the camera to turn off.

High:

Sets the temperature at which the camera turns off to higher than [Standard].

Notes when [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High]

Do not shoot while holding the camera in your hand. Use a tripod.

Using the camera while holding it in your hand for a long period of time may cause low-temperature burns.

Note

Even if [Auto Power OFF Temp.] is set to [High], depending on the conditions or the temperature of the camera, the recordable

time for movies may not change.

Related Topic

Recordable movie times

MENU →

(Setup) → [Auto Power OFF Temp.] → desired setting.

621

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

NTSC/PAL Selector

Plays back movies recorded with the product on a NTSC/PAL system TV.

Note

If you insert a memory card that has previously been formatted with a different video system, a message telling you that you must

reformat the card will appear.

If you want to record using another system, re-format the memory card or use another memory card.

When you perform [NTSC/PAL Selector], and the setting is changed from the default one, a message "Running on NTSC." or

"Running on PAL." will appear on the start-up screen.

When [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL, the viewfinder or monitor of the camera or the screen of an HDMI-connected device

may black out for an instant in the following situations. This is not a malfunction.

When you start or stop recording movies while the shooting mode is set to a mode other than

(Movie) or .

When you change the shooting mode from

(Movie) or to another mode.

When you play back a movie for the first time after switching to the playback mode.

MENU →

(Setup) → [NTSC/PAL Selector] → [Enter]

622

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to

an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,

follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

Hint

For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the

following URL.

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note

Clean the image sensor quickly.

A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower.

Make sure that the remaining battery level is

(3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image

sensor.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

Detach the lens.

Use the blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

Attach the lens.

623

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product

may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

Related Topic

Troubleshooting

624

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Operation

Sets whether or not to activate touch operations on the monitor.

Menu item details

On:

Activates the touch operation.

Off:

Deactivates the touch operation.

Related Topic

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Focus

Func. of Touch Operation: Touch Tracking

Touch Pad Settings

Touch Panel/Pad

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Operation] → desired setting.

625

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Panel/Pad

Touch operations when shooting with the monitor are referred to as "touch panel operations," and touch operations when

shooting with the viewfinder are referred to as "touch pad operations." You can select whether to activate touch panel

operations or touch pad operations.

Menu item details

Touch Panel+Pad:

Activates both the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor and touch pad operations when shooting with

the viewfinder.

Touch Panel Only:

Activates only the touch panel operations when shooting with the monitor.

Touch Pad Only:

Activates only the touch pad operations when shooting with the viewfinder.

Related Topic

Touch Operation

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Panel/Pad] → desired setting.

626

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Touch Pad Settings

You can adjust settings related to touch pad operations during viewfinder shooting.

Menu item details

Operation in Vertical Orientation :

Sets whether to enable touch pad operations during vertically oriented viewfinder shooting. You can prevent erroneous

operations during vertically oriented shooting caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

Touch Position Mode:

Sets whether to move the focusing frame to the position touched on the screen ([Absolute Position]), or move the

focusing frame to the desired position based on the direction of dragging and the amount of movement ([Relative

Position]).

Operation Area:

Sets the area to be used for touch pad operations. Restricting the operational area can prevent erroneous operations

caused by your nose, etc. touching the monitor.

About Touch Positioning Mode

Selecting [Absolute Position] lets you move the focusing frame to a distant position more quickly because you can

directly specify the position of the focusing frame with touch operations.

Selecting [Relative Position] lets you operate the touch pad from wherever is easiest, without having to move your finger

over a wide area.

Hint

In touch pad operations when [Touch Position Mode] is set to [Absolute Position], the area set in [Operation Area] is treated as

the entire screen.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Touch Pad Settings] → desired setting.

627

Related Topic

Touch Operation

628

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Demo Mode

The [Demo Mode] function displays the movies recorded on the memory card automatically (demonstration), when the

camera has not been operated for a certain time. Normally select [Off].

Menu item details

On:

The movie playback demonstration starts automatically if the product is not operated for about one minute. Only

protected AVCHD movies can be played back.

Set the view mode to [AVCHD View], and protect the movie file with the oldest recorded date and time.

Off:

Does not show the demonstration.

Note

You can activate this function only when the product is connected using a dedicated AC Adaptor.

When there is no protected AVCHD movies on the memory card, you cannot select [On].

[Demo Mode] always displays movies on the memory card in memory card slot 1.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Demo Mode] → desired setting.

629

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

TC/UB Settings

The time code (TC) and the user bit (UB) information can be recorded as data attached to movies.

Menu item details

TC/UB Disp. Setting:

Sets the display for the counter, time code, and user bit.

TC Preset:

Sets the time code.

UB Preset:

Sets the user bit.

TC Format:

Sets the recording method for the time code. (Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.)

TC Run:

Sets the count up format for the time code.

TC Make:

Sets the recording format for the time code on the recording medium.

UB Time Rec:

Sets whether or not to record the time as a user bit.

How to set the time code (TC Preset)

How to reset the time code

You can also reset the time code (00:00:00:00) using the RMT-VP1K remote commander (sold separately).

How to set the user bit (UB Preset)

How to reset the user bit

How to select the recording method for the time code (TC Format

)

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → setting value you want to change.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.

Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.

The time code can be set between the following range.

When [60i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29

When [24p] is selected, you can select the last two digits of the time code in multiples of four from 0 to 23 frames.

When [50i] is selected: 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24

Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Preset].1.

Press the

(Delete) button to reset the time code (00:00:00:00).2.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.

Turn the control wheel and select the first two digits.2.

Set the other digits following the same procedure as in step 2, then press in the center of the control wheel.3.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [UB Preset].1.

Press the

(Delete) button to reset the user bit (00 00 00 00).2.

630

DF:

Records the time code in Drop Frame

format.

NDF:

Records the time code in Non-Drop Frame format.

The setting is fixed to [NDF] when recording in 4K/24p or 1080/24p.

How to select the count up format for the time code (TC Run)

Rec Run:

Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance only while recording. The time code is recorded sequentially from

the last time code of the previous recording.

Free Run:

Sets the stepping mode for the time code to advance anytime, regardless of the camera operation.

The time code may not be recorded sequentially in the following situations even when the time code advances in

[Rec Run] mode.

When the recording format is changed.

When the recording medium is removed.

How to select how the time code is recorded (TC Make)

Preset:

Records the newly set time code on the recording medium.

Regenerate:

Reads the last time code for the previous recording from the recording medium and records the new time code

consecutively from the last time code. The time code is read from the memory card in the slot 1 when [Recording Mode]

under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to [Simult. (

)] or [Simult. ( / )]. The time code is read from the memory card

to which the movies will be recorded when [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], [Simult. (

)], [Sort(RAW/JPEG)],

[Sort(JPEG/RAW)] or [Sort(

/ )]. The time code advances in [Rec Run] mode regardless of the [TC Run] setting.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Format].1.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

The time code is based on 30 frames per second. However, a gap between the actual time and the time code will occur during extended periods

of recording as the frame frequency of the NTSC image signal is approximately 29.97 frames per second. Drop frame corrects this gap to make

the time code and actual time equal. In drop frame, the first 2 frame numbers are removed every minute except for every tenth minute. The time

code without this correction is called non-drop frame.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Run].1.

MENU →

(Setup) → [TC/UB Settings] → [TC Make].1.

631

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

IR Remote Ctrl

You can operate this product and shoot images using the SHUTTER button, 2SEC button (2 second delay shutter), and

START/STOP button (or Movie button (RMT-DSLR2 only)) on the Wireless Remote Commander RMT-DSLR1 (sold

separately) and RMT-DSLR2 (sold separately). Refer also to the operating instructions for the Infrared Remote

Commander.

Menu item details

On:

Allows infrared remote commander operation.

Off:

Does not allow infrared remote commander operation.

Note

The lens or lens hood may block the infrared remote sensor that receive the signals. Use the infrared remote commander in the

position from which the signal can reach the product.

When [IR Remote Ctrl] is set to [On], the product does not switch to power save mode. Set [Off] after using an infrared remote

commander.

An infrared remote commander cannot be used while [Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl] is set to [On].

MENU →

(Setup) → [IR Remote Ctrl] → desired setting.

632

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: HDMI Resolution

When you connect the product to a High Definition (HD) TV with HDMI terminals using an HDMI cable (sold separately),

you can select HDMI Resolution to output images to the TV.

Menu item details

Auto:

The product automatically recognizes an HD TV and sets the output resolution.

2160p/1080p:

Outputs signals in 2160p/1080p.

1080p:

Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080p).

1080i:

Outputs signals in HD picture quality (1080i).

Note

If the images are not displayed properly using the [Auto] setting, select either [1080i], [1080p] or [2160p/1080p], based on which

TV is to be connected.

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → desired setting.

633

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: 24p/60p Output (movie) (Only for 1080 60i compatible models)

You can set 1080/24p or 1080/60p as the HDMI output format when [

Record Setting] is set to [24p 50M], [24p 60M]

or [24p 100M].

Menu item details

60p:

Movies are output as 60p.

24p:

Movies are output as 24p.

Note

Steps 1 and 2 can be set in either order.

Related Topic

Record Setting (movie)

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Resolution] → [1080p] or [2160p/1080p].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ 24p/60p Output] → desired setting.

634

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Selects whether to display the shooting information when this product and the TV are connected using an HDMI cable

(sold separately).

Menu item details

On:

Displays the shooting information on the TV.

The recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on the TV, while nothing is displayed on the camera’s

monitor.

Off:

Does not display the shooting information on the TV.

Only the recorded image is displayed on the TV, while the recorded image and the shooting information are displayed on

the camera’s monitor.

Note

When the camera is connected to an HDMI device while [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K], the setting switches to [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [HDMI Info. Display] → desired setting.

635

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: TC Output (movie)

Sets whether or not to layer the TC (time code) information on the output signal via the HDMI terminal when outputting

the signal to other professional-use devices.

This function layers the time code information on the HDMI output signal. The product sends the time code information

as digital data, not as an image displayed on the screen. The connected device can then refer to the digital data to

recognize the time data.

Menu item details

On:

Time code is output to other devices.

Off:

Time code is not output to other devices.

Note

When [

TC Output] is set to [On], the image may not be output properly to the TV or recording device. In such cases, set [

TC Output] to [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ TC Output] → desired setting.

636

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

If you connect the camera to an external recorder/player, you can remotely command the recorder/player to start/stop

recording using the camera.

Menu item details

On:

The camera can send a recording command to an external recorder/player.

The camera is sending a recording command to an external recorder/player.

Off:

The camera is not able to send a command to an external recorder/player to start/stop recording.

Note

Available for external recorders/players compatible with [

REC Control].

When you use the [

REC Control] function, set the shooting mode to (Movie).

When [

TC Output] is set to [Off], you cannot use the [ REC Control] function.

Even when

is displayed, the external recorder/player may not work properly depending on the settings or status of the

recorder/player. Check if the external recorder/player works properly before use.

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [ REC Control] → desired setting.

637

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

HDMI Settings: CTRL FOR HDMI

When connecting this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV using an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can

operate this product by aiming the TV remote control at the TV.

Menu item details

On:

You can operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Off:

You cannot operate this product with a TV’s remote control.

Note

If you connect this product to a TV using an HDMI cable, available menu items are limited.

[CTRL FOR HDMI] is available only with a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV. Also, the SYNC MENU operation differs depending on

the TV you are using. For details, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV.

If the product performs unwanted operations in response to the TV remote control when the product is connected to another

manufacturer’s TV using an HDMI connection, select MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → [Off].

MENU →

(Setup) → [HDMI Settings] → [CTRL FOR HDMI] → desired setting.

Connect this product to a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV.

The input of the TV is switched automatically and images on this product are displayed on the TV screen.

Press the SYNC MENU button of the TV’s remote control.

Operate this product using the TV’s remote control.

638

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

4K Output Select (movie)

You can set how to record movies and perform HDMI output when your camera is connected to 4K-compatible external

recording/playback devices, etc.

Menu item details

Memory Card+HDMI:

Simultaneously outputs to the external recording/playback device and records on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(30p):

Outputs a 4K movie in 30p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(24p):

Outputs a 4K movie in 24p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

HDMI Only(25p)

Outputs a 4K movie in 25p to the external recording/playback device without recording on the camera’s memory card.

Note

This item can be set only when the camera is in movie mode and connected to a 4K-compatible device.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, [HDMI Info. Display] will temporarily be set to [Off].

A 4K movie is not output to the connected 4K-compatible device during slow-motion/quick-motion shooting.

When [HDMI Only(30p)], [HDMI Only(24p)] or [HDMI Only(25p)] is set, the counter does not move forward (the actual recording

time is not counted) while the movie is being recorded on an external recording/playback device.

When shooting 4K movies using the setting [Memory Card+HDMI], the movies will not be output to a device connected by HDMI

cable if you simultaneously record a proxy movie. If you want to perform HDMI output, set [

Proxy Recording] to [Off]. (In this

case, if you set [

Record Setting] to other values except [24p], the image will not be displayed on the screen of the camera).

When [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and the camera is connected via HDMI, the following functions are partially

restricted.

[Face/Eye Priority in AF]

[Face Priority in Multi Metering]

Tracking function

Related Topic

HDMI Settings: REC Control (movie)

File Format (movie)

Record Setting (movie)

HDMI Settings: HDMI Info. Display

Turn the mode dial to

(movie).

Connect the camera to the desired device via an HDMI cable.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ 4K Output Select] → desired setting.

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to PAL.

639

640

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB Connection

Selects the USB connection method when this product is connected to a computer, etc.

Select MENU →

(Network) → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Ctrl w/ Smartphone] → [Off] beforehand.

Also, when you set MENU →

(Network) → [PC Remote Function] → [PC Remote Cnct Method] to [USB], set [PC

Remote] under [PC Remote Function] to [Off].

Menu item details

Auto:

Establishes a Mass Storage or MTP connection automatically, depending on the computer or other USB devices to be

connected. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are

enabled for use.

Mass Storage:

Establishes a Mass Storage connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices.

MTP:

Establishes an MTP connection between this product, a computer, and other USB devices. Windows 7, Windows 8.1, or

Windows 10 computers are connected in MTP, and their unique functions are enabled for use.

The memory card in memory card slot 1 is the connection target.

Note

It may take some time to make the connection between this product and a computer when [USB Connection] is set to [Auto].

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB Connection] → desired setting.

641

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB LUN Setting

Enhances compatibility by limiting of USB connection functions.

Menu item details

Multi:

Normally, use [Multi].

Single:

Set [USB LUN Setting] to [Single] only if you cannot make a connection.

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB LUN Setting] → desired setting.

642

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

USB Power Supply

Sets whether to supply power via the USB cable when the product is connected to a computer or an USB device.

Menu item details

On:

Power is supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Off:

Power is not supplied to the product via a USB cable when the product is connected to a computer, etc.

Operations available while supplying power via a USB cable

The following table shows you which operations are available/unavailable while supplying power via a USB cable.

A checkmark indicates that the operation is available, and “―” indicates that the operation is unavailable.

Note

Insert the battery pack into the product to supply power via USB cable.

MENU →

(Setup) → [USB Power Supply] → desired setting.

Operation Available / Unavailable

Shooting images

Playing back images

Wi-Fi/NFC/Bluetooth connections

Charging a battery pack ―

Turning the camera on without a battery pack inserted ―

643

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Language

Selects the language to be used in the menu items, warnings and messages.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ Language] → desired language.

644

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Date/Time Setup

The Clock Set screen is displayed automatically when you turn on this product for the first time or when the internal

rechargeable backup battery has fully discharged. Select this menu when setting the date and time after the first time.

Menu item details

Daylight Savings:

Selects Daylight Savings [On]/[Off].

Date/Time:

Sets the date and time.

Date Format:

Selects the date and time display format.

Hint

To charge the internal rechargeable backup battery, insert a charged battery pack, and leave the product for 24 hours or more

with the power off.

If the clock resets every time the battery is charged, the internal rechargeable backup battery may be worn out. Consult your

service facility.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Date/Time Setup] → desired setting.

645

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Area Setting

Sets the area where you are using the product.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Area Setting] → desired area.

646

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

IPTC Information

You can write IPTC information* when recording still images. Create and edit IPTC information using the IPTC Metadata

Preset (https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/) and write the information to a memory card beforehand.

Menu item details

Write IPTC Info:

Sets whether to write IPTC information to still images. ([On]/[Off])

If you select [On], the

icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Registers IPTC information from a memory card to the camera. Select [Slot 1] or [Slot 2] as the memory card from which

to read out IPTC information.

Hint

When you play back images that have IPTC information, the

icon appears on the screen.

For details on how to use the IPTC Metadata Preset, refer to the following support page.

https://www.sony.net/iptc/help/

Note

Whenever you register IPTC information, information previously registered to the camera is overwritten.

You cannot edit or check IPTC information on the camera.

To delete IPTC information registered to the camera, reset the camera to the initial settings.

Before lending out or handing over the camera, reset the camera to delete IPTC information.

Related Topic

Setting Reset

IPTC information consists of digital image metadata attributes, as standardized by the International Press Telecommunications Council.

MENU →

(Setup) → [IPTC Information] → desired setting item.

647

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Writes copyright information onto the still images.

Menu item details

Write Copyright Info:

Sets whether to write copyright information. ([On]/[Off])

If you select [On], an

icon will appear on the shooting screen.

Set Photographer:

Sets the photographer name.

Set Copyright:

Sets the copyright holder name.

Disp. Copyright Info:

Displays the current copyright information.

Note

You can only enter alphanumeric characters and symbols for [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright]. You can enter up to 46

letters.

icon appears during the playback of images with copyright information.

In order to prevent unauthorized use of [Copyright Info], be sure to clear the [Set Photographer] and [Set Copyright] columns

before lending out or handing over your camera.

Sony is not liable for problems or damages resulting from use of [Copyright Info].

Related Topic

How to use the keyboard

MENU →

(Setup) → [Copyright Info] → desired setting.

When you select [Set Photographer] or [Set Copyright], a keyboard appears on the screen. Enter your

desired name.

648

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Write Serial Number

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data when shooting still images.

Menu item details

On:

Writes the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

Off:

Does not write the camera's serial number to the Exif data for the image.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Write Serial Number] → desired setting.

649

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Format

When you use a memory card with this camera for the first time, we recommend that you format the card using the

camera for stable performance of the memory card. Note that formatting permanently erases all data on the memory

card, and is unrecoverable. Save valuable data on a computer, etc.

Note

Formatting permanently erases all data including protected images and registered settings (from M1 to M4).

The access lamp lights up during formatting. Do not remove the memory card while the access lamp is lit up.

Format the memory card on this camera. If you format the memory card on the computer, the memory card may not be usable

depending on the format type.

It may take a few minutes to complete formatting, depending on the memory card.

You cannot format the memory card if the remaining battery charge is less than 1%.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Format] → desired memory card slot.

650

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

Selects the memory card slot on which to record. [Slot 1] is the default setting. If you do not intend to change the settings

and will only use one memory card, use the slot 1.

Menu item details

Slot 1:

Selects media in the slot 1.

Slot 2:

Selects media in the slot 2.

Hint

To record the same image on two memory cards at the same time or to sort recorded images onto two memory card slots by the

image type (still image/movie), use [Recording Mode].

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

Selecting which memory card to play back (Select Playback Media)

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Prioritize Rec. Media] → desired slot.

651

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

You can select the method for recording an image, such as recording the same image simultaneously to two memory

cards or recording different types of images to two memory cards.

Menu item details

Standard:

Records an image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Simult. (

Records a still image to both memory cards and records a movie to a memory card in the memory card slot that you

select in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Simult. (

Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a

movie to both memory cards.

Simult. (

/ ):

Records a still image and a movie to both memory cards.

Sort(RAW/JPEG):

Records an image in RAW format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media],

and records an image in JPEG format to the other memory card. Movies are recorded to the memory card in the memory

card slot that you selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Sort(JPEG/RAW):

Records an image in JPEG format to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media],

and records an image in RAW format to the other memory card. Movies are recorded to the memory card in the memory

card slot that you selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

Sort(

/ ):

Records a still image to a memory card in the memory card slot that you select in [Prioritize Rec. Media], and records a

movie to the other memory card.

Hint

Even when [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(RAW/JPEG)] or [Sort(JPEG/RAW)], if [RAW & JPEG] is not selected under [

File

Format], only files of the selected format will be recorded.

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Recording Mode] → desired setting.

652

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Rec. Media Settings: Auto Switch Media

If a memory card in use becomes full or you have forgotten to insert a memory card into a slot, you can record images to

the other memory card.

Menu item details

On:

The camera automatically starts recording on the other memory card when a memory card in use becomes full or if you

have forgotten to insert a memory card.

Off:

The camera does not perform [Auto Switch Media].

How the camera switches the memory card slot in use

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard]:

When images cannot be recorded to the memory card in use, [Prioritize Rec. Media] switches automatically and images

are recorded to the other memory card.

When the other memory card becomes full after switching, the camera starts recording in the former slot again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

: Recording images

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is replaced with a recordable one.

When recording the same image simultaneously to two memory cards:

Recording still images with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

)]

Recording movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

)]

Recording still images or movies with [Recording Mode] set to [Simult. (

/ )]

The camera stops simultaneous recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the

memory card that has become full, the camera starts recording to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts

simultaneous recording with the selected setting again.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Rec. Media Settings] → [Auto Switch Media] → desired setting.

653

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Simult. (

/ )])

: Simultaneous recording is available.

: Recording is disabled.

: The same image cannot be recorded simultaneously.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

Images that are not recorded simultaneously (for example: still images during [Simult. (

)]) continue to be

recorded to the other memory card when the memory card in use becomes full.

When the memory card in use becomes full while recording a movie, the movie continues to be recorded to the other

memory card until the recording in progress is finished.

When recording images separately to two memory cards in the RAW and JPEG formats:

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(RAW/JPEG)] or [Sort(JPEG/RAW)], and [

File Format] is set to [RAW &

JPEG]

The camera stops recording when either of the memory cards becomes full. When you remove the memory card that

has become full, the camera starts recording both in the RAW and JPEG formats to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording

the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Sort(RAW/JPEG)])

: Images are sorted by the file format.

: Recording still images is disabled (movies can be recorded).

: Images cannot be sorted.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

654

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

When the memory card in use becomes full while recording movies, the camera starts recording to the other memory

card.

When recording still images and movies separately to two memory cards:

When [Recording Mode] is set to [Sort(

/ )]

When either of the memory cards becomes full, both still images and movies are recorded to the other memory card.

When you replace the memory card that has become full with a recordable memory card, the camera starts recording

the two types of images separately with the selected setting again.

Example: When [Prioritize Rec. Media] is set to [Slot 1]

([Recording Mode]: [Sort(

/ )])

: Images are sorted by the image type.

: Images cannot be sorted.

(A): Recording is no longer possible on the memory card (due to lack of capacity, etc.).

(B): The memory card is removed.

(C): A recordable memory card is inserted.

Hint

Images are recorded to the memory card in the slot displayed on the monitor with an arrow symbol. After the camera switches the

slot using [Auto Switch Media], replace the memory card in the former slot with a recordable memory card.

If [Recording Mode] is set to [Standard], the setting for [Prioritize Rec. Media] will switch automatically when the slot switches. If

you want to record on the slot in use before switching, select the desired slot again using [Prioritize Rec. Media].

If you want to continually record with the settings selected with [Recording Mode] and [Prioritize Rec. Media], set [Auto Switch

Media] to [Off].

Related Topic

Memory cards that can be used

Recordable movie times

Rec. Media Settings: Prioritize Rec. Media

655

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Select REC Folder

If [Folder Name] under [

File/Folder Settings] is set to [Standard Form] and there are 2 folders or more, you can

select the folder on the memory card to which images are to be recorded.

Note

You cannot select the folder when [Folder Name] under [

File/Folder Settings] is set to [Date Form].

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], you may only select the common folder on the

both memory cards. If there is no common folder, you can make one using [New Folder].

Related Topic

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

MENU→

(Setup)→[Select REC Folder]→desired folder.

656

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

New Folder

Creates a new folder on the memory card for recording still images. A new folder is created with a folder number one

greater than the largest folder number currently used. Images are recorded in the newly created folder.

Note

When you insert a memory card that was used with other equipment into this product and shoot images, a new folder may be

automatically created.

Up to 4,000 images in total can be stored in one folder. When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new folder may be automatically

created.

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard], a new folder is created with a folder number one

greater than the largest folder number currently used on both memory cards inserted in the memory card slots.

If [Recording Mode] under [Rec. Media Settings] is set to other than [Standard] and an image is shot, a new folder may be

automatically created.

Related Topic

Rec. Media Settings: Recording Mode

MENU→

(Setup)→[New Folder].

657

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File/Folder Settings (still image)

Sets file names for still images to be shot, and specifies folders for storing the shot still images.

Menu item details

File Number:

You can set how to assign file numbers to still images.

[Series]: Does not reset file numbers for each folder.

[Reset]: Resets file numbers for each folder.

Set File Name:

You can specify the first three characters of the file name.

Folder Name:

You can set how folder names are assigned.

[Standard Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + MSDCF”.

Example: 100MSDCF

[Date Form]: Folders are named as “folder number + Y (the last digit of the year)/MM/DD”.

Example: 10090405 (Folder number: 100; date: 04/05/2019)

Hint

The settings for [File Number] and [Set File Name] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you

change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.

Note

Only capital letters, numbers, and underscores can be used for [Set File Name]. Underscores cannot be used for the first

character.

The three characters specified using [Set File Name] are only applied to files recorded after the setting is made.

MENU →

(Setup) → [ File/Folder Settings] → desired setting.

658

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

File Settings (movie)

Configure settings for the file names of recorded movies.

Menu item details

File Number:

You can set how to assign file numbers to movies.

[Series]: Does not reset file numbers even if the memory card is changed.

[Reset]: Resets the file number when the memory card is changed.

Series Counter Reset:

Resets the series counter used when [File Number] is set to [Series].

File Name Format:

You can set the format for movie file names.

[Standard]: The file name of the recorded movie starts with “C.” Example: C0001

[Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+File number.”

[Date + Title]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Date+Title+File number.”

[Title + Date]: The file name of the recorded movie becomes “Title+Date+ File number.”

Title Name Settings:

You can set the title when [File Name Format] is set to [Title], [Date + Title], or [Title + Date].

Hint

The settings for [File Number] and [File Name Format] are applied to both Slot 1 and Slot 2.

When [File Number] is set to [Series], file numbers will be assigned sequentially across the memory cards in the slots even if you

change the [Prioritize Rec. Media] setting.

Note

Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be input for [Title Name Settings]. Up to 37 characters can be entered.

Titles specified using [Title Name Settings] are only applied to movies recorded after the setting is made.

[

File Settings] does not apply to AVCHD movies.

You cannot set how folder names are assigned for movies.

If you are using an SDHC memory card, [File Name Format] is locked to [Standard].

If there are unused numbers due to file deletion, etc., these numbers will be reused when the movie file number reaches “9999.”

MENU →

(Setup) → [ File Settings] → desired setting.

659

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recover Image DB

If image files were processed on a computer, problems may occur in the image database file. In such cases, the images

on the memory card will not be played back on this product. If these problems happen, repair the file using [Recover

Image DB].

Note

If the battery pack is extremely depleted, image database files cannot be repaired. Use a sufficiently charged battery pack.

Images recorded on the memory card are not deleted by [Recover Image DB].

MENU →

(Setup) → [Recover Image DB] → desired memory card slot → [Enter].

660

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display Media Info.

Displays the recordable time of movies for the inserted memory card. Also displays the number of recordable still images

for the inserted memory card.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Display Media Info.] → desired memory card slot.

661

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Version

Displays the version of this product’s software. Check the version when updates for this product’s software are released,

etc.

Also displays the version of the lens if a lens compatible with firmware updates is attached.

The version of the Mount Adaptor is displayed in the lens area if a Mount Adaptor compatible with firmware updates is

attached.

Note

Updating can be performed only when the battery level is

(3 remaining battery bars) or more. Use a sufficiently charged

battery pack.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Version].

662

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Save/Load Settings

You can save/load camera settings to/from a memory card. You can also load settings from another camera of the same

model.

Menu item details

Save:

Saves the current settings of this camera to a memory card.

Load:

Loads the settings from a memory card to this camera.

Delete:

Deletes the settings saved on a memory card.

Settings that cannot be saved

The following setting parameters cannot be saved using the [Save/Load Settings] function. (Menu items without setting

parameters, such as, [Focus Magnifier], are not listed.)

Camera Settings1

AF Micro Adj.

White Balance: Custom 1/Custom 2/Custom 3

Face Registration

Camera Settings2

Zoom

Network

FTP Transfer Func. *

Wi-Fi Settings

Wired LAN Setting

Edit Device Name

Import Root Certificate

Security(IPsec)

Playback

View Mode

Setup

Language

Date/Time Setup

Area Setting

IPTC Information

MENU →

(Setup) → [Save/Load Settings] → desired item.

You can save or load settings under [FTP Transfer Func.] by selecting MENU →

(Network) → [FTP Transfer Func.] → [Save/Load FTP

Settings]. For details, refer to the “FTP Help Guide.”

https://rd1.sony.net/help/di/ftp/h_zz/

663

Note

You can save up to 10 settings per memory card. When 10 settings have been already saved, you cannot perform [Save New].

Delete the existing settings using [Delete], or overwrite them.

Only Slot 1 is used for saving or loading data. You cannot change the saving/loading destination slot.

You cannot load settings from a camera of a different model.

You can use this function to save settings registered to [

/ Memory]. However, [Save/Load Settings] is

unavailable when the mode dial is set to 1/2/3 (Memory recall). Set the mode dial to a position other than 1/2/3 before using this

function.

664

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Setting Reset

Resets the product to the default settings. Even if you perform [Setting Reset], the recorded images are retained.

Menu item details

Camera Settings Reset:

Initializes the main shooting settings to the default settings.

Initialize:

Initializes all the settings to the default settings.

Note

Be sure not to eject the battery pack while resetting.

The value set with [AF Micro Adj.] will not be reset even when [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] is performed.

Related Topic

AF Micro Adj.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Setting Reset] → desired setting.

665

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Add Item

You can register the desired menu items to

(My Menu) under MENU.

Hint

You can add up to 30 items to

(My Menu).

Note

You cannot add the following items to

(My Menu).

Any item under MENU →

(Playback)

[View on TV]

Related Topic

Sort Item

Delete Item

Using MENU items

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Add Item].

Select an item that you want to add to

(My Menu) using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control

wheel.

Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

666

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Sort Item

You can rearrange the menu items added to

(My Menu) under MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Sort Item].

Select an item that you want to move using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

Select a destination using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel.

667

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete Item

You can delete menu items added to

(My Menu) of MENU.

Hint

To delete all the items on a page, select MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Page].

You can delete all the items added to

(My Menu) by selecting MENU → (My Menu) → [Delete All].

Related Topic

Delete Page

Delete All

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Item].

Select an item that you want to delete using the top/bottom/left/right sides of the control wheel, and then

press the center to delete the selected item.

668

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete Page

You can delete all the menu items added to a page under

(My Menu) in MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

Delete All

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete Page].

Select a page that you want to delete using the left/right sides of the control wheel, and then press the

center of the control wheel to delete the items.

669

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Delete All

You can delete all the menu items added to

(My Menu) in MENU.

Related Topic

Add Item

Delete Page

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Delete All].

Select [OK].

670

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Display From My Menu

You can set My Menu to appear first when you press the MENU button.

Menu item details

On:

My Menu appears first when you press the MENU button.

Off:

The most recently displayed menu appears when you press the MENU button.

Related Topic

Add Item

MENU →

(My Menu) → [Display From My Menu] → desired setting.

671

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Precautions

Refer also to “Notes on using your camera” in the Instruction Manual (supplied) for this product.

On the data specifications described in this manual

The data on performance and specifications in this manual are based on an ordinary ambient temperature of 25ºC

(77°F), except where otherwise indicated.

For the battery pack, the data are based on a battery pack that was fully charged until the charge lamp turned off.

On operating temperatures

Shooting in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not recommended.

Under high ambient temperatures, the temperature of the camera rises quickly.

When the temperature of the camera rises, the image quality may deteriorate. It is recommended that you wait until

the temperature of the camera drops before continuing to shoot.

Depending on the camera and battery temperature, the camera may become unable to record movies or the power

may turn off automatically to protect the camera. A message will be displayed on the screen before the power turns

off or you can no longer record movies. In this case, leave the power off and wait until the camera and battery

temperature goes down. If you turn on the power without letting the camera and battery cool sufficiently, the power

may turn off again, or you may still be unable to record movies.

Notes on recording for long periods of time or recording 4K movies

Especially during 4K movie shooting, the recording time may be shorter under low temperature conditions. Warm up the

battery pack or replace it with a new battery.

Notes on playing movies on other devices

XAVC S movies can be played back only on XAVC S-supported devices.

Notes on recording/playback

Before you start recording, make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.

Playback of images recorded with your product on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with

other equipment on your product are not guaranteed.

Sony can provide no guarantees in the event of failure to record, or loss of or damage to recorded images or audio

data, due to a malfunction of the camera or recording media, etc. We recommend backing up important data.

Once you format the memory card, all the data recorded on the memory card will be deleted and cannot be restored.

Before formatting, copy the data to a computer or other device.

Backing up memory cards

Data may be corrupted in the following cases. Be sure to back up the data for protection.

When the memory card is removed, the USB cable is disconnected, or the product is turned off in the middle of a

read or write operation.

When the memory card is used in locations subject to static electricity or electrical noise.

Database file error

If you insert a memory card that does not contain an image database file into the product and turn on the power, the

product automatically creates an image database file using some of the memory card’s capacity. The process may

take a long time and you cannot operate the product until the process is completed.

672

If a database file error occurs, export all images to your computer using PlayMemories Home, and then format the

memory card using this product.

Do not use/store the product in the following places

In an extremely hot, cold or humid place

In places such as in a car parked in the sun, the camera body may become deformed and this may cause a

malfunction.

Storing under direct sunlight or near a heater

The camera body may become discolored or deformed, and this may cause a malfunction.

In a location subject to rocking vibration

It may cause malfunctions and an inability to record data. In addition, the recording media may become unusable,

and recorded data may be corrupted.

Near strong magnetic place

In sandy or dusty places

Be careful not to let sand or dust get into the product. This may cause the product to malfunction, and in some cases

this malfunction cannot be repaired.

In places with high humidity

This may cause the lens to mold.

In areas where strong radio waves or radiation are being emitted

Recording and playback may not function correctly.

On moisture condensation

If the product is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, moisture may condense inside or outside the

product. This moisture condensation may cause a malfunction of the product.

To prevent moisture condensation when you bring the product directly from a cold to a warm location, first put it in a

plastic bag and seal it to prevent air from entering. Wait for about an hour until the temperature of the product has

reached the ambient temperature.

If moisture condensation occurs, turn off the product and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. Note that

if you attempt to shoot with moisture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.

Precaution on carrying

Do not hold, hit, or apply excessive force to the following parts, if your camera is equipped with them:

The lens part

The movable monitor part

The movable flash part

The movable viewfinder part

Do not carry the camera with the tripod attached. This may cause the tripod socket hole to break.

Do not sit down in a chair or other place with the camera in the back pocket of your trousers or skirt, as this may

cause malfunction or damage the camera.

Notes on handling the product

Before you connect the cable to the terminal, be sure to check the orientation of the terminal. Then, insert the cable

straight. Do not insert or remove the cable forcefully. This may cause the terminal part to break.

The camera uses magnetic parts including magnets. Do not bring objects affected by magnetism, including credit

cards and floppy disks, close to the camera.

The recorded image may be different from the image you monitored before recording.

On storing

For lens-integrated cameras

Always attach the lens cap when you are not using the camera. (Only for models supplied with a lens cap)

For interchangeable-lens cameras

Always attach the lens front cap or body cap when you are not using the camera. To prevent dust or debris from

getting inside the camera, remove dust from the body cap before attaching it to the camera.

If the camera is dirty after use, clean it. Water, sand, dust, salt, etc. left in the camera may cause a malfunction.

673

Notes on using lenses

When using the power zoom lens, be careful not to get your fingers or any other objects caught in the lens. (Only for

models with a power zoom feature or interchangeable lens cameras)

If you must place the camera under a light source such as sunlight, attach the lens cap to the camera. (Only for

models supplied with a lens cap or interchangeable lens cameras)

When you shoot with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently far away from the angle of view. Otherwise, the sunlight

may enter the focus inside the camera and cause smoke or fire. Even if the sun is slightly away from the angle of

view, it may still cause smoke or fire.

Do not directly expose the lens to beams such as laser beams. That may damage the image sensor and cause the

camera to malfunction.

If the subject is too close, the image may show any dust or fingerprints on the lens. Wipe the lens with a soft cloth,

etc.

Notes on the flash (Only for models with a flash)

Keep your fingers away from the flash. The light-emitting part may get hot.

Remove any dirt from the surface of the flash. Dirt on the surface of the flash may emit smoke or burn due to heat

generated by the emission of light. If there is dirt/dust, clean it off with a soft cloth.

Restore the flash to its original position after using it. Make sure that the flash portion is not sticking up. (Only for

models with a movable flash)

Notes on the Multi Interface Shoe (Only for models with a Multi Interface Shoe)

When attaching or detaching accessories such as an external flash to the Multi Interface Shoe, first turn the power to

OFF. When attaching the accessory, confirm that it is firmly fastened to the camera.

Do not use the Multi Interface Shoe with a commercially available flash that applies voltages of 250 V or more or has

the opposite polarity of the camera. It may cause a malfunction.

Notes on the viewfinder and flash (Only for models with a viewfinder or a flash)

Take care that your finger is not in the way when pushing the viewfinder or flash down. (Only for models with a

movable viewfinder or a movable flash)

If water, dust or sand adheres to the viewfinder or flash unit, it may cause a malfunction. (Only for models with a

movable viewfinder or a movable flash)

Notes on the viewfinder (Only for models with a viewfinder)

When shooting with the viewfinder, you may experience symptoms such as eyestrain, fatigue, travel sickness, or

nausea. We recommend that you take a break at regular intervals when you are shooting with the viewfinder.

In case you may feel uncomfortable, refrain from using the viewfinder until your condition recovers, and consult your

doctor if necessary.

Do not forcibly push down the viewfinder when the eyepiece is pulled out. It may cause a malfunction. (Only for

models with a movable viewfinder and an eyepiece that can be pulled out)

If you pan the camera while looking into the viewfinder or move your eyes around, the image in the viewfinder may

be distorted or the color of the image may change. This is a characteristic of the lens or display device and is not a

malfunction. When you shoot an image, we recommend that you look at the center area of the viewfinder.

The image may be slightly distorted near the corners of the viewfinder. This is not a malfunction. When you want to

see the full composition with all its details, you can also use the monitor.

If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.

Notes on the monitor

Do not press against the monitor. The monitor may be discolored and that may cause a malfunction.

If the monitor has drops of water or other liquids on it, wipe it with a soft cloth. If the monitor stays wet, the surface of

the monitor may change or deteriorate. This may cause a malfunction.

If you use the camera in a cold location, the image may have a trailing appearance. This is not a malfunction.

On image data compatibility

674

This product conforms with DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan

Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

Services and software provided by other companies

Network services, content, and the [operating system and] software of this Product may be subject to individual terms

and conditions and changed, interrupted or discontinued at any time and may require fees, registration and credit card

information.

675

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

On cleaning

Cleaning the lens

Do not use a cleaning solution containing organic solvents, such as thinner, or benzine.

When cleaning the lens surface, remove dust with a commercially available blower. In case of dust that sticks to the

surface, wipe it off with a soft cloth or tissue paper slightly moistened with lens cleaning solution. Wipe in a spiral

pattern from the center to the outside. Do not spray lens cleaning solution directly onto the lens surface.

Cleaning the camera body

Do not touch the parts of the product inside the lens mount, such as a lens signal contact. To clean inside the lens

mount, use a commercially available blower* to blow any dust off.

Cleaning the product surface

Clean the product surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface with a dry cloth. To

prevent damage to the finish or casing:

Do not expose the product to chemical products such as thinner, benzine, alcohol, disposable cloths, insect repellent,

sunscreen or insecticide.

Do not touch the product with any of the above on your hand.

Do not leave the product in contact with rubber or vinyl for a long time.

Cleaning the monitor

If you wipe the monitor firmly using tissue paper, etc., the coating may be scratched.

If the monitor becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, gently remove the dust from the surface, and then clean the

monitor using soft cloth, etc.

Do not use a spray-type blower as doing so may cause a malfunction.

676

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Cleaning Mode

If dust or debris gets inside the camera and adheres to the surface of the image sensor (the part that converts the light to

an electric signal), it may appear as dark spots on the image, depending on the shooting environment. If this happens,

follow the steps below to clean the image sensor.

Hint

For how to check the amount of dust on the image sensor, and for further details on cleaning methods, please refer to the

following URL.

https://support.d-imaging.sony.co.jp/www/support/ilc/sensor/index.php

Note

Clean the image sensor quickly.

A blower is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially available blower.

Make sure that the remaining battery level is

(3 remaining battery icons) or more, before performing the cleaning.

Do not use a spray type blower as it may scatter water droplets inside the camera body.

Do not put the tip of a blower into the cavity beyond the lens mount area, so that the tip of the blower does not touch the image

sensor.

Hold the camera slightly face downward so that the dust falls out.

Confirm that the battery has been charged sufficiently.

MENU →

(Setup) → [Cleaning Mode] → [Enter].

The image sensor vibrates a little to shake off the dust.

Turn off the product following the instructions on the screen.

Detach the lens.

Use the blower to clean the image sensor surface and the surrounding area.

Attach the lens.

677

Do not subject the product to any shock during cleaning.

When cleaning the image sensor with a blower, do not blow too hard. If you blow the sensor too hard, the inside of the product

may be damaged.

If the dust remains even after you cleaned the product as described, consult the service facility.

Related Topic

Troubleshooting

678

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Number of recordable images

When you insert a memory card into the camera and turn the camera on, the number of images that can be recorded

(should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the screen.

Note

When “0” (the number of recordable images) flashes in orange, the memory card is full. Replace the memory card with another

one, or delete images from the current memory card.

When “NO CARD” flashes in orange, it means no memory card has been inserted. Insert a memory card.

The number of images that can be recorded on a memory card

The table below shows the approximate number of images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this

camera. The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing.

The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

[

JPEG Image Size]: [L: 24M]

[

Aspect Ratio]: [3:2]

(Units: Images)

Note

Even if the number of recordable images is higher than 9999 images, “9999” will appear.

The numbers shown are when using a Sony memory card.

JPEG Quality/ File Format 8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB

Standard 1100 4550 9000 36000

Fine 780 3150 6300 25000

Extra fine 430 1700 3500 14000

RAW & JPEG (Compressed RAW)

210 860 1700 6900

RAW (Compressed RAW) 295 1200 2400 9600

RAW & JPEG (Uncompressed RAW)

125 510 1000 4100

RAW (Uncompressed RAW) 150 610 1200 4950

When [

Aspect Ratio] is set to other than [3:2], you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above. (except when

[RAW] is selected)

[

JPEG Quality] when [RAW & JPEG] is selected: [Fine]

679

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recordable movie times

The table below shows the approximate total recording times using a memory card formatted with this camera. The

values may vary depending on the shooting conditions and the type of memory card used.

The recording times for when [

File Format] is set to [XAVC S 4K] and [XAVC S HD] are recording times when

shooting with [

Proxy Recording] set to [Off].

(h (hour), min (minute))

The duration of time available for movie recording varies depending on the file format/recording settings for movies,

memory card, ambient temperature, Wi-Fi network environment, condition of the camera before you start recording,

and condition of the charging of the battery.

The maximum continuous recording time for a single movie shooting session is approximately 13 hours (a product

specification limit).

Note

The recordable time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit-Rate), which automatically adjusts

image quality depending on the shooting scene. When you record a fast-moving subject, the image is clearer but the recordable

time is shorter because more memory is required for recording. The recordable time also varies depending on the shooting

conditions, the subject or the image quality/size settings.

The times shown are recordable times using a Sony memory card.

Notes on continuous movie recording

8 GB 32 GB 64 GB 256 GB

XAVC S 4K 30p 100M/25p 100M 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min

XAVC S 4K 30p 60M/25p 60M 10 min 55 min 2 h 8 h 5 min

XAVC S 4K 24p 100M*/– 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min

XAVC S 4K 24p 60M*/– 10 min 55 min 2 h 8 h 5 min

XAVC S HD 120p 100M/100p 100M 8 min 35 min 1 h 15 min 5 h 5 min

XAVC S HD 120p 60M/100p 60M 10 min 55 min 2 h 8 h 5 min

XAVC S HD 60p 50M/50p 50M 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h

XAVC S HD 60p 25M/50p 25M 30 min 2 h 20 min 4 h 45 min 19 h 25 min

XAVC S HD 30p 50M/25p 50M 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h

XAVC S HD 30p 16M/25p 16M 50 min 3 h 35 min 7 h 20 min 29 h 55 min

XAVC S HD 24p 50M*/– 15 min 1 h 10 min 2 h 25 min 10 h

AVCHD 60i 24M(FX)/50i 24M(FX) 40 min 2 h 55 min 6 h 24 h 15 min

AVCHD 60i 17M(FH)/50i 17M(FH) 55 min 4 h 5 min 8 h 15 min 33 h 15 min

Only when [NTSC/PAL Selector] is set to NTSC.

680

High-quality movie recording and high-speed continuous shooting require large amounts of power. Therefore, if you

continue to shoot, the temperature inside the camera will rise, especially that of the image sensor. In such cases, the

camera will turn off automatically because the surface of the camera is heated to a high temperature or the high

temperature affects the quality of the images or the internal mechanism of the camera.

The duration of time available for continuous movie recording when the camera records with the default settings after

the power has been turned off for a while is as follows. The values indicate the continuous time from when the

camera starts recording until the camera stops recording.

Ambient temperature: 20°C (68°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 60 minutes

Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 60 minutes

Ambient temperature: 30°C (86°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 60 minutes

Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 60 minutes

Ambient temperature: 40°C (104°F)

Continuous recording time for movies (HD): Approx. 60 minutes

Continuous recording time for movies (4K): Approx. 30 minutes

[Auto Power OFF Temp.]: [Standard]

HD: XAVC S HD (60p 50M/50p 50M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)

4K: XAVC S 4K (24p 60M/25p 60M, when the camera is not connected via Wi-Fi)

The duration of time available for movie recording varies with the temperature, file format/record setting for movies,

Wi-Fi network environment, or condition of the camera before you start recording. If you frequently recompose or

shoot images after the power is turned on, the temperature inside the camera will rise and the recording time

available will be shorter.

If the

icon appears, the temperature of the camera has risen.

If the camera stops movie recording due to a high temperature, leave it for some time with the power turned off. Start

recording after the temperature inside the camera drops fully.

If you observe the following points, you will be able to record movies for longer periods of time.

Keep the camera out of direct sunlight.

Turn the camera off when it is not being used.

When [

File Format] is set to [AVCHD], the file size of movies is limited to approx. 2 GB. If the movie file size

reaches approx. 2 GB during recording, a new movie file will be created automatically.

Related Topic

Battery life and number of recordable images

681

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Using the battery charger abroad

You can use the battery charger (supplied) in any country or region where the power supply is within 100 V to 240 V AC

and 50 Hz/60 Hz.

Depending on the country/region, a converting plug adaptor may be needed to connect to a wall outlet (wall socket).

Consult a travel agency, etc., and prepare one in advance.

Note

Do not use an electronic voltage transformer as doing so may cause a malfunction.

682

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

AVCHD format

The AVCHD format was developed for high-definition digital video cameras when recording an HD (High-Definition)

signal using high-efficiency compression coding technology. The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is used to compress video

data, and the Dolby Digital or Linear PCM system is used to compress audio data.

The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format is capable of compressing images at higher efficiency than that of the conventional

image compressing format.

As the AVCHD format uses compression coding technology, the picture may be unstable in scenes where the screen,

angle of view, or brightness, etc. change drastically, but this is not a malfunction.

683

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

License

Notes on the License

This product comes with software that are used based on licensing agreements with the owners of that software. Based

on requests by the owners of copyright of these software applications, we have an obligation to inform you of the

following. Licenses (in English) are recorded in the internal memory of your product. Establish a Mass Storage

connection between the product and a computer to read licenses in the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A

CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO

(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”)

AND/OR

(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR

WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.

NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE

OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.

SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

On GNU GPL/LGPL applied software

The software that is eligible for the following GNU General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “GPL”) or GNU

Lesser General Public License (hereinafter referred to as “LGPL”) are included in the product.

This informs you that you have a right to have access to, modify, and redistribute source code for these software

programs under the conditions of the supplied GPL/LGPL.

Source code is provided on the web.

Use the following URL to download it.

http://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/

We would prefer you do not contact us about the contents of source code.

684

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Specifications

Camera

[System]

Camera Type

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

Lens

Sony E-mount lens

[Image sensor]

Image format

35 mm full frame (35.6 mm x 23.8 mm), CMOS image sensor

Effective pixel number of camera

Approx. 24 200 000 pixels

Total pixel number of camera

Approx. 28 300 000 pixels

[SteadyShot]

System

In-camera sensor shift image stabilization system

[Anti-Dust]

System

Charge protection coating on optical filter and image sensor shift mechanism

[Auto focus system]

Detection system

Phase-detection system/Contrast detection system

Sensitivity Range

–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent, F2.0)

AF illuminator

Approx. 0.3 m to 3.0 m (When using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS)

[Electronic Viewfinder]

Type

1.3 cm (0.5 type) Electronic Viewfinder

Total number of dots

3 686 400 dots

Frame coverage

100%

Magnification

Approx. 0.78× with 50 mm lens at infinity, –1 m

–1

Eye Point

Approx. 23 mm from the eyepiece and approx. 18.5 mm from the eyepiece frame at –1 m

–1

Diopter Adjustment

–4.0 m

–1

to +3.0 m

–1

[Monitor]

LCD monitor

7.5 cm (3.0 type) TFT drive, touch panel

685

Total number of dots

1 440 000 dots

[Exposure control]

Metering method

1 200-zone evaluative metering

Metering Range

–3 EV to +20 EV (at ISO 100 equivalent with F2.0 lens)

ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)

Still images: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 50, maximum ISO 204 800), [ISO AUTO] (ISO 100 to

6 400, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)

Movies: ISO 100 to ISO 51 200 equivalent (Extended ISO: Minimum ISO 100, maximum ISO 102 400), [ISO AUTO] (ISO

100 to ISO 6 400 equivalent, Maximum/Minimum can be set.)

Exposure compensation

±5.0 EV (switchable between 1/3 EV and 1/2 EV steps)

When using exposure compensation dial: ±3.0 EV (1/3 EV step)

[Shutter]

Type

Electronically-controlled, vertical-traverse, focal-plane type

Speed range

Still images (when shooting with the electronic shutter): 1/32 000 second* to 30 seconds (up to 1/8 second in continuous

shooting)

*Available only in the M (Manual Exposure) and S (Shutter Priority) modes.

Still images (when shooting with the mechanical shutter): 1/8 000 second to 30 seconds, BULB

Movies: 1/8 000 second to 1/4 second (1/3 EV step)

1080 60i-compatible devices: up to 1/60 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/30 second in Auto slow shutter mode)

1080 50i-compatible devices: up to 1/50 second in AUTO mode (up to 1/25 second in Auto slow shutter mode)

Flash sync speed

1/250 second (when using a flash manufactured by Sony)

[Continuous shooting]

Continuous shooting speed

: Maximum of approx. 20 images per second/ : Maximum of approx. 10 images per second/ : Maximum

of approx. 5 images per second

Based on our measurement conditions. The speed of continuous shooting can be slower, depending on the shooting

conditions.

[Recording format]

File format

JPEG (DCF Ver. 2.0, Exif Ver. 2.31, MPF Baseline) compliant, RAW (Sony ARW 2.3 format)

Movie (XAVC S format)

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC S ver.1.0 format compliant

Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Audio: LPCM 2ch (48 kHz 16 bit)

Movie (AVCHD format)

AVCHD format Ver. 2.0 compatible

Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Audio: Dolby Digital 2ch, equipped with Dolby Digital Stereo Creator

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

[Recording media]

SD cards

[Slot]

SLOT 1/SLOT 2

686

Slot for SD cards (UHS-I and UHS-II compatible)

Supports operations between two memory cards.

[Input/output terminals]

USB Type-C terminal

SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.2 Gen 1)

Multi/Micro USB Terminal*

Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0)

HDMI

HDMI type D micro jack

(Microphone) terminal

Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack

(Headphones) terminal

Ø 3.5 mm Stereo mini jack

LAN terminal

(Flash sync) terminal

[Power, general]

Rated input

7.2 V

Power consumption (while shooting)

Using an FE 28-70 mm F3.5-5.6 OSS

When using the viewfinder: Approx. 3.9 W

When using the monitor: Approx. 2.9 W

Operating temperature

0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)

Storage temperature

–20 to 55°C (–4 to 131°F)

Dimensions (W/H/D) (Approx.)

128.9 × 96.4 × 77.5 mm

128.9 × 96.4 × 67.3 mm (from grip to monitor)

5 1/8 × 3 7/8 × 3 1/8 in.

5 1/8 × 3 7/8 × 2 3/4 in. (from grip to monitor)

Mass (Approx.)

678 g (1 lb 8 oz) (including battery pack, SD card)

Microphone

Stereo

Speaker

Monaural

Exif Print

Compatible

DPOF

Compatible

PRINT Image Matching III

Compatible

[Wireless LAN]

WW942051 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format

IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac

Frequency band

2.4 GHz / 5 GHz

Security

WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

Connection method

Supports Micro USB compatible devices.

687

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual

Access method

Infrastructure mode

WW485782 (see name plate on the bottom of camera)

Supported format

IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Frequency band

2.4 GHz

Security

WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

Connection method

Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)/Manual

Access method

Infrastructure mode

[NFC]

Tag type

NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant

[Bluetooth communications]

Bluetooth standard Ver. 4.1

Frequency band

2.4 GHz

Battery charger BC-QZ1

Rated input

100 – 240 V

, 50/60 Hz, 0.38 A

Rated output

8.4 V

, 1.6 A

Rechargeable battery pack NP-FZ100

Rated voltage

7.2 V

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

688

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Trademarks

XAVC S and

are registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.

AVCHD and AVCHD logotype are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.

iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Blu-ray Disc™ and Blu-ray™ are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

USB Type-C™ and USB-C™ are trademarks of USB Implementers Forum.

Dolby, Dolby Audio and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google LLC.

Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are registered trademarks or trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Sony Corporation is under license.

QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.

In addition, system and product names used in this manual are, in general, trademarks or registered trademarks of

their respective developers or manufacturers. However, the ™ or ® marks may not be used in all cases in this

manual.

689

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

List of default setting values

The following are the default setting values.

To reset settings to the default values

Select MENU→

(Setup) → [Setting Reset] → [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize] → [Enter].

The items that can be reset using [Camera Settings Reset] are limited. See the following tables. If you select [Initialize],

all the settings of the camera will be reset to the default values.

Camera Settings1

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

File Format JPEG

RAW File Type Compressed

JPEG Quality Fine

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]) L: 24M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]) L: 21M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]) L: 20M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to[1:1]) L: 16M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [3:2]

recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

L: 10M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]

recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

L: 9.2M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [16:9]

recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

L: 8.7M

JPEG Image Size (when [ Aspect Ratio] is set to [1:1]

recording in the APS-C-equivalent size)

L: 6.9M

Aspect Ratio 3:2

APS-C/Super 35mm Auto ―

Long Exposure NR On

High ISO NR Normal

Color Space sRGB

Lens Comp. (Shading Comp.) Auto ―

Lens Comp. (Chromatic Aberration Comp.) Auto ―

Lens Comp. (Distortion Comp.) Off ―

Self-timer Type

Self-

timer(Single)

690

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Bracket Settings (Bracket Type) Cont. Bracket

Bracket Settings (Selftimer during Bracket) Off

Bracket Settings (Bracket order) 0→-→+

Interval Shoot Func. (Interval Shooting) Off

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Start Time) 1 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Shooting Interval) 3 Sec

Interval Shoot Func. (Number of Shots) 30

Interval Shoot Func. (AE Tracking Sensitivity) Mid

Interval Shoot Func. (Shutter Type in Interval)

Electronic

Shutter

Interval Shoot Func. (Shoot Interval Priority) Off

/ Recall ― ―

/ Memory ― ―

Select Media Slot 1

Reg. Custom Shoot Set ― ―

Priority Set in AF-S

Balanced

Emphasis

―

Priority Set in AF-C

Balanced

Emphasis

―

Focus Area Wide

Focus Settings ―

Focus Area Limit ―

Switch V/H AF Area Off

AF Illuminator Auto

Face/Eye AF Set. (Face/Eye Priority in AF) On

Face/Eye AF Set. (Subject Detection) Human

Face/Eye AF Set. (Right/Left Eye Select) Auto

Face/Eye AF Set. (Face/Eye Frame Display) Off

Face/Eye AF Set. (Animal Eye Display) On

AF Tracking Sens. 3(Standard)

Aperture Drive in AF Standard ―

AF w/ shutter On ―

Pre-AF Off ―

Eye-Start AF Off ―

691

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

AF Area Registration Off ―

Del. Regist. AF Area ― ―

Focus Frame Color White ―

AF Area Auto Clear Off ―

Disp. cont. AF area On ―

Phase Detect. Area Off ―

Circ. of Focus Point

Does Not

Circulate

AF Micro Adj.* (AF Adjustment Set.)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]

or [Initialize].

Off ―

AF Micro Adj.* (Clear)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]

or [Initialize].

― ―

AF Micro Adj.* (amount)

* This item is not reset even if you select [Camera Settings Reset]

or [Initialize].

±0 ―

Exposure Comp. ±0.0

Reset EV Comp. Reset ―

ISO Setting (ISO) ISO AUTO

ISO Setting (ISO Range Limit)

ISO 50 – ISO

204800

ISO Setting (ISO AUTO Min. SS) Standard

Metering Mode Multi

Face Priority in Multi Metering On

Spot Metering Point Center

Exposure step 0.3EV ―

AEL w/ shutter Auto ―

Exposure Std. Adjust ±0.0 ―

Flash Mode Autoflash

Flash Comp. ±0.0

Exp.comp.set Ambient&flash ―

Wireless Flash Off

Red Eye Reduction Off

White Balance Auto

692

Camera Settings2

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Priority Set in AWB Standard

DRO/Auto HDR

D-Range

Optimizer: Auto

Creative Style Standard

Picture Effect Off

Shutter AWB Lock Off

Focus Magnifier ―

Focus Magnif. Time No Limit ―

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0 ―

AF in Focus Mag. On ―

MF Assist On ―

Peaking Setting (Peaking Display) Off ―

Peaking Setting (Peaking Level) Mid ―

Peaking Setting (Peaking Color) White ―

Anti-flicker Shoot. Off

Face Registration ― ―

Regist. Faces Priority On

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Exposure Mode Program Auto

File Format XAVC S HD

Record Setting (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S

4K])

24p 60M/25p 60M

Record Setting (when [ File Format] is set to [XAVC S

HD])

60p 50M/50p 50M

Record Setting (when [ File Format] is set to [AVCHD])

60i 17M(FH)/50i

17M(FH)

S&Q Settings ( Record Setting) 30p/25p

S&Q Settings ( Frame Rate) 120fps/100fps

Proxy Recording Off

AF drive speed Normal

AF Tracking Sens. Standard

693

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Auto Slow Shutter On

Picture Effect Off

Initial Focus Mag. x1.0 ―

Audio Recording On

Audio Rec Level 26

Audio Level Display On ―

Audio Out Timing Live

Wind Noise Reduct. Off

Marker Display Off ―

Marker Settings (Center) Off ―

Marker Settings (Aspect) Off ―

Marker Settings (Safety Zone) Off ―

Marker Settings (Guideframe) Off ―

Video Light Mode Power Link ―

Movie w/ shutter Off ―

Shutter Type Auto ―

e-Front Curtain Shutter On ―

Release w/o Lens Enable ―

Release w/o Card Enable ―

SteadyShot On

SteadyShot Settings (SteadyShot Adjust.) Auto

SteadyShot Settings (SteadyS. Focal Len.) (when [SteadyShot

Adjust.] is set to [Manual])

8mm

Zoom ― ―

Zoom Setting Optical zoom only ―

Zoom Ring Rotate Left(W)/Right(T) ―

DISP Button (Monitor) Display All Info. ―

DISP Button (Finder) Level ―

FINDER/MONITOR Auto ―

Finder Frame Rate High ―

Zebra Setting (Zebra Display) Off ―

Zebra Setting (Zebra Level) 70 ―

Grid Line Off ―

694

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Exposure Set. Guide Off ―

Live View Display Setting Effect ON ―

Shoot. Start Disp. Off ―

Shoot. Timing Disp. On: Type1 ―

Cont. Shoot. Length Not Displayed ―

Auto Review Off ―

Custom Key (Control Wheel) Not set ―

Custom Key (Custom Button 1) White Balance ―

Custom Key (Custom Button 2) Focus Area ―

Custom Key (Custom Button 3) Shutter Type ―

Custom Key (Custom Button 4)

Touch Operation

Select

―

Custom Key (Multi-Slc Center Btn) Focus Standard ―

Custom Key (Center Button) Not set ―

Custom Key (Left Button) Not set ―

Custom Key (Right Button) ISO ―

Custom Key (Down Button) Not set ―

Custom Key (AEL Button) AEL hold ―

Custom Key (AF-ON Button) AF On ―

Custom Key (Focus Hold Button) Focus Hold ―

Custom Key (Control Wheel)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 1)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 2)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 3)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 4)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Multi-Slc Center Btn)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Center Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Left Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

695

Network

To reset the items for [Network] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Reset Network Set.]. These items are not reset

to the default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items

Default setting

value

Resettable using [Camera

Settings Reset]

Custom Key (Right Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Down Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (AEL Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (AF-ON Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Focus Hold Button)

Follow Custom (

)

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 1)

Follow Custom (

/ )

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 2)

Follow Custom (

/ )

―

Custom Key (Custom Button 3) Protect ―

Custom Key (Fn/ Button)

Send to

Smartphone

―

Function Menu Set. ― ―

My Dial Settings ― ―

Dial Setup

Av Tv ―

Av/Tv Rotate Normal ―

Dial Ev Comp Off ―

Function Ring(Lens) Power Focus ―

Func. of Touch Operation Touch Focus ―

MOVIE Button Always ―

Lock Operation Parts Off ―

Audio signals On:all ―

MENU items Default setting value

Send to Smartphone Func. (Send to Smartphone) ―

Send to Smartphone Func. (

Sending Target) Proxy Only

Send to Smartphone Func. (Cnct. during Power OFF) Off

Send to Computer ―

FTP Transfer Func. ―

696

MENU items Default setting value

View on TV ―

Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Ctrl w/ Smartphone) Off

Ctrl w/ Smartphone (

Connection) ―

Ctrl w/ Smartphone (Always Connected) Off

PC Remote Function (PC Remote) Off

PC Remote Function (PC Remote Cnct Method) USB

PC Remote Function (Pairing) ―

PC Remote Function (Wi-Fi Direct Info.) ―

PC Remote Function (Still Img. Save Dest.) PC Only

PC Remote Function (RAW+J PC Save Img) RAW & JPEG

PC Remote Function (PC Save Image Size) Original

Airplane Mode Off

Wi-Fi Settings (WPS Push) ―

Wi-Fi Settings (Access Point Set.) ―

Wi-Fi Settings (Frequency Band) 2.4GHz

Wi-Fi Settings (Display Wi-Fi Info.) ―

Wi-Fi Settings (SSID/PW Reset) ―

Bluetooth Settings (Bluetooth Function) Off

Bluetooth Settings (Pairing) ―

Bluetooth Settings (Disp Device Address) ―

Location Info. Link Set. (Location Info. Link) Off

Location Info. Link Set. (Auto Time Correct.)

(when [Location Info. Link] is set to [On])

Location Info. Link Set. (Auto Area Adjust.)

(when [Location Info. Link] is set to [On])

Bluetooth Rmt Ctrl Off

Wired LAN Settings (IP Address Setting) Auto

Wired LAN Settings (Display Wired LAN Info.) ―

Edit Device Name ―

Import Root Certificate ―

Security(IPsec) (IPsec) Off

Security(IPsec) (Dest. IP Address) ―

Security(IPsec) (Shared Key) ―

Reset Network Set. ―

697

Playback

To reset the items for [Playback] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values

even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

Setup

To reset the items for [Setup] to the default values, select [Initialize]. These items are not reset to the default values even

if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Protect ―

Rotate ―

Delete ―

Rating ―

Rating Set(Custom Key) ―

Specify Printing ―

Voice Memo ―

Voice Memo PB Volume 7

Copy ―

Photo Capture ―

Enlarge Image ―

Enlarge Initial Mag. Standard. Mag.

Enlarge Initial Position Focused Position

Cont. PB for

Interval —

PB Speed for

Interval 5

Slide Show (Repeat) Off

Slide Show (Interval) 3 Sec

Select Playback Media Slot 1

View Mode Date View

Image Index 9 Images

Display as Group Off

Display Rotation Auto

Image Jump Setting (Select Dial) Front Dial

Image Jump Setting (Image Jump Method) One by one

MENU items Default setting value

Monitor Brightness Manual

Viewfinder Bright. Auto

698

MENU items Default setting value

Finder Color Temp. ±0

Volume Settings 7

Delete confirm. "Cancel" first

Power Save Start Time 1 Min

Auto Power OFF Temp. Standard

NTSC/PAL Selector ―

Cleaning Mode ―

Touch Operation Off

Touch Panel/Pad Touch Panel Only

Touch Pad Settings (Operation in Vertical Orientation ) On

Touch Pad Settings (Touch Position Mode) Absolute Position

Touch Pad Settings (Operation Area)

Right 1/2

Demo Mode Off

TC/UB Settings (TC/UB Disp. Setting) Counter

TC/UB Settings (TC Preset) 00:00:00.00

TC/UB Settings (UB Preset) 00 00 00 00

TC/UB Settings (TC Format) DF

TC/UB Settings (TC Run) Rec Run

TC/UB Settings (TC Make) Preset

TC/UB Settings (UB Time Rec) Off

IR Remote Ctrl Off

HDMI Settings (HDMI Resolution) Auto

HDMI Settings (

24p/60p Output) 60p

HDMI Settings (HDMI Info. Display) On

HDMI Settings (

TC Output) Off

HDMI Settings (

REC Control) Off

HDMI Settings (CTRL FOR HDMI) On

4K Output Select Memory Card+HDMI

USB Connection Auto

USB LUN Setting Multi

USB Power Supply On

Language ―

Date/Time Setup ―

699

My Menu

To reset the items for [My Menu] to the default values, select [Initialize] or [Delete All]. These items are not reset to the

default values even if you select [Camera Settings Reset].

MENU items Default setting value

Area Setting ―

IPTC Information (Write IPTC Info) Off

IPTC Information (Register IPTC Info) ―

Write Serial Number Off

Format ―

Rec. Media Settings (Prioritize Rec. Media) Slot 1

Rec. Media Settings (Recording Mode) Standard

Rec. Media Settings (Auto Switch Media) Off

Select REC Folder ―

New Folder ―

File/Folder Settings (File Number) Series

File/Folder Settings (Set File Name) DSC

File/Folder Settings (Folder Name) Standard Form

File Settings (File Number) Series

File Settings (Series Counter Reset) ―

File Settings (File Name Format) Standard

File Settings (Title Name Settings) ―

Recover Image DB*

* This is not performed even when you select [Camera Settings Reset] or [Initialize].

―

Display Media Info. ―

Version ―

Certification Logo ―

Save/Load Settings ―

Setting Reset ―

MENU items Default setting value

Add Item ―

700

MENU items Default setting value

Sort Item ―

Delete Item ―

Delete Page ―

Delete All ―

Display From My Menu Off

701

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Troubleshooting

If you experience trouble with the product, try the following solutions.

Related Topic

Setting Reset

Remove the battery pack, wait for about one minute, re-insert the battery pack, then turn on the power.

Initialize the settings.

Consult your dealer or local authorized service facility. Additional information on this product and answers

to frequently asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.

https://www.sony.net/

702

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Warning messages

Set Area/Date/Time.

Set the area, date and time. If you have not used the product for a long time, charge the internal rechargeable

backup battery.

Power insufficient.

The image copying or the image sensor cleaning function will not operate because the remaining battery level is too

low. Recharge the battery pack or supply power by connecting the camera with a computer, etc.

Unable to use memory card. Format?

The memory card was formatted on a computer and the file format was modified. Select [Enter] and then format the

memory card. You can use the memory card again, however, all previous data in the memory card is erased. It may

take some time to complete the format. If the message still appears, change the memory card.

Memory Card Error

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Formatting has failed. Format the memory card again.

Unable to read memory card. Reinsert memory card.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

The memory card is damaged.

The terminal section of the memory card is dirty.

Memory card locked.

You are using a memory card with a write-protect switch or a delete-protect switch with the switch set to the LOCK

position. Set the switch to the record position.

Cannot open the shutter since the memory card is not inserted.

No memory card has been inserted into the memory card slot selected in [Prioritize Rec. Media].

To release the shutter without inserting a memory card into the camera, set [Release w/o Card] to [Enable]. In this

case, images will not be saved.

This memory card may not be capable of recording and playing normally.

An incompatible memory card is inserted.

Processing...

When performing noise reduction, the reduction process takes place. You cannot do any further shooting during this

reduction process.

Unable to display.

Images recorded with other products or images modified with a computer may not be displayed.

Processing on the computer such as deletion of the image files may cause inconsistencies in the image database

files. Repair the image database files.

703

Check that a lens is mounted. For an unsupported lens, set "Release w/o Lens" in the menu to "Enable".

The lens is not attached properly, or the lens is not attached. If the message appears when a lens is attached,

reattach the lens. If the message appears frequently, check whether the contacts of the lens and product are clean or

not.

When attaching the product to an astronomical telescope or similar instrument, or using an unsupported lens, set

[Release w/o Lens] to [Enable].

Unable to print.

You tried to mark RAW images with a DPOF mark.

Internal temp. high. Allow it to cool.

The product has become hot because you have been shooting continuously. Turn the power off and cool the product

and wait until the product is ready to shoot again.

You have been recording images for a long time, the product temperature has risen.

The number of images exceeds that for which date management in a database file by the product is possible.

Unable to register to the database file. Import all the images to a computer using PlayMemories Home and recover

the memory card.

Image DataBase File error

There is something wrong in the Image Database File. Select [Setup] → [Recover Image DB].

System Error

Camera Error. Turn power off then on.

Remove the battery pack, and then re-insert it. If the message appears frequently, consult local authorized Sony

service facility.

Image Database File error. Recover?

You cannot record and play back an AVCHD movie because the Image Database File is damaged. Recover the

Image Database File following the on-screen instructions.

Unable to magnify.

Unable to rotate image.

Images recorded with other products may not be enlarged or rotated.

Cannot create more folders.

A folder in the memory card has the first three digits “999.” You cannot create any more folders on this camera.

Related Topic

Notes on memory card

Format

Release w/o Lens

704

705

Help Guide

Interchangeable Lens Digital Camera

ILCE-9M2 α9II

Recommended pages

Auto Switch Media

If you use two memory-card slots, you can automatically switch to recording with the other memory card when the

memory card in use becomes full.

How to tag the location information on the images

You can record the location information on the images. The location information can be acquired via a smartphone.

ILCE-9M2 support information

This website provides basic information about the camera and information regarding compatible lenses and

accessories. (Another window will open.)

706

Sony ILCE-9M2 α9 II full-frame camera with pro capability

Product's Documents

Help Guide

Specifications

Sony ILCE-9M2 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Sony ILCE7M3KB Full-Frame Mirrorless camera

Sony α7R III 42.4 Megapixels 35mm Full Frame Mirrorless Camera With Autofocus

Sony ILCZV-E1L/B Full-frame Interchangeable Lens Mirrorless Vlog Camera

Sony ILCE-7RM2 α7R II Full-Frame Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Camera

Sony ILCE-7M3 Alpha 7 III - Full-frame Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Camera

Sony ILCZVE1/B Alpha ZV-E1 Full-frame Interchangeable Lens Mirrorless Vlog Camera ILCZVE1B